manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255, Service Manual, Page: 121 / 1443

Share
Download
Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 Service Manual Download Page 121

2

2

2-83

2-83

Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Major parts configuration

Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Major parts configuration

Fixing shutter 

motor

Shutter

Fixing cooling fan (front)

(FM5)

Fixing cooling fan (rear)

(FM6)

M27

Fixing shutter position 

sensor (PS32)

Fixing shutter HP 

sensor (PS31)

Parts name

Function / method

---

Film unit

Applying heat and pressure makes the toner image on paper fixed 

(fused).

---

Pressure roller

H1 Fixing heater

Ceramic heater

TH1 Main thermistor 1

To be in contact with the heater

Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise

Main thermistor 2

To be in contact with the film

Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise

Sub thermistor 1

To be in contact with the heater (non-feeding area)

Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise, 

temperature detection / cooling control on the edge

Sub thermistor 2

To be in contact with the heater (non-feeding area)

Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise, 

temperature detection / cooling control on the edge

TP1 Temperature fuse

Noncontact type with the heater

To block AC electric power supply when a failure is detected.

PS30 Fixing pressure sensor Detection of engagement / disengagement of the film unit
PS31 Shutter HP sensor

Detection of shutter’s home position

PS32 Shutter position sensor Detection of shutter’s position
PS37 Internal delivery sensor Jam detection

F-2-116

T-2-49

Summary of Contents for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255

Page 1: ... imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 C5250 C5240 C5235 Series December 3 2015 Revision 9 Product Overvew Technology Periodical Service Parts Replacement and Cleaning Adjustment Troubleshooting Error Jam Alarm Service Mode Installation Appendix ...

Page 2: ...information as the need arises In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies...

Page 3: ...switch closing the front door and closing the delivery unit door which results in supplying the machine with power 2 In the digital circuits 1 is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is High while 0 is used to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically a...

Page 4: ...Cross Sectional View 1 20 Operation 1 21 Power Switch 1 21 Description of Control Panel 1 22 Contents 2 Technology Basic Configuration 2 2 Functional Configuration 2 2 Controller System 2 5 Overview 2 5 Controls 2 12 Service Operations 2 30 Laser Exposure System 2 31 Overview 2 31 Various Controls 2 33 Service Works 2 43 Image Formation System 2 44 Overview 2 44 Controls 2 47 Service work 2 80 Fix...

Page 5: ...2 242 DCM 2 246 DCM 2 246 3 Periodical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts 3 2 Cleaning Parts 3 11 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts 4 2 List of Cover 4 2 List of Main Unit 4 5 Clutch Solenoid 4 10 Switch 4 13 Motor 4 16 Fan 4 22 Sensor 4 25 Heater Other 4 33 PCB 4 36 Conector 4 42 Main Controller 4 81 Removing the HDD 4 81 Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 ...

Page 6: ... the Registration Roller 4 176 Cleaning the Pre registration Guide Assembly 4 176 Cleaning the Transparency Sensor 4 177 Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet 4 177 Cleaning the Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly 4 179 Cleaning the Post fixing Roller 4 179 Cleaning the Fixing Delivery Roller 4 180 Cleaning the Duplex Feed Upper Roller Wheel 4 180 Cleaning the Duplex Feed Lower Rol...

Page 7: ... Startup Failure 6 109 Flow B Control Panel 12V Check Flow 6 111 Flow C Main Controller Analysis Flow 6 114 Flow D All night Power Supply 3 3V System Flow 6 116 Flow E 12V Power Supply System Flow 6 118 Flow F Connector Disconnection Flow 6 121 Reference Activation conditions of the Control Panel Backlight 6 122 Flow G Execution Flow of Startup System Failure Diagnosis 6 123 Procedure A Detailed P...

Page 8: ...ts to Note Before Installation 9 4 Combination Table of Accessory Installation 9 4 Combination of the Options installing to the Right Side of the Host Machine 9 4 Checking the Contents 9 5 Unpacking 9 8 Installation Procedure 9 12 Installing the Scanner 9 12 Installing the Drum Unit 9 12 Fixing the Machine in Place 9 21 Setting the Environment Heater Switch 9 22 Turning the Main Power ON Setting t...

Page 9: ...9 82 Installation Outline Drawing 9 82 Installation Procedure 9 82 Setting Check 9 88 Operation Check 9 88 Voice Guidance Kit F2 9 89 Checking the Contents 9 89 Points to Note before Installation 9 90 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power 9 90 Installation Outline Drawing 9 90 Installation Procedure 9 90 Checking after installation 9 96 Operation Check 9 96 Copy Card Reader F1 9 97 Points to...

Page 10: ...lication 9 171 Stop of MEAP Applications Disabling Download of Disabled License Files and Uninstallation 9 171 User Authentication Information Registered by SSO H Single Sign ON H 9 171 Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data 9 171 Installation Outline Drawing 9 172 TYPE 1 9 173 Checking the Contents 9 173 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power 9 173 Installation Procedure 9 173 I...

Page 11: ... Mirroring Kit has been Installed 9 250 Checking the Contents 9 250 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power 9 252 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power 9 252 Installation Procedure 9 252 Installing the LED Board 9 258 Installing the System Software Using the SST 9 264 Checking the Security Version 9 265 Checking the Security Mark 9 265 Checking after Installation 9 265 Reporting to the System A...

Page 12: ...Mark 9 327 Checking after Installation 9 327 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work 9 328 Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation 9 328 TYPE 11 9 329 Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit has been Installed 9 329 Checking the Contents 9 329 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power 9 332 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power 9 332 Installation Procedure 9 332 Inst...

Page 13: ...ling of Laser System Turn power switch ON Safety of Toner Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery Notes Before it Works Serving Points to Note at Cleaning imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 5250 5240 5235 Series Safety Precautions ...

Page 14: ... means of a warning label Figure If you must open the cover and defeat interlock switches be sure not to enter the laser beam into an eye during the work The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles EN60950 1 Diese Maschine ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet Innerhalb der Maschine wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt und es ist gefährlich wenn dies...

Page 15: ...f deprived of power the HDD can suffer a fault E602 F 0 2 Safety of Toner About Toner The machine s toner is a non toxic material made of plastic iron and small amounts of dye CAUTION Do not throw toner into fire It may cause explosion Toner on Clothing or Skin If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner wipe it off with tissue then wash it off with water Do not use warm water which ...

Page 16: ...nn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt besteht Explosionsgefahr Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen Notes Before it Works Serving CAUTION At servicing be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and disconnect the power plug F 0 3 Points to Note at Cleaning CAUTION When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol be sure to check that the comp...

Page 17: ...1 1 Product Overvew Product Overvew Product Lineup Feature Specification Name of Parts Operation ...

Page 18: ...e F 1 1 Host machine configuration Host machine configuration Printer only Model type C5255 C5250 C5240 C5235 Print Speed BW Color 55 51ppm 50 45ppm 40 35ppm 35 30ppm Positioning High speed high quality Middle Office model imageRUNNER ADVANCE C52 55 A Product category 5X Office model B Print speed unit is ppm print per minutes A B T 1 1 T 1 2 F 1 2 ...

Page 19: ...er 6 Color Image Reader Unit F2 Copyboard Reader 7 Printer Cover C2 8 Copy Tray J1 9 Cassette Heater Unit C1 Deck Heater for Paper Deck Unit B2 10 Paper Deck Unit B2 11 Envelope Feeder Attachment D1 Cassette Attachment for envelope 12 FL Cassette AG1 13 FL Cassette AH1 14 Cassette Heater Unit 37 Cassette Heater for host machine 2 Cassette Pedestal AD2 15 Cassette Feeding Unit AD2 16 Buffer Pass Un...

Page 20: ... 10 HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit C1 11 imagePASS B2 ColorPASS GX400 F 1 4 No Brand name Remarks and condition 12 Additional Memory Type D 512MB 13 Image Data Analyzer Board B1 14 Super G3 FAX Board AE2 15 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board AE1 1 line FAX board is required 16 Super G3 3rd 4th Line Fax Board AE1 1 line FAX board additional 2nd line FAX Board is required A European region is excluded 1...

Page 21: ...able of 1200 dpi Developing Assembly ACR control is adopted Developing Assembly Drum Highly durable drum is High speed support High speed support Low running cost High image quality High image quality High image quality Unit are separated adopted BK only is adopted adopted F 1 5 Features at servicing Improvement on upgrade operation It is possible to upgrade options through the host machine Same a...

Page 22: ...r 52 to 63g m2 Recycled paper 64 to 81g m2 Color paper Pre Punched paper Bond paper Plain paper 64 to 105g m2 Heavy paper 106 to 256g m2 Textured paper Tracking paper Coater paper Labels paper Washi paper Transparency film Tab Paper size upper cassette B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5R LGL LTRR LTR EXEC Custom size Min 139 7mm x 182mm to Max 304 8mm x 390mm K8 K16 K16R Paper size lower cassette A3 B4 A4 A4R B5...

Page 23: ...20 20 0 15 5 20 0 15 5 221 256 T 1 6 Size Mode Paper type Paper basis weight g m2 ImageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 C5250 Cassette Multi purpose tray Cassette Multi purpose tray Color B W Color B W Color B W Color B W A3 LDR 1 sided Plain paper Thin paper 52 81 25 5 27 5 19 5 25 5 27 5 19 5 82 105 20 0 19 5 20 0 19 5 Thick paper 106 163 12 5 9 8 12 5 9 8 164 220 10 0 9 8 10 0 9 8 211 256 6 5 6 5 2 sided P...

Page 24: ...181 9 99 to 139 6 Irregular size 1 2 182 0 to 390 0 Irregular size 1 3 390 1 to 457 2 Irregular size 2 1 139 7 to 181 9 139 7 to 210 0 Irregular size 2 2 182 0 to 390 0 Irregular size 2 3 390 1 to 457 2 Irregular size 3 1 139 7 to 181 9 210 1 to 304 8 Irregular size 3 2 182 0 to 390 0 Irregular size 3 3 390 1 to 457 2 Irregular size 4 1 139 7 to 181 9 304 9 to 320 0 Irregular size 4 2 182 0 to 390...

Page 25: ...9 Yes Yes SRA3 450 0 320 0 Yes Yes 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes EXEC R 266 7 184 1 OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 E OFFICIO 320 0 220 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 B OFFICIO 355 0 216 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 M OFFICIO 341 0 216 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 A OFFICIO 340 0 220 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 A...

Page 26: ...s Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes Yes SRA3 450 0 320 0 Yes Yes 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes EXEC R 266 7 184 1 OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 E OFFICIO 320 0 220 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 B OFFICIO 355 0 216 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 M OFFICIO 341 0 216 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 A OFFICIO 340 0 ...

Page 27: ... 0 320 0 Yes Yes 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes EXEC R 266 7 184 1 OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 E OFFICIO 320 0 220 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 B OFFICIO 355 0 216 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 M OFFICIO 341 0 216 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 A OFFICIO 340 0 220 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 A LTR 220 0 280 0 Y...

Page 28: ...Yes 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes EXEC R 266 7 184 1 OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 E OFFICIO 320 0 220 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 B OFFICIO 355 0 216 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 M OFFICIO 341 0 216 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 A OFFICIO 340 0 220 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 A LTR 220 0 280 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Ye...

Page 29: ... 0 148 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 11x17 431 8 279 4 Yes 1 Yes 1 LGL 355 6 215 9 Yes 1 Yes 1 LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes 1 Yes 1 STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes 1 Yes 1 SRA3 450 0 320 0 Yes Yes 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes Yes EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes 1 Yes 1 EXEC R 266 7 184 1 OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 E OFFICIO 320 0 220 0 B OFFICIO 355 0 216 0 M OFFICIO 341 0 216 0 A OFFICIO 340 0 220 0 A LTR ...

Page 30: ...5R 210 0 148 0 Yes 1 11x17 431 8 279 4 Yes 1 LGL 355 6 215 9 Yes 1 LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes 1 LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes 1 STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes 1 STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes 1 SRA3 450 0 320 0 Yes 1 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes 1 EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes 1 EXEC R 266 7 184 1 OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 E OFFICIO 320 0 220 0 B OFFICIO 355 0 216 0 M OFFICIO 341 0 216 0 A OFFICIO 340 0 220 0 A LTR 220 0 280 0 A LTRR 280 0 220 0 GLTR R ...

Page 31: ...257 0 Yes Yes A5 148 0 210 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 A5R 210 0 148 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 11x17 431 8 279 4 Yes 1 Yes 1 LGL 355 6 215 9 Yes 1 Yes 1 LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes 1 Yes 1 LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes 1 Yes 1 STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes 1 Yes 1 STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes 1 Yes 1 SRA3 450 0 320 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes 1 Yes 1 EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes 1 Yes 1 EXEC R 266 7 184 1 OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 E OFFICIO 320 0 220 0 B OFFICI...

Page 32: ...Yes 1 A5R 210 0 148 0 Yes 1 11x17 431 8 279 4 Yes 1 LGL 355 6 215 9 Yes 1 LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes 1 STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes 1 SRA3 450 0 320 0 Yes 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes 1 EXEC R 266 7 184 1 OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 E OFFICIO 320 0 220 0 B OFFICIO 355 0 216 0 M OFFICIO 341 0 216 0 A OFFICIO 340 0 220 0 A LTR 220 0 280 0 A LTRR 280 0 220 0 GLTR R 2...

Page 33: ... 7 215 9 Yes 1 Yes 1 SRA3 450 0 320 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 EXEC R 266 7 184 1 OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 E OFFICIO 320 0 220 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 B OFFICIO 355 0 216 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 M OFFICIO 341 0 216 0 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 A OFFICIO 34...

Page 34: ...es A4 210 0 297 0 Yes Bond 82 to 90g m2 LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Postcard 164 to 209g m2 Postcard 148 0 100 0 Yes Yes Reply Postcard 200 0 148 0 Yes Yes 4 on 1 Postcard 200 0 296 0 Yes Yes Tab paper 151 to 209g m2 A4 210 0 297 0 Yes Yes LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes Yes Envelope 75 ...

Page 35: ...er4 11 Control Panel 5 Paper Drawer3 12 Rear Cover 6 Paper Drawer2 13 Rear Rower Cover 7 Paper Drawer1 14 Breaker Be sure to perform the following procedure for checking the breaker 1 Turn OFF the main power switch and check that the Control Panel LED is off 2 Using a pen point press the test button of the breaker on the rear side of the machine 3 Check that the breaker switch is OFF O side 4 Retu...

Page 36: ...ser scanner unit BK C 6 Third delivery roller 21 2 side delivery lower roller 36 Laser scanner unit M Y 7 Second third delivery entrance roller 22 Registration roller 37 Developing unit Bk Drum unit Bk 8 2 side entrance roller 23 Bypass feeding roller 38 Developing unit C Drum unit C 9 Primary delivery roller 24 Bypass pick up roller 39 Developing unit M Drum unit M 10 Primary delivery flapper 25 ...

Page 37: ...ent Heater Switch is to supply and shut the power to Cassette Heater and Reader Heater F 1 8 How to turn ON OFF the power and points to note While progress bar is kept displayed at power on HDD access is processing thus never turn OFF the Main Power Switch To turn off the power turn off the Main Power Switch Conventional shutdown sequence operation is not required After power OFF after the Main Po...

Page 38: ...051 5045 5035 5030 Series 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 Control Panel Power Switch 9 ID authentication Key 2 USB Insertion Slot 10 Touch Panel Display 3 Settings Registration Key 11 Screen Brightness Adjustment Dial 4 Counter Check Key 12 FAX Volume Adjustment Key 5 Operation Pen 13 Status Check Stop Key 6 Main Power Lamp 14 Custom Menu Key 7 Error Lamp 15 Main Menu Key 8 Execution Memory ...

Page 39: ...2 2 Technology Technology Basic Configuration Controller System Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing System Pickup Feed System External Auxiliary System MEAP Embedded RDS Updater DCM ...

Page 40: ...er system Fixing system Image formation system Pickup feed system Laser exposure system F 2 1 Basic sequence Sequence at Power On Reader Reader Motor Scanning Lamp HP Sensor SSTBY SREADY Backwarding Forwarding Optical unit position HP Shading position Gain correction Offset correction Backwarding Forwarding Shift shading Fixing shading White plate dust detection control Shading correction HP Shadi...

Page 41: ...val in which the copy print request signal can be accepted T 2 1 Print sequence Reader Start Key ON Reader Motor Scanning Lamp HP Sensor SSTBY SSTBY SREADY SCRW SCFW Backwarding Optical unit position End of the image Forwarding Backwarding Forwarding Forwarding HP Shading HP Shading Stream reading position ON ON Forwarding Backwarding Forwarding Backwarding Printer disengage Fixing heater H3 Fixin...

Page 42: ...ween the completion of the shading correction and switching the Start key ON turning the main power OFF PSTBY Print Standby State An interval in which the copy print request signal can be accepted PRINTR Printer Intial Rotation An interval between the reception of the print request signal and the state the image signal is sent PRINT An interval in which all toner is transferred on the paper and th...

Page 43: ...g high image quality and high functionality Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 Riser PCB Main controller PCB 1 controls the entire system Main controller PCB 2 mainly controls image processing Main controller PCBs 1 and 2 are connected through the riser PCB This configuration improves installability removability of the main controller PCBs Slot in out F 2 6 F 2 7 Specifications configurat...

Page 44: ... rasterizing resolution conversion image binarization delay memory control between drums HDD control I Fs reader FAX USB device Image Processing Sub PCB Image processing Bypass PCB Internal bus connection Remove this PCB when using ColorPASS GX300 server type or imagePASS B2 to be attached to the main unit and install the open I F PCB Riser PCB I F main controller 1 2 main controller HDD main cont...

Page 45: ... Mbit To save data in Settings Registration Mode Service Mode and image data management information in HDD Lithium battery BAT1 For SRAM backup Life approx 10 years The capacity differs according to the location or model F 2 10 T 2 5 I F connector Main controller PCB 1 External I F Internal I F Voice UI Fan LAN USB H Mini USB TPM PCI Coin CC VI Flash Riser J1002 J6 J4 J15 J7 J5 J21 J20 J17 J1025 J...

Page 46: ... name Advanced G3 FAX Board AE1 J1000 Image analysis PCB I F Product name Image Data Analyzer Board A1 J1010 Bypass PCB I F Mount the open I F PCB when using ColorPASS GX300 imagePASS B1 J3003 Reader I F J1020 Image processing sub PCB F 2 12 T 2 7 Function expansion options Main controller PCB1 Voice Operation Voice Guidance PCB Main controller PCB 1 Voice Operation Voice Guidance PCB Name Functio...

Page 47: ...d Box and the distribution server are added User Box same as the existing machine area is 23GB and Advanced Box area is 9GB Advanced Box area can be increased by installing the high capacity HDD option TMP_GEN TMP_PSS FSTDEV APL_SEND APL_MEAP IMG_MNG APL_GEN APL_KEEP APL_LOG FSTCDEV THUMDEV BOOTDEV CRBDEV APL_CDS PDLDEV TMP_FAX Image data User Box Universal data temporary file For PDL spooling FAX...

Page 48: ...e utilized for troubleshooting See the following error code list for the troubleshooting F 2 16 Related Error Codes major error codes Error Code Error description E602 Error in HDD 0001 Failure in recognizing HDD Boot partition BOOTDEV is not found at startup 0002 There is no system software for the main CPU 0006 There is no system software for the sub CPU E604 Failure in memory main controller PC...

Page 49: ...um This sequential processing is called shutdown sequence and was executed on the legacy models manually by holding down the power supply switch on the Control Panel for a specific duration When the main power switch is turned OFF on the main body Main Controller PCB 1 detects this operation and then the shutdown sequence starts executes automatically In addition hardware shutdown sequence exists ...

Page 50: ...HDD HDD writing reading LAN Controller Rendering I F To DC Controller F 2 17 F 2 18 SEND Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 Riser PCB HDD Reader Image processing Resolution conversion Image rotation JPEG compression extension Image data buffer memory Data conversion Tile raster conversion JPEG encode HDD writing reading Network LAN Controller Box Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB ...

Page 51: ...tting ON OFF by default F 2 21 Configuration of Security Information The security functionality behaves differently depending on the TPM setting on the UI This machine provides the two types of TPM settings See the figure below for the security information flow in each setting TPM PCB TPM Key Backup Key for TPM failure Public Key Common Key Password HDD When the TPM setting is ON Backup USB flash ...

Page 52: ...is decodable correctly even after servicing Unlike the case that the TPM setting is set to ON the password information stored in the HDD is initialized when the HDD is replaced or formatted However the password information is maintained in the SRAM TPM Setting for Security Information The security information can be protected with or without TPM by switching between TPM settings in Setting Registr...

Page 53: ...ed only at TPM PCB replacement Unless the key is restored the security information passwords encryption key and certificates cannot be used When the key restoration is failed due to the USB flash drive lost or others Initialize All Data Settings should be executed to reactivate TPM functionality The security may be undermined if the old Setting Registration data are maintained as it is 1 Enable Fu...

Page 54: ...the control panel as well as the main controller PCB CAUTION Ensure to insert only one USB flash drive If the backup job is started with 2 or more USB flash drives connected the message is shown to notify that the backup is failed MEMO The USB flash drive holds the TPM key backup files by serial number Thus backup files for multiple machines can be saved in a USB flash drive 2 Click Back up TPM Ke...

Page 55: ... advice users on the following points The USB flash drive should be securely stored Once the TPM key backup file is saved in the USB flash drive never save the backup file on a server or the like accessible to unanimous users MEMO Name of TPM key backup file The serial number for the machine is automatically assigned as the backup file name 3 Restore of TPM key Procedure is about the same as the b...

Page 56: ...rashed 4 Disable the feature To set OFF for the TPM setting execute Initialize All Data Settings CAUTION Points to note when disabling functionality To disable the use of TPM all data and settings should be initialized If this is executed user information saved in the HDD SRAM is totally cleared Ensure to back up the data before disabling TPM settings List of data to be cleared Data saved in BOX A...

Page 57: ...etting OFF Relevant Error Code TPM PCB 1 Check the TPM PCB connection 2 Replace the TPM PCBs 3 Turn OFF ON the power 4 See the section of Restoring TPM Key to restore the TPM key 5 Turn OFF ON the main power for recovery N A TPM PCB is not in use when the TPM setting is set to OFF Initially E746 0031 is shown on the screen When the power is turned OFF ON after the TPM PCB is replaced E746 0032 is ...

Page 58: ...rd for a file destination of Address Book Yes HDD Password PIN MEAP Authentication information registered by local device authentication via SSO H Yes HDD Certificate Secret Key SSL AMS Device key pair SSL AMS No HDD Certificate Secret Key Signature SEND User key pair No HDD Others User setting information Key information linked to user password No SRAM Password PIN BOX Password for encryption at ...

Page 59: ... 2 14 High capacity HDD Option The HDD capacity mounted on this machine is 160GB as standard Mounting a 2 5 inch 1TB HDD H1 option makes 1TB in HDD capacity High capacity is required in the case of saving large amounts of data with Advanced Box Mounting this option increases capacity for Advanced Box 15GB in the case of 160GB HDD capacity 629GB in the case of 1TB HDD capacity TMP_GEN TMP_PSS FSTDE...

Page 60: ... ir rr ro or ri in ng g K Ki it t 2 2 5 5i in nc ch h 1 1 T TB B H HD DD D H H1 1 2 2 5 5i in nc ch h 1 1 T TB B H HD DD D H H1 1 Ch A Ch B 160 GB Standard 160 GB Option Ch A Ch B 1 TB Option 1 TB Option G F 2 33 Works before using this functionality installation Turn OFF the main power Turn ON the mirroring feature Turn ON the main power Lv 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW W RAID 1 The storage data of the ...

Page 61: ...ed on the LED PCB is blinking If only one HDD is faulty the operation is continued by the other HDD If both two HDDs are faulty E602 error is shown on the control panel to stop the operation F 2 35 List of operation status LED HDD operation statuses are indicated with 4 LEDs mounted on the LED PCB The green LED shows that the operation is normally in progress while the red LED indicates any failur...

Page 62: ...e master HDD is copied rebuilt to the backup HDD The machine can be used under this condition In normal operation In recovery from the trouble Copying data of Master HDD Halt mode Both HDDs are in trouble see 1 In trouble HDD not installed HDD installed not registered HDD disconnected while the mirroring board is in operation With troubles HDD not installed HDD installed not registered HDD disconn...

Page 63: ...me of Mode Status Action for Recovery HDD1 ChA HDD2 ChB Red LED Red LED Mirror Mode Normal at standby Under normal operation Degrade Mode see 1 HDD1 in trouble 1 Check the connection between HDD1 and Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2 2 When the trouble is not recovered replace the HDD1 A HDD2 in trouble 1 Check the connection between HDD2 and Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2 2 When ...

Page 64: ... Master HDD which is accessed firstly after power on 3 For users who intend to use the removable and mirroring functionality concurrently instruct them not to change the removable HDD location in advance Change of HDD locations after power OFF is allowed as specifications only in Mirror Mode Otherwise HDD removal or change of location is not guaranteed 4 The following conditions are required to re...

Page 65: ...ated in a HDD the encryption functionality can be independently enabled Data Encryption Mechanism The encryption board receives signals transmitted from the controller board and encrypts and saves them in the HDD The encryption board receives the encrypted data saved in the HDD to decode and send them to the controller The encryption board can be configured with a HDD and an encryption mirroring b...

Page 66: ... shown to confirm whether to initialize the encryption board Key Clear Key Clear will disable accesses to HDD data permanently Cautions should be taken in Key Clear execution Points to Note in Initialization via SST The screen below is shown when you gain access to SST in safe mode due to E602 2000 Poor board connection also causes this error Check the board connection to seek error recovery Initi...

Page 67: ...encryption key Error in initialization Failed to initialize the encryption processing unit Turn OFF ON the power If the error is not recovered this may be caused by hardware related factors 0201 Failure in the HDD encryption key Error in the encryption processing unit Turn OFF ON the power If the error is not recovered this may be caused by hardware related factors 0202 Failure in the HDD encrypti...

Page 68: ...tem software Restoring the backup data Executing Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust see Chapter 5 HDD Main Controller PCB 1 Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB see Chapter 5 Main controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 Backup of the set registered data Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB Restoring the backup data see Chapter 5 Main controller PCB 2 TPM PCB When TPM setting is O...

Page 69: ...rrection Motor C M33 Laser Scanner Unit 2 BD Sensor C Bk Laser Driver PCB C UN15 Laser Driver PCB Bk UN14 BD Sensor Y M Laser Driver PCB Y UN13 Laser Driver PCB M UN12 Scanner Mirror Scanner Mirror Laser Scanner Unit 1 This machine emits the laser to the image area on the drum negatively charged Non image area Image area Non image area Laser ON Enlarged view F 2 44 F 2 45 Y M C Bk Imaging Lens Ima...

Page 70: ...5240 4 beam for each color imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5240 C5235 2 beam for each color Resolution 1200dpi Motor type Brushless motor Number of motor rotation imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 C5240 Approx 29100rpm imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5240 C5235 Approx 37800rpm Number of scanner mirror facet 6 facet phi 40 Control list Laser ON OFF control Horizontal scanning synchronous control Vertical scanning synchronous co...

Page 71: ...e the scanner mirror by the specified speed BD correction control To correct the gap BD timing gap due to the angle variation of Scanner Mirror Laser shutter control To prevent the laser light from being emitted to the machine inside Image tilt correction control To correct the image tilt in vertical scanning direction this control is operated based on the result of color displacement correction c...

Page 72: ...INTR PRINT LSTR F 2 48 T 2 24 F 2 49 Horizontal scanning synchronous control Purpose This is to align the writing start position in horizontal scanning direction Execution timing Per 1 line Execution time Approx 7 5µs Control detail 1 DC Controller forcibly emits the laser diode on M laser driver PCB by setting the laser control signal of M laser to APC mode Also DC controller forcibly emits the l...

Page 73: ...lign the writing start position in vertical scanning direction Execution timing Per printing Execution time 500ms Control detail 1 When DC Controller receives the print instruction it detects the reference signal Based on this signal it creates the vertical scanning synchronous signal PVREQ and sends to Main Controller 2 Main Controller is synchronized with PVREQ signal and sends VDO signal to DC ...

Page 74: ...pose This is to make the laser light for 1 line consistent amount Execution timing Per each line before image writing Execution time Approx 2 µs Control details 1 DC Controller outputs the laser control signal to the Laser Driver IC on the Laser Driver PCB 2 APC mode is specified to the Laser Driver IC and it forcibly emits the laser diode of each color At the same time each laser driver IC monito...

Page 75: ...er PCB Bk Laser Driver PCB Y Laser M Laser C Laser Bk Laser F 2 54 Laser scanner motor control Purpose This is to rotate the scanner mirror by the specified speed Execution timing At power ON per printing Execution time Approx 3s at power ON approx 1s at printing Control detail 1 DC Controller forcibly rotates the motors in the two Laser Scanner Units 2 It detects the speed detection signal FG1 to...

Page 76: ...the Laser Scanner Unit 1 YM laser is started or print operation is processing if the BD signal cannot be detected after the specified time E100 0300 BD error laser scanner unit 2 When the Laser Scanner Unit 2 CBk laser is started or print operation is processing if the BD signal cannot be detected after the specified time E100 B000 BD error laser scanner unit 1 2 When the Laser Scanner Unit 1 2 is...

Page 77: ...ontrol detail 1 DC Controller measures the BD interval after the constant speed rotation control of Scanner Motor is completed 2 DC Controller calculates the correction value according to the gap of BD interval 3 Based on the foregoing correction value image writing position is corrected BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 BD1 BD2 α α BD3 BD4 BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 VDO VDO VDO VDO START END Scanner motor control finish Cons...

Page 78: ...pened Control detail While the Laser Scanner Motor is operating the Laser Shutter is opened During other period the laser shutter is closed Also the Front Cover Sensor PS18 or the Right Cover Sensor PS20 works together and it stops the output signal of laser driver At the same time if the Front Cover or Right Cover is opened the Shutter is closed and the laser light path is forcibly blocked Those ...

Page 79: ...r PS29 is not in the home position after approx 10 sec from the shutter close operation E0112 0002 Laser shutter motor error operation failure at shutter open If the Laser Shutter Sensor PS29 is still in the home position after approx 10 sec from the shutter open operation F 2 58 Image tilt correction control Purpose This is to prevent the gap of laser emission Execution timing At power ON per tot...

Page 80: ...ens Imaging Lens Skew Correction Motor Arm Arm Arm Arm Cam Cam Cam Arm Cam Cam Photosensitive Drum Skew Correction Motor Position relation of imaging lens and arm Position relation of imaging lens and arm Imaging Lens Photosensitive Drum Skew Correction Motor Imaging Lens Before correction After correction Scanner Mirror Skew Correction Motor Reflection Mirror Imaging Lens Arm Cam F 2 59 F 2 60 ...

Page 81: ...the machine Dust blocking glass cleaning tool Operation at parts replacement N A Points to note at servicing Do not install a used Laser Scanner Unit 2 C Bk laser to the position where a Laser Scanner Unit 1 Y M laser should be installed With this machine yellow laser is used as a reference to control other colors This means that the reference will be changed if the Laser Scanner Unit for YM side ...

Page 82: ... 62 Specifications Item Function Method Photosensitive Drum Material OPC O D of drum 30mm Cleaning Cleaning blade Process speed imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 246mm s imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5045 246mm s imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035 5030 160mm s Drum heater Mounted with Bk drum as a standard Assigned as an option for color drums Developing assembly Developing cylinder 1pc single developing Developing method ...

Page 83: ...arge the surface of photosensitive drum to be uniformed negative potential 3 Laser exposure To create static latent image on the surface of photosensitive drum by emitting laser light image exposure laser exposure area becomes image area Developing block 4 Developing To attach negatively charged toner from the developing cylinder to the photosensitive drum by non negative 2 component jumping devel...

Page 84: ... Roller Secondary transfer bias DC Approx 3kV Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Secondary transfer cleaning bias DC Approx 1 0kV Aforementioned biases are created by 3 HVT and are supplied to the loads used in the printing process Y M C Bk Y M C Bk HVT1 UN16 HVT2 UN17 HVT3 UN18 UN43 UN44 UN45 UN46 Secondary transfer outer roller Secondary transfer inner roller Primary charging roller Developing AC D...

Page 85: ...ontrol D half control ARCDAT control PASCAL control Color displacement correction control ATVC control Toner supply Toner cap automatic opening control Toner level detection toner supply control Waste toner feeding Waste toner full level detection Waste toner case presence detection T 2 29 Pre exposure Pre exposure control Removing residual potential on the photosensitive drum before executing the...

Page 86: ...d potential The primary charging bias AC DC negative generated by HVT1 2 PCB is applied to the primary charging roller DC controller UN1 AC DC negative HVT1 2 UN16 17 Photosensitive drum Primary charging roller Cleaning brush roller Discharge current control To apply optimal primary charging bias according to the environmental change or use condition of photosensitive drum Execution timing 1 When ...

Page 87: ...E061 0XE0 The change in current level for Drum film thickness detection is too much compared to the previous time E061 0XF0 Abnormal initial current level at the time of initialization of the Drum film thickness large current level E061 0XF1 Abnormal initial current level at the time of initialization of the Drum film thickness small current level x indicates the corresponding color 0 Y 1 M 2 C 3 ...

Page 88: ...e To apply DC bias to the electrode plate to increase retention strength of toner on the developing cylinder Drive configuration Parts name Function M5 to M8 Developing motor To rotate the developing cylinder and the toner feeding screw TS5 to TS8 ATR sensor To detect the ratio of developer toner carrier in the developing assembly F 2 71 T 2 30 T 2 31 Developing bias control To create toner image ...

Page 89: ...me based on the ATR control result Return screw Toner feeding screw A Toner feeding screw B Flow of toner Toner feeding screw C ATR sensor Toner discharge outlet Toner supply inlet Toner supply inlet Return screw Toner feeding screw A Toner feeding screw B Toner feeding screw C Toner discharge outlet F 2 73 Toner blocking bias control This control prevents scattering of toner on the developing cyl...

Page 90: ... photosensitive drum Primary charging roller To make the surface of photosensitive drum to be evenly charged potential Charging cleaning brush roller To remove residual toner on the primary charging roller Drum cleaning blade To remove residual toner on the photosensitive drum Waste toner screw To feed residual toner F 2 75 T 2 32 Drive configuration Pre exposure LED light guide Photosensitive dru...

Page 91: ...le No drum unit is shown on the control panel HVT1 UN16 DC controller UN1 Primary charging roller Current monitoring signal Primary charging AC Y M C Bk HVT2 UN17 Primary charging AC Current monitoring signal F 2 77 Old new detection of drum unit To detect whether the drum unit is new or old Detection timing When the power is turned ON Detection description To check state of the fuse that is attac...

Page 92: ...is stored in the SRAM IC2 of the DC Controller The drum life value can be checked from the service mode Target drum Detection items Data storage location Reference service mode Unit Color drum YMC Primary Charging DC Bias Monitor value For details refer to Drum film thickness detection SRAM IC2 of the DC Controller Drum counter life display COPIER COUNTER LF Y DRM LF M DRM LF C DRM LF Bk drum Drum...

Page 93: ...sette Heater in the same manner For details refer to Cassette Heater Control in Pickup Feed System Photosensitive drum Drum heater F 2 79 Drum rotation speed control This control is performed to keep a uniform drum rotation speed in order to increase accuracy of the image position color displacement Execution timing 1 The drum rotates driven by the drum motors M1 to M4 2 There is an encoder on the...

Page 94: ...ary transfer F 2 81 T 2 35 Drive configuration M13 M14 M15 Secondary transfer outer roller Patch sensor Front Center Rear UN47 UN48 UN49 Primary transfer roller Bk Primary transfer roller C Primary transfer roller M Primary transfer roller Y Tension roller Primary transfer auxiliary roller ITB cleaning blade Waste toner feeding screw Drive roller steering roller ITB motor ITB displacement control ...

Page 95: ...tor M15 rotates the cam 2 Rotation of the cam moves the support arm up down which separates disengages the color primary transfer roller from the ITB 3 Position of the primary transfer roller is detected by the Primary transfer detachment sensor PS22 23 MEMO At standby the color s primary transfer roller is disengaged Primary transfer roller C Primary transfer disengagement sensor 1 PS22 Primary t...

Page 96: ...t value of environment sensor 1 UN22 HVT2 UN17 DC controller UN1 DC DC DC DC Primary transfer roller Bk Primary transfer roller C Primary transfer roller M Primary transfer roller Y F 2 84 Secondary transfer bias control This control transfers toner on the ITB to the paper The secondary transfer bias DC which has been generated by HVY3 UN18 is applied to the secondary transfer outer roller Bias va...

Page 97: ... displacement sensor5 PS58 Sensor flag F 2 86 Related Error Codes E075 0002 failure in ITB steering position sensor E075 0003 failure in ITB displacement control full displacement to the rear E075 0004 failure in ITB displacement sensor E075 0005 Error failure in searching ITB steering HP E075 0103 failure in ITB displacement control full displacement to the front MEMO Following table shows detect...

Page 98: ...on 3 After executing image stabilization control creating patch image on the ITB Control description The secondary transfer bias see Note 1 which has been generated by HVT3 UN18 is applied to the secondary transfer outer roller Residual toner on the secondary transfer outer roller is attached to the ITB and then collected by the ITB cleaning unit Caution Both positive bias and negative bias are ap...

Page 99: ...ary transfer inner roller Secondary transfer outer roller Post secondary transfer static eliminator MEMO On this machine by reducing the diameter of Secondary Transfer Inner Roller contact surface of the paper with the ITB is reduced This prevents the thin paper from sticking onto the ITB F 2 89 Drum cleaning Overview To clean residual toner on the photosensitive drum Residual toner on the drum is...

Page 100: ...er unit Drum film thickness detection ATR control Toner Toner Toner Toner D max control PASCAL control D half control ARCDAT control Color displacement correction control ATVC control Main controller 2 DC controller UN1 Y M C Bk Patch sensor Front Center Rear UN47 UN48 UN49 Control timing Execution items for image stabilization control differ according to the environment or the condition of image ...

Page 101: ...Model A approx 4 1 Model B approx 8 7 Yes Yes Every 250 sheets during printing Model A approx 3 3 Model B approx 4 3 Yes Yes Every 700 sheets during printing Model A approx 6 8 Model B approx 12 7 Yes Yes Yes Every 360 sheets Model A or every 240 sheets Model B during printing Model A approx 6 1 Model B approx 9 3 Yes Yes Every 1000 of accumulated image ratio or every 200 sheets during printing Mo...

Page 102: ... the drum film thickness detection data 4 The determined data is compared to the existing drum film thickness detection data kept in the other area in SRAM If there is any difference between both data the newly determined data is overwritten on SRAM as the latest drum film thickness detection data If there is no difference in both data the newly determined data is not overwritten but disposed HVT1...

Page 103: ...et density Detection details 1 DC controller creates the patch pattern in corresponding color on the ITB 2 DC Controller measures the patch density with the Patch Sensor center UN49 Patch sensor Center UN49 Developing cylinder Primary charging roller Primary charging DC bias Laser Power output Photosensitive drum Developing DC bias Patch image date DC controller UN1 D max control ITB HVT2 UN17 HVT...

Page 104: ... for D half Standard data for ARCDAT DC Controller UN1 Patch Sensor Center Patch Sensor Center Patch Sensor Center Target Density Target density value Target density value Paper Paper Reader Reader Execution timing When executing calibration during execution of Auto gradation correction Full correction in User Mode Control description 1 When the specified conditions are satisfied the main controll...

Page 105: ...n characteristics 0 100 Density data D CON Data output M CON 100 DC controller UN1 Patch patterns 4 types are printed on paper Printed test patterns are scanned by the reader Y PASCAL correction table F 2 97 D half control This control determines optimal image gradation Execution timing 1 At replacement of the Drum Unit and Developing Assembly 2 At last rotation on a specified print basis 3 At pow...

Page 106: ...Power output F 2 98 Start Patch pattern is created Patch scanning Patch sensor Center UN49 Actual gradation characteristics Ideal gradation characteristics 0 100 Density data D CON Y1 Y2 Data output V CON Y9 Y10 Main controller2 DC controller UN1 Main controller2 Output of density data 100 Actual gradation characteristics Ideal gradation characteristics 0 100 Density data D CON Data output V CON 1...

Page 107: ...rol This control obtains ideal gradation characteristics while reducing down time Execution timing 1 When replacing a drum unit or developing assembly 2 At post rotation every time the total reaches 25 prints when continuously making prints printing is interrupted for every 100 prints to execute this control Control details 1 DC Controller creates the patch pattern of each color Y M C Bk on the IT...

Page 108: ... INT SIN α α Comparison of measurement data SIN and reference data INT Data output V CON Density data D CON Gradation characteristics after correction Current gradation characteristics Measurement data SIN transmission Patch pattern formation Data output D CON Density data D CON Offset value alpha determination i e difference between SIN and INT Inclusion of result in D half correction table Patch...

Page 109: ...cement amount 3 Based on the detected result as above the DC Controller executes correction depending on the color displace amount Control type Timing to start Control description At power ON During print for every 360 prints in total During print for every 100 prints in total Correction in main scanning direction Write start correction Yes Yes Yes Change write start timing in main scanning direct...

Page 110: ...eloper is supplied to the developing assembly Toner feeding screw Toner feeding screwA B Developing assembly Hopper assembly Developing cylinder Toner supply levelsensor PS1 PS4 ATR sensor TS5 TS8 CL2 CL5 M5 M8 Developing motor Toner supply clutch Patch sensor center UN49 DC controller UN1 Developing assembly toner supply Count ATR sensor Result Patch sensor Result F 2 104 Related Error Codes E020...

Page 111: ...the specified number Control description 1 Monitoring current value of the primary transfer DC bias is detected 2 Optimal primary charging current value is determined based on the temperature humidity data of Environment sensor 1 3 The primary transfer DC bias is determined to apply to the primary transfer roller Secondary transfer ATVC Execution timing At every print job Control description 1 Mon...

Page 112: ...oner in the hopper unit Toner supply screw To supply toner in the hopper unit to the developing assembly F 2 106 T 2 40 Toner cap automatic opening control This control automatically opens closes the cap of toner container M9 M12 Toner container driver motor Cap release holder Toner cap Toner container Cap drive link holder Toner container cam HP sensor PS5 PS8 Toner cap position sensor PS9 PS12 E...

Page 113: ... toner level inside the Hopper Unit DC controller UN1 Developing supply count ATR control Toner container driver motor CCW Toner stirring plateA Toner stirring plateB Toner container Piezo sensor TS1 TS4 Toner feeding screw Hopper unit Developing assembly Toner supply level sensor PS1 PS4 M9 M12 CL2 CL5 M5 M8 Developing motor Toner supply clutch Toner supply drive unit Toner supply control Title D...

Page 114: ...e with a service mode 2 Replace toner cartridge XXXX Replace toner cartridge Alarm Code 10 0017 Y 0018 M 0019 C 0020 Bk 10 0001 Bk 0002 C 0003 M 0004 Y None Whether Toner Container can be removed Disable Enabled Enabled XXXX Yellow Magenda Cyan or Black 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW T DLV BK CL 2 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW TNR WARN When replacing to a new Toner Container after empty toner warning this machin...

Page 115: ...ase M26 DC controller UN1 Waste toner stirring motor ITB cleaner unit Waste toner screw1 Waste toner feeding screw Developing assembly Drum unit Waste toner screw2 Waste toner case There is waste toner case Sensor OFF There is not waste toner case Sensor ON Waste toner ITB unit Waste toner case sensor Waste toner case detect signal UN21 Detection description Detection timing Detection source Messa...

Page 116: ...played M26 DC controller UN1 Waste toner stirring motor ITB cleaner unit Waste toner screw1 Waste toner feeding screw Developing assembly Drum unit Waste toner screw2 Waste toner case There is waste toner case Sensor OFF There is not waste toner case Sensor ON Waste toner ITB unit Waste toner case sensor Waste toner case detect signal UN21 In order to prevent the toner leakage at removal of Waste ...

Page 117: ...sparency is attached on the ITB it reduces transfer efficiency on the attached area If considerable amount of resistance adjustment agent is attached on the ITB it can cause fusion in the ITB cleaning assembly To prevent this symptom toner width full width of ITB length 80mm solid black band is supplied to the ITB cleaning blade Execution timing Sheet to sheet interval after 15 sheets of transpare...

Page 118: ...tible with iR ADV C5051 series 7 Developing assembly Y FM4 8351 1 500k Possible to install to iR ADV C5051 series iR ADV C5051 C5045 iR ADV C5255 series OK iR ADV C5035 C5030 iR ADV C5255 series not compatible Developing assembly M FM4 8352 1 500k Developing assembly C FM4 8353 1 500k Developing assembly Bk FM4 8354 1 500k List of periodical service works No Parts name Execution timing Work Remark...

Page 119: ... Inner delivery roller Pressure roller Fixing inlet guide Fixing heater F 2 113 1 Saving energy Fast warm up reduces standby electric power thanks to low heat capacity 2 High speed B W 55ppm color 51ppm is enabled by introducing a new toner and the film capable of high heat transfer 3 Supported media Feeding 52g m2 paper is available due to the modification of film path and Separation Guide and im...

Page 120: ... to control temperature rise at the edge Control temperature Target temperature at printing plain paper 1 64 to 81 g m2 55 50 ppm machine 169 180 deg C 40 35 ppm machine 150 163 deg C Temperature detection By the main thermistors 2pc and the sub thermistors 2pc Protection feature Thermistors To block power supply to the fixing heater when a failure is detected Temperature fuse Rated operation temp...

Page 121: ...h the film Temperature control detection of abnormal temperature rise Sub thermistor 1 To be in contact with the heater non feeding area Temperature control detection of abnormal temperature rise temperature detection cooling control on the edge Sub thermistor 2 To be in contact with the heater non feeding area Temperature control detection of abnormal temperature rise temperature detection coolin...

Page 122: ...n temperature control Print temperature control Sheet to sheet temperature control Down sequence control To prevent fixing failure due to rising temperature at the edge or fall in temperature This control causes reduced through put Down sequence when feeding small size paper Down sequence when switching paper size F 2 117 Standby temperature control Flaying start control temperature Time 15 sec PR...

Page 123: ...temperature Time Startup warm up rotation temperature control To increase fixing temperature to be ready for printing once the print start command is received Print temperature control To set optimal target temperature to prevent fixing failure or offset and keep the specified target temperature during printing A Setting target temperature see the table on the next page Target temperature is speci...

Page 124: ... Model Paper type paper weight g m2 Speed Target temperature deg C 55 50 ppm machine Plain 1 64 81 Color 64 81 Recycled 64 81 Pre Punched Tracing paper Japanese paper 93 1 1 speed 246 mm sec 169 194 Thin 52 63 163 178 Plain 2 82 105 Bond 80 90 181 197 Heavy 1 106 163 Label 151 180 1 2 speed 123 mm sec 162 179 Heavy 2 164 209 Embossed 150 Postcard 4 on 1 postcard 190 Tab 166 179 Envelope 140 149 He...

Page 125: ...ng film Starting conditions When the detected temperature of sub thermistor 1 or 2 reaches the specified temperature or higher 250 to 260 deg C during printing Operation Temperature is reduced by making wider sheet to sheet distance to control the temperature at slightly lower than the target temperature for normal print Model Paper type paper weight g m2 Target temperature deg C Print speed ppm 5...

Page 126: ...R Non feeding area Non feeding area Film F 2 120 Starting conditions If the detected temperature of sub thermistor 1 or 2 exceeds the specified temperature 250 260 deg C when switching to the paper which has longer width than the preceding paper Operation Pickup of the succeeding paper and power distribution to the heater are stopped as well Completion conditions This down sequence is completed if...

Page 127: ...e this control is executed while printing is continued Direction of movement Shutter Fixing shutter motor Fixing shutter motor Shutter Fixing cooling fan front FM5 Fixing cooling fan rear FM6 M27 A4 R A4 LTR RB4EXE 8K LTR M27 Fixing shutter position sensor PS32 Fixing shutter position sensor PS32 Fixing shutter HP sensor PS31 Fixing shutter HP sensor PS31 There is a shutter at the air vent which m...

Page 128: ...n error occurs Related Error Codes E009 Error in engagement disengagement of film unit 0000 Error in engagement 0001 Error in disengagement 0002 Error in engagement it is highly possible that grease is scattered on the surface of the cam F 2 122 Protection features Code Description Error Clear E001 Detection of abnormal high temperature 0000 When main thermistor 1 2 detects 255 deg C or more for 0...

Page 129: ...rks Parts name Parts number Qty Estimated life print Remarks 1 Fixing Separation Cuide FC8 4906 1 300 000 Replace the Film Unit at the same time 2 Shutter Cover XG9 0172 1 300 000 Replace the Film Unit at the same time When replacing parts When replacing the Consumable Parts be sure to clear the Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER PRDC 1 DRBL 1 Film unit pressure roller Check that the fixing nip width is...

Page 130: ...ied value range Center 9 0 1 0mm Edge 145mm from the center of feeding paper 9 0 1 0mm Center Edge Edge 145 mm 145 mm Feeding direction If measured value is out of the specified range reinstall the replaced parts film unit or pressure roller and then measure the nip width again MEMO Fixing nip width cannot be adjusted in the field F 2 124 ...

Page 131: ...y of the tray is increased from 50 sheets to 100 sheets Specification Item Description Paper storage method Front loading method Pickup method Cassette 1 2 Separation retard method Multi purpose tray Simple retard method Paper stack capacity Cassette 1 2 550 sheets 80g m2 paper 650 sheets 64g m2 paper Multi purpose tray 100 sheets 80g m2 paper 100 sheets 64g m2 paper Paper feed reference Center re...

Page 132: ...oller 3 Third Delivery Roller 15 Cassette 1 Pickup Roller 4 Duplex Inlet Roller 16 Vertical Path Roller 1 5 Duplex Feed Upper Roller 17 Registration Roller 6 Duplex Feed Lower Roller 18 Secondary Transfer Roller 7 Multi Purpose Tray Pickup Feed Roller 19 Pressure roller 8 Multi Purpose Tray Separation Roller 20 Post Fixing Roller 9 Vertical Path Roller 2 21 Fixing Inner Delivery Roller 10 Cassette...

Page 133: ...ensor 2 PS53 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A PS37 Inner Delivery Sensor PS54 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B PS38 Duplex Paper Sensor PS55 Cassette 1 Pre Registration Sensor PS39 Reverse Sensor PS56 Cassette 2 Pre Registration Sensor PS40 Duplex Inlet Sensor PS57 Pre reverse Sensor PS41 First Delivery Sensor UN51 OHP Sensor PS42 Second Delivery Sensor UN52 Multi purpose tray size sensor PS43 Third...

Page 134: ...L5 First Delivery Flapper Solenoid M20 2 Sided Feed Motor SL6 Second Delivery Flapper Solenoid M21 Fixing Motor SL7 Third Delivery Flapper Solenoid M23 First Second Delivery Motor CL1 Multi Purpose Pickup Clutch M24 Reverse Roller Motor M25 Third Delivery Motor F 2 127 Paper Path R40 R40 Option Cassette pickup Side deck pickup Third delivery Second delivery First delivery Reverse mouth Cassette 2 ...

Page 135: ...5 C5030 300mm sec C5051 C5045 400mm sec C5035 C5030 300mm sec 246mm sec Reverse sensor PS39 Delivery speed up position Duplex re pickup position Registration position Pre registration position Pre registration position Duplex paper sensor PS38 Pre registration sensor PS33 Vertical path sensor UN53 Cassette 2 pre registration sensor PS56 Inner delivery sensor PS37 F 2 129 ...

Page 136: ...ration Control Fixing Arch Control Duplex Delivery Assembly Duplex Feed Control Duplex Wait Control JAM Detection JAM Detection F 2 130 T 2 57 Cassette Pickup Assembly Overview Parts Configuration Cassette 1 paper level sensor A Cassette 1 paper level sensor B Cassette 2 paper level sensor B Cassette 2 paper level sensor A Cassette 1 pickup solenoid Cassette 2 pickup solenoid Cassette 2 paper pres...

Page 137: ... Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid SL3 Cassette 2 Pickup Solenoid F 2 133 Detection Paper Level Presence Detection There are 3 sensors to detect the paper level and paper presence in the cassette Paper level is displayed on the operation panel OFF OFF OFFON ON ON If the paper is full Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A Ca...

Page 138: ...e automatically detected by adjusting the position of the guide plate Concavo convex area of the cassette dial is switched when the guide plate is shifted and two Size Switches on a printer are switched Length and width are detected according to the ON OFF combination of switches As long as standard paper both AB type and inch type can be used However size should be found manually on the check scr...

Page 139: ...Overall OK Prince Joshitsu Especially thin paper 52 gsm etc JPN Canon Europe Canon Recycled 80 Vision Classic White Overall EUR Canon Europe Canon High Grade Mondi Business Paper Especially heavy paper 220 250 gsm etc EUR Canon Digital Office Colour Stora Enso MultiCopy Special Colour Laser Especially heavy paper 160 gsm etc EUR T 2 58 T 2 59 Multi purpose tray pickup 1 sheet feed list Be sure to ...

Page 140: ...per The preceding paper has not reached the Registration Sensor Time until the Registration Sensor of preceding paper is turned OFF time until the Registration Sensor of succeeding paper is turned ON Cassette Heater Control To prevent paper in the Cassette from absorbing moisture this machine has a Cassette Heater at the bottom of the Cassette 2 This heater is controlled to keep the internal tempe...

Page 141: ...rpose pickup feed roller M18 SL4 CL1 Multi purpose tray motor Multi purpose tray pickup clutch Multi purpose tray lifting solenoid Multi purpose tray Multi Purpose Tray Detachment Roller Detection Paper Presence Detection The paper presence is detected by the Multi Purpose Tray Paper Presence Sensor When the paper absence is detected if there is the same size same type paper exists in other casset...

Page 142: ...istration Sensor However with this machine the Transparency Sensor is used to perform registration control To realize faster paper feed the Transparency Sensor which can perform the detection faster is used After the paper passes through the Registration Sensor the drive of the Pickup Motor Multi Purpose Tray Pickup Motor Duplex Pickup Motor is turned OFF to stop the paper by the distance from the...

Page 143: ...inlet sensor F 2 140 Duplex Delivery Assembly Overview Parts Drive Configuration M20 M23 M25 M24 SL6 SL7 SL5 Duplex paper sensor Duplex inlet roller Reverse roller First delivery roller Second delivery roller Third delivery roller Second third delivery Inlet roller Duplex feed upper roller Duplex feed lower roller M20 Duplex Feed Motor SL5 First Delivery Flapper Solenoid M23 First Second Delivery ...

Page 144: ...nd jam will occur Following is the each duplex reverse position and the number of sheet circulation by size First Second Delivery Third Delivery Small size LTR or smaller 5 3 Middle size A4R or smaller 3 3 Large size larger than A4R 3 1 Compared to the conventional model imageRUNNER C3380 feed speed at the duplex feed assembly is slowed down This is to get the precise feed to reduce the noise and ...

Page 145: ...ath Sensor does not execute residual jam detection Jam code Sensor XX Name Code 01 Delay jam 02 Stationary jam 03 Residual jam C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 C5051 C5045 C5035 C5030 XX01 Cassette 1 pre registration sensor PS55 N N N N Y Y XX02 Cassette 2 pre registration sensor PS56 Y Y Y Y Y Y XX13 Vertical path sensor UN53 Y Y Y Y N N XX05 Registration sensor PS33 Y Y Y Y Y Y XX...

Page 146: ...ntioned above are in common with those of iR ADV C5051 series Periodical service No Parts Name Execution timing Work Remarks 1 Registration roller 50k Cleaning 2 Pre registration guide 50k Cleaning 3 Transparency sensor 50k Cleaning 4 Fixing delivery guide 50k Cleaning 5 Post fixing roller 50k Cleaning 6 Fixing delivery roller 50k Cleaning 7 First delivery roller 50k Cleaning 8 Second delivery rol...

Page 147: ... Large Print Full Color Single Color Small 1 1 US 101 108 229 230 321 322 0 0 Target Display code of each counter in service mode Item Country code Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Counter 7 Counter 8 UL model type1 Total 2 Total Black 2 Copy Full Color Single Color Large Copy Full Color Single Color Small Print Full Color Single Color Large Print Full Color Single Color...

Page 148: ... 123 501 301 0 0 ITA model Total type2 Total 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IT 101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 T 2 68 Code description Large Large size paper if the width in paper feed direction is over 364mm count up x1 Small Small size paper if the width in paper feed direction is 364mm or less Total All C P count up x 1 Duplex At auto duplexing copy count up x 1 3 digit code in counter column is the setting value of the fo...

Page 149: ...Assembly E805 0001 FM3 Power Cooling Fan Cooling down of Power Supply Assembly E804 FM4 Process Cartridge Fan rear Heat exhaustion around Process Cartridge E807 0000 FM5 Fixing Cooling Fan front Cooling down of Fixing Assembly FM6 Fixing Cooling Fan rear Cooling down of Fixing Assembly FM7 Delivery Fan 1 Preventing delivery paper adhesion E806 0000 FM8 Secondary Transfer Delivery Fan Heat exhausti...

Page 150: ... 112 Technology External Auxiliary System Controls Fan Technology External Auxiliary System Controls Fan Air Flow Air flow around the Main Controller and the Power Supply F 2 145 Air flow of fixing system F 2 146 ...

Page 151: ... 1 Fixing Exhaust Fan 2 Controller Fan 2 Delivery Fan 1 Delivery Fan 2 Power Cooling fan Controller Fan 1 Fixing Cooling Fan front Fixing Cooling Fan rear Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan Process Cartridge Fan front Full speed Half speed Full speed at occurrence of jam during a job Half speed at occurrence of power on jam Half speed at occurrence of service error No FM10 FM4 FM1 FM2 FM5 FM6 FM8 FM7 ...

Page 152: ... Leakage Breaker All night Power Supply PCB UI Fixing Heater Environment SW Right SW Front SW Main Power Supply SW Relay PCB Reader Controller PCB DC DC Interlock DC DC Non interlock Main Controller PCB 1 Main controller PCB 2 AC Driver PCB AC Interlock SW DC Controller PCB Fuse Relay Deck Heater Pedestal Heater Cassette Heater Reader Heater 24V 24V Remote Signal All night Circuit 12V 5VIL 3 3V 5V...

Page 153: ...CMOS PCB DADF LED Lamp Unit 12V 24V 24V 24V 5V Motor Fan Sensor Printer Reader Controller PCB 24V 5V DADF driver PCB F 2 150 Power connection with each option Reader ADFUnit Paper Deck Unit B1 Staple Finisher C1 Cassette Feeding Unit AD1 Built in wiring Connector inside the cover is used for the connection with DADF Unit and the 2 Cassette Pedestal External Cable is used for the connection with th...

Page 154: ...PCB OFF Power is not supplied to the DC Controller PCB and the Reader Controller PCB Power is supplied to the Main Controller PCB 1 and 2 When the value of service mode COPIER OPTION USER SLEEP1SW is 0 and the machine is not in limited functions mode the machine moves to this mode Sleep 1 DC Controller PCB Reader Controller PCB ON Fixing Heater is OFF and the Control Panel is OFF Other power suppl...

Page 155: ...Extension Card is connected The device is connected to a USB host System Performance Status An application is communicating via network TCP connection on a port dedicated to CPCA within 15 seconds after reception of UDP Either of SNTP DHCP DHCP6 or eRDS communication is in progress A job is being executed in standby Print Copy SEND FAX Report Forward Save etc During Fax I Fax communication During ...

Page 156: ...problems perform the following operations Using user mode set not to enter the Deep sleep mode Preferences Timer Energy Settings Sleep Mode Energy Use High Disable the spanning tree function of hub Request users to use the hub which supports Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP that resolved such problems Quick Startup To realize faster startup power configuration has been changed to always supply po...

Page 157: ...specified period of time 10 seconds from non detection of reception from a fax line Within a specified period of time 10 seconds from putting down the fax sub device or handset MEAP During execution of MEAP application which prohibits moving to Deep Sleep A scheduled processing is reserved on MEAP Job processing During print scan job processing During SEND job processing During I Fax communication...

Page 158: ...erations Points to note at servicing Service Operations When Replacing Parts N A Consumables No Parts Name Parts number Qty Execution timing Remark 1 Toner filter FC6 9817 1 100k B W 25k CL When Replacing Parts When replacing the Consumable Parts be sure to clear the Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER PRDC 1 DRBL 1 Points to note at servicing N A T 2 76 ...

Page 159: ...iR Device LDAP Server Local user Remote user Accordingly the following item and setting screens have been added to the SSO H management screen of the remote UI Drop down list for selecting the LDAP server as the authentication server The LDAP server management screen when LDAP Server is selected from the foregoing drop down list The screen for adding an LDAP server An example of the screen showing...

Page 160: ...thentication See the following for system requirements in each of authentication methods Server authentication management The system requirements necessary when using server authentication by SSO H vary depending on the authentication server The system requirements for using each authentication server are shown below Active Directory authentication In order to use Active Directory authentication i...

Page 161: ...her Environments Classification Operating System Supported browser Java Runtime Environment Client OS Windows XP Professional SP3 Internet Explorer 7 Internet Explorer 8 Java Runtime Environment 1 5 or later 1 3 Windows Vista SP2 Internet Explorer 7 Internet Explorer 8 Java Runtime Environment 1 5 or later 1 3 Internet Explorer 9 Java Runtime Environment 1 5 or later 2 3 Windows 7 SP1 Internet Exp...

Page 162: ...In order to access SMS using password authentication the PC and browser need to comply with the following system environment Combination of the Browser and the OS Operating System Supported browser Windows XP Professional SP3 Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 Windows Vista SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 Microsoft Internet Explorer 9 Window...

Page 163: ...l When Use SSL is set to On the message dialog The Default Key is not set Check the Key and Certificate List settings in Certificate Setting is shown Press OK button for this message F 2 163 2 Press OK button to return to Main Menu screen 3 Restart this device CAUTION The setting Use HTTP is not actually enabled disabled until you have restarted the device You cannot make a connection through a pr...

Page 164: ...he key pair and server certificate necessary for encrypted SSL communication Note MFP has a server certificate registered as standard For detailed procedures of the Default Key setting refer to e Manual Security As for SMS by setting a Default Key encrypted SSL communication is always executed regardless of the following setting Settings Registration Management Settings Settings Registration MEAP ...

Page 165: ...lsory Date 15 4 2036 Country Region Compulsory Country or region name US State Arbitrary State name City Arbitrary City name Organization Arbitrary Organization name Organization Unit Arbitrary Organization unit Common Name Arbitrary Common Name Note When the IP address of the device has been entered in the Common Name entry field if you install a server certificate to the browser see Installing a...

Page 166: ...cate reference information When you access a device where the key installed as standard default key is set as the key for SSL Certificate Error appears if the version of Internet Explorer IE is Version 7 or later Error display example To disable display of Certificate Error use the following procedure for IE8 to set the key generated in Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL Comm...

Page 167: ...he Install Certificate button on the General tab 4 Certificate Import Wizard will appear Click the Next button F 2 177 F 2 178 5 In Certificate Store select the Place all certificates in the following store option and then click the Browse button 6 In Select Certificate Store select Trusted Root Certification Authorities and then click the OK button F 2 179 F 2 180 ...

Page 168: ...rusted Root Certification Authorities appears in Certificate and then click the Next button 8 Completing the Certificate Import Wizard will appear Click the Finish button F 2 181 F 2 182 9 If the Security Warning appears click the Yes button It does not appear when installing the same certificate again 10 A message will appear to indicate that import has been completed successfully Click the OK bu...

Page 169: ...K buttons 3 To set up the HTTP server port select MEAP PN To set up the HTTPS server port select MEAP SSL F 2 185 F 2 186 4 Press the port number to specify on the control panel the numerical value input in the field is displayed and press OK button Note A port number can be any integer from 0 to 65535 To avoid port numbers that are frequently used do not use any integer from 0 to 1023 Server Sett...

Page 170: ...e device s Touch Panel You can see the number by pressing the counter key on the Control Panel of the machine F 2 189 F 2 190 Login to SMS Outline SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication or by authentication via the Remote Login Service RLS login window RLS authentication Settings can be changed to allow either only one of these methods or both of them SMS login window pass...

Page 171: ...initialization 3 Specify the switch license file Click the Browse button and specify the switch license file 4 Initialize the login password Click the Initialize button to display an initialization confirmation page and click the OK button Note The default password is MeapSmsLogin The password is case sensitive If you click Cancel button the Login page opens without initializing the password F 2 1...

Page 172: ...age Certificate Error That Appears at the Time of Access When accessing from the browser to SMS a message Certificate Error appears in some cases In that case perform the procedure Installing a server certificate reference information in this chapter Installing an MEAP Application Outline From the MEAP application installation screen you can install the MEAP application as well as the license file...

Page 173: ...stall the application without using the appropriate license Be sure to select its license file If you are adding a license to an existing application see Procedure adding a license file If you are updating an existing application stop the application then install the new application or its license file You will not be able to update an application while it is running Note The license file is provi...

Page 174: ...ew MEAP Application Management page Note As for an application that has just been installed the status is Installed In order to use the application it is necessary to click the Start button to change the status to Started F 2 201 F 2 198 F 2 199 F 2 200 Note There are two ways to install an MEAP application You can install using SMS or install using the Register Update Software screen of the remot...

Page 175: ...k the available resource of SMS Since the indication of SMS resource volume fluctuates by the login service authentication function and configuration future model which the user selected it may show a bigger value than the following values List of Available Resources Product Name Storage Memory Thread Socket File Description iR ADV C5051 series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256 iR ADV C9075 series 1024MB 1...

Page 176: ...tion ID above including network and security Thus each model does not always have the same version MEAP application declares 1 or more MEAP Specifications required for its execution T 2 84 Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the environments declared Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service Manager matching o...

Page 177: ...dress book function e mail group i FAX file 31 Integrated ERS function T 2 85 Ver Description 32 Extended Imaging function function to generate PDF OOXML PowerPoint with visible signature 33 Extended function for imageRUNNER iR ADVANCE series API for address book CTK TopMenu 34 Extended IMI Box function v1 3 0 35 Extended SIS function function to check the network cable status function to check PS...

Page 178: ...ExtendedTextInputView class 77 Reserved 78 Reserved 80 Reserved T 2 86 MEAP Application Management Outline You can use the MEAP application management screen to perform basic management tasks of the MEAP application start stop uninstall or check the device s resource information Starting Stopping or Uninstalling the MEAP Application Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application 1 Log in to the SM...

Page 179: ...e application still cannot be started after checking the foregoing conditions contact the support department of the sales company F 2 205 5 Procedure to uninstall the MEAP application Before uninstalling the MEAP application check that the following conditions are met The MEAP application has stopped The license has been disabled or deleted The status is Not Installed For information on the proced...

Page 180: ...pdate the license which has already expired Disable or delete the license file in order to uninstall the MEAP application These license management functions can be performed from the MEAP Application Management screen The main license management functions are as follows Adding a license When the license has expired you can add a license file Disabling a License File Before uninstalling the MEAP ap...

Page 181: ... to SMS 2 On MEAP Application Management click the name of the application to which you want to add a license file 3 In Application License Information page shown on the screen click License Management button F 2 211 F 2 212 4 Click Browse button and select the license file you want to install 5 Click Install button 6 Check the content of the confirmation page and click OK button F 2 213 F 2 214 ...

Page 182: ...the license will be Not Installed and its application will no longer be available for use You can later restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the same iR the device with the same device serial number If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure use the transfer license during the replacement See License for forwarding 1 Stop the application you want to unin...

Page 183: ...ure downloading removing an invalidated license file Note The downloaded license file can be used for reinstallation only in the same iR device with the same device serial number 1 Login to SMS 2 Application List page appears On MEAP Application Management page click the name of the application you want 3 Check Application License Information page appears 4 On Application License Information page ...

Page 184: ...selected Download button specify where you want to store the file by following the instructions on the screen F 2 222 7 To delete click Delete button 8 When the dialog to confirm deletion is shown click Yes button CAUTION Without the license file an application cannot be reinstalled even to the MEAP de vice that the application had been installed last time Download and save the license file before...

Page 185: ...g Portal Service SDL SSO has been made to be able to install as many times as needed by the same license file This kind of license is called Reusable license License for forwarding If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure you can transfer the license information used in the MEAP application to the new machine and continue its usage Service engineers are responsible for license t...

Page 186: ... Yes to delete the file in consideration of breakage of license for forwarding deleting disabled license can be executed after all steps have been completed 10 Log out of SMS 11 Since this downloaded transfer license is the file only to prove the license invalidation it cannot be used for installation to the other device as it is Send the transfer license to the service support contact of your nea...

Page 187: ...efault Authentication is enabled by default CAUTION This device does not support SDL conventional SSO and Security Agent Default Authentication overview This login service is selected when the department ID management is enabled or no authentication function is set Set the department ID management to ON on Setting Registration Additional Functions mode of this device and register 7 digit ID and PI...

Page 188: ... be done by exporting importing However application settings information cannot be ported F 2 235 Environment confirmation Refer to the section of Preparation for Using SSO H of this manual for system requirements needed in each login service Specification of SSO H Item Specification No of local device users Up to 5000 Maximum number of domains Active Directory 200 domains this device not included...

Page 189: ... Logged in in this manual Using an Accounting Product When SSO H Is Used SSO H has collaborative linkage with NetSpot Accountant imageWARE iW Accounting Manager imageWARE Enterprise Management Console iW Management Console Access Management Plug in imageWARE Enterprise Management Console iW Management Console Accounting Management Plug in For details on the combination refer to the User s Manual o...

Page 190: ...ement Settings and deselect Enable Department ID Management 4 Change the authentication method back to SSO H authentication Access SMS and select Single Sign On H in Enhanced System Application Management Login Service How to log in to SMS can be found in Login to SMS F 2 238 F 2 239 5 Restart the device Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service 6 Change the user registra...

Page 191: ...ironment where Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management are enabled Note In the case of conventional SSO department management can be conducted also when server authentication is used provided that iWAM iW EMC account management is used which is not supported by SSO H Setting the Administrator for Server Authentication When using Server Authentication the user who satisfies the spe...

Page 192: ... SA to domain authentication managers users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group However SSO H does not support this function Local device authentication It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO H and is used for an iR device on a stand alone basis Remote user iR device Local user Register the user to be authenticated on the database in the device User management can be perform...

Page 193: ... be changed F 2 247 CAUTION Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users distributing setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in If the device has become unable to be logged in follow Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in in this manu...

Page 194: ... returned by DNS Therefore when acquiring the site list LDAP may access the Active Di rectory of a different site Therefore in such cases it is sometimes necessary to access across sites or subnets which means that LDAP protocol needs to have continuity across sites subnets normally LDAP is port No 389 Further if connection with Active Directory fails when acquiring site information another Active...

Page 195: ...ries of the login destination domain KDC address list are computed In the event that the domain controller IP addresses of other domains are outside of the site access range and only the domain controller within the site is programmed for access an error message will be displayed to the effect that the site information is incorrect Server Authentication LDAP Authentication It is one of the user au...

Page 196: ...al device authentication when a user who cannot be added to the authentication server needs to be temporarily authenticated If a trouble occurs in the authentication server local device authentication can be used as an emergency measure until recovery from the trouble ローカルデバイス認証 Local device authentication Server authentication Local user Remote user Steps to Change Login Services 1 Click Enhanced...

Page 197: ...ethod This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS Installer Service Password Authentication by changing the login method to Default Authentication When you want to change the login method to a device log in the SMS with the password authentication F 2 255 Login Service Installation Procedure Follow the procedure show below to install login services 1 Acc...

Page 198: ...8 Login Service Uninstallation Procedure Follow the procedure show below to uninstall login services In order to uninstall a login service the service needs to be stopped Installed status Default Authentication cannot be uninstalled even when the service is stopped 1 Access SMS and select System Management Enhanced System Application Management 2 Click the Uninstall button of the login service you...

Page 199: ...browser of a PC on the same network as the MEAP device The URL is as follows URL https IP address of MEAP device 8443 sms Ex https 172 16 188 240 8443 sms Note To encrypt the password information input when logging in SSL of the login screen was made effective However it is redirected to new URL effective SSL even when accessing with URL non SSL before 2 Enter the password in the password entry fi...

Page 200: ...n was made effective However it is redirected to new URL effective SSL even when accessing with URL non SSL before Note When the device authentication method used is server authentication enter the user name password and login destination registered with authentication server and then click Log In If the authentication method used is local device authentication enter the user name password and log...

Page 201: ...n is enabled no further authentication is needed to access SMS This is because users have already authorized upon accessing to Remote UI F 2 266 CAUTION In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO H if you log in SMS with RLS authentication no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login method This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which ...

Page 202: ...ver In the event of either of these cases try the following 1 If local device authentication is active try logging in with local device authentication 2 If only server authentication is active launch in MEAP safe mode from the device service mode After launching in MEAP safe mode the Default Authentication will become active and you will be able to login to SMS with password authentication After l...

Page 203: ...ge the status to Stop the user is automatically redirected to RLS authentication screen Password authentication started screen and Password authentication stopped screen F 2 270 F 2 271 Setting for login by RLS Authentication The procedures for changing the RLS authentication Start Stop settings are as follows 1 Access the SMS login screen using the normal method password authentication The URL is...

Page 204: ...tatus screen with the setting of Stop the user will be redirected to the password authentication screen RLS authentication started screen and RLS authentication stopped screen F 2 274 F 2 275 CAUTION In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO H if you log in SMS with RLS authentication no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login method This is the specifica...

Page 205: ...e priority setting of the Accept Language header which a browser sends out and the display language setting in the user mode When the language setup is other than English or Japanese it is displayed in English When accessing by SMS Installer Service Remote Login Service Authentication Initial display language is set by the language setting value of portalLang storing in Cookie selected by the remo...

Page 206: ...s as text information This function is useful to check status information of each application F 2 279 F 2 280 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application MEAP system information can be printed out with iR device for confirmation Note The system information of the MEAP application that you checked in the previous section is exactly the same as the system information of the MEAP applicatio...

Page 207: ... Status It indicates the status of the license specifically None no license is needed Not Installed no license has been installed Installed the appropriate license has been installed Invalid the license has been invalidated Overlimt the license has been used beyond its permitted limit License Expires After It indicates the date after which the license expires If the status of the license is none t...

Page 208: ...ation screen appears Scroll the screen and check the information of the target application F 2 283 Check License Outline You can check the contents of the license file Procedure to Check the License File 1 Log in to SMS 2 Select System Management Check License on System Management menu 3 Click the Browse button specify a license file and click the Check button F 2 284 F 2 285 ...

Page 209: ...lt value F 2 286 F 2 287 MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management Outline The MEAP Application Setting Information Management page and the MEAP Application Log Management page provide menu related to MEAP Application Configuration Service for managing MEAP application setting information and menu related to MEAP Application Log Service for managing log information respect...

Page 210: ...service the setting information and log data are managed on an application by application basis Devices and MEAP applications which support new functions App1 App2 Setting and reference Configuration Config data common format Device Preference data Log data Platform General purpose management tool Configuration management service common format common format Preference management service Log manage...

Page 211: ...e destination and save the file 5 To delete the logs The confirmation screen will appear to prompt you to delete the logs Click the Yes button to delete the logs F 2 295 F 2 296 Maintenance Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST Outline When replacing or formatting the HDD the data in the MEAP application area needs to be temporarily saved to your PC This cha...

Page 212: ... from backup using SST to restoration of data It is not necessary to reinstall the license file when restoring the backup data Backup Item Automatically Copied The following data are backed up using SST The following data are backed up saved as Meapbackup bin using SST MEAP applications Setup data generated by MEAP applications Note that image data stored in BOX will not be saved for MEAP applicat...

Page 213: ...ce at maximum Sizes of backup files depend on actual data capacities to be backed up T 2 91 Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 1 Switching Login Service Backup of Login User Information If SSO H is used for the login service switch to default authentication before backing up the user information Although SST will back up local device user information it is recommended to ...

Page 214: ...ce type as Single and click Start button 5 Generating backup data to transfer it to the PC uploading Click Upload Data button of SST and select Meapback bin as the item to be backed up to click Start button F 2 298 F 2 299 6 Saving backup data Upon the backup data transferred to the PC enter an appropriate file name and click OK to save the backup data on the PC When the file is successfully saved...

Page 215: ...not Be Accessed in Login to SMS in this manual F 2 302 Procedures to Restore Backup Data 1 Connecting to the device Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of the Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 2 Restoring backup file Click Download Data button and select the data backed up in the previous step Meapback bin to click Start Restoring Data Note that th...

Page 216: ... and cannot be obtained by a general user In order to obtain a special license file a service technician needs to contact a person in charge of support of a sales company When contacting the person in charge of support the service technician also needs to provide the serial number of the device and the name of the MEAP application installed In the support departments of regional headquarters of Ca...

Page 217: ...mal installation 5 Importing user information As necessary make login service selections and import user information Note When you replace the HDD without uninstalling MEAP applications make sure to reinstall the previously installed applications Unless reinstalling them MEAP counter will not be released and the message The number of applications that can be installed has exceeded the limit Try to...

Page 218: ...n restoring the system software as when MEAP applications or services cause a fault as the result of a conflict or wrong sequence of registration use You can access to SMS in this condition so that you can take necessary measures for example you can stop application that may cause the trouble If default authentication has been selected the mode of authentication remains valid otherwise the message...

Page 219: ...ce Name Product Name Safe Mode F 2 309 CAUTION If the device has been started in MEAP SAFE mode all the MEAP applications stop and the status becomes Installed This status remains unchanged even if the MEAP SAFE mode is canceled and the device is started again in normal mode It is therefore necessary to access SMS after normal startup and start the MEAP application F 2 310 How to cancel MEAP SAFE ...

Page 220: ... at the upper left of the screen F 2 313 F 2 314 Collection of MEAP Console Logs Overview When debugging a MEAP application console logs need to be collected in some cases The following shows how to collect MEAP console logs using commercially available terminal software and service mode What to Prepare PC connected with the same network as the device Commercially available terminal software Note ...

Page 221: ...ld is displayed and press OK button 5 Check to see that it is reflected in setting field and restart the device F 2 316 F 2 317 F 2 318 PC setting procedure when Tera Term is used 1 Install the terminal software on the PC 2 Start the terminal software make the following settings and then click the OK button Connection Select TCP IP Default Host Device Host Name or IP Address Service Select Telnet ...

Page 222: ...s and then click the OK button Terminal ID VT100 New line Receive LF 5 Select Log from the File menu F 2 321 F 2 322 6 The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear Set the save destination path and the file name and then click the Save button 7 Perform the operation whose log you want to collect 8 Click the Close button in the log dialog Note To suspend log collection...

Page 223: ...Show Log dialog The logs that have been collected are pasted on Notepad and displayed Change directory The preliminarily set save destination of the log file can be changed F 2 326 F 2 327 F 2 328 9 Open the file saved in the save destination and check that the logs are stored correctly Note Depending on the MEAP application the log output setting needs to be made in order to collect logs CAUTION ...

Page 224: ... 2 Set TCP IP Winsock for Connect using 3 Enter the IP address of the target device in Host address and enter 19001 fixed in Port number F 2 330 F 2 331 F 2 332 4 Click the Properties icon on the Hyper Terminal screen 5 The Console Properties dialog will appear Select the Settings tab select VT100 for Emulation and then click the OK button 6 Return to the Hyper Terminal window and select Transfer ...

Page 225: ...sing USB Devices USB Driver Two types of USB drivers While the USB driver that can be used in iR series is only the USB driver designed exclusively for MEAP application hereinafter referred to as MEAP driver not only MEAP driver but also USB system driver hereinafter referred to as system driver can be used in iR ADV series System driver and MEAP driver cannot be used together When either of them ...

Page 226: ... used in a manifest file is reflected in the following timing When registering from a manifest file The registration will be enabled when an application is activated and device is restarted The registration will be disabled when an application is stopped and device is restarted T 2 92 Note You can display check the used driver setting at USB device report print described below regardless of whethe...

Page 227: ... keyboard in deep sleep When USB device is attached to iR device iR devices do not shift to deep sleep mode Keyboard layout changes according to the keyboard layout settings in the Settings Registration screen In addition function keys and ten keys which are not displayed in the software keyboard cannot be used Keyboard which the operation check was conducted is 84 key Keyboard but this does not m...

Page 228: ...ice by means of declaration in Manifest file of MEAP applications output the USB Device repot report print Steps to output the USB Device report print 1 Start SERVICE MODE in Level 1 2 Press COPIER Function MISC P buttons F 2 343 F 2 344 3 Press or button for several times until USBH PRT is shown Press USBH PRT button 4 When pressing OK button ACTIVE blinks on the status field 5 When OK is shown o...

Page 229: ... manufacture name and a product name can be recognized here F 2 348 C Configure The configuration information of a USB device is shown mark is to know whether it is active I Interface The interface information of a USB device is shown Interface class and the driver to handle can be recognized The value and the content of Driver are as follows Labeling Content usbhid It is displayed when the USB sy...

Page 230: ...evice has an integrated authentication function This function allows authentication information to be shared between MEAP applications in a MEAP environment The supported version of MEAP Specifications is Ver 59 which needs to be supported by both the device and the MEAP application in order to use this function There are 2 types of authentication information that can be shared Volatile Credential...

Page 231: ... used from a security standpoint the function can be disabled The function can be disabled from remote UI or service mode Persistent Credential cannot be disabled On the setting screen of remote UI the function can be disabled on a protocol by protocol basis Remote UI You can access the setting screen on remote UI for disabling integrated authentication as shown below T 2 97 F 2 350 Select the ite...

Page 232: ...restart from remote UI Turn OFF the Main Switch and then turn it ON within 20 seconds After recovery from quick startup MEAP applications do not work properly MEAP applications that are scheduled to execute processes at specified times may not work properly after recovery from quick restart Unexpected problems such as that the application executes a task at an unexpected timing may occur Problems ...

Page 233: ...n failure and the user can no longer log in to the device F 2 355 Note Even if the department ID and password registered in the user information of SSO H do not coincide with the department ID and password registered in the Department ID Management login is possible when all of the following conditions are satisfied System manager information of the device Settings Registration Management Settings...

Page 234: ...ement information was updated Remedy If the device became unable to be logged in due to mismatch of the department ID password perform the following remedy Note Since the device can be logged in if all of the following conditions are satisfied performing only the step 6 of this section can clear the mismatch of the department ID password System manager information of the device Settings Registrati...

Page 235: ... Login to SMS 5 Restart the device Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service 6 Change the user registration information of SSO H Access the URL shown below and change the content to the information registered in Department ID Management Or import the setting file whose content you want to use F 2 361 SSO H user registration information edition screen SSO management screen...

Page 236: ...evice CPCA Java CL Class Library CPCA Java Class Library A Java class library which is used to control a device Default Authentication Department ID Management The login service used when the department ID control is used but other authentication controls are not used When the Department ID control is turned on the login dialog prompts the users to enter the department ID and password The dialog a...

Page 237: ... an environment for executing application programs on a peripheral device Uses the Java platform J2ME Java 2 platform Micro Edition to run Java application for MEAP MEAP Contents Required to install an MEAP application to a MEAP device Terms Acronyms Definitions and Explanations MEAP Specifications MEAP Spec Version MEAP Spec Version the term used for the SDK The version number that shows the APIs...

Page 238: ...ently authorizes users whereas the latter is that iR device links to the domain controller on the network in the Active Directory environment to authorize users Thread A unit for program execution A multi task system allowing multiple programs to run concurrently assigns a memory space and other resources independently to each program providing users with a feel as if only a program is running At ...

Page 239: ...on is restricted by MEAP application hide the warning screen of error JAM such as JAM screen door opening no toner In the case that these errors occur there will be a display indicating call the service personnel etc Note Part of the warning screens is displayed if shifting to the device screen As for the screens for jam and no toner the warning screen animation can be displayed by pressing the fo...

Page 240: ...r exclusive individual measure Error at starting up the MEAP application Setting to hide JAM screen level 2 3 Press ANIM SW button 4 Press either 0 display warning screen or 1 hide warning screen on control panel the numerical value input in the field is displayed and press OK button 5 Check to see that it is reflected in setting field and restart the device F 2 370 F 2 371 ...

Page 241: ...nce can realize a front end processing of e Maintenance imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware equipment Major Functions Service Call Button If a user touches Service call button when corrupt image paper jam or and other problems has occurred E RDS generates an alarm and notifies it to UGW Moreover E RDS also notifies cancellation and the completion of the request Service Bro...

Page 242: ...g or service call log which has been detected by E RDS as an unsent log at the time of power on An alarm log or service call log waiting for retry after its transmission failed When service mode menu transmission when an alarm log or service call error was detected failed Service mode menu data of which processing for acquisition has been already performed when an alarm or service call error subje...

Page 243: ...RL setting of UGW SERVICE MODE COPIER Function INSTALL RGW ADR Default https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 3 If the e Maintenance imageWARE Remote contract of the device is invalid be sure to turn OFF the E RDS setting E RDS 0 4 This machine supports communication tests in user mode When conducting a communication test in user mode pay attention on the following points During a communication te...

Page 244: ...tting DHCP RARP BOOTP Manual setting IP address subnet mask and gateway address to be set Information item 2 Is there a DNS server in use If there is a DNS server in use find out the following Primary DNS server address Secondary DNS server address Information item 3 Is there a proxy server If there is a proxy server in use find out the following Proxy server address Port No for proxy server Infor...

Page 245: ...tion is performed the CA certificate in the factory setting is automatically installed CAUTION After following procedure the registered key and CA certificate are deleted and only the CA certificate installed at the time of shipment is registered It is therefore necessary to check with the user in advance 1 Start Service Mode at Level 2 F 2 373 2 Select COPIER Function CLEAR CA KEY and touch the O...

Page 246: ...ged to 1 and touch the OK button The data is reflected to the setting value field NOTE This operation enables the communication function with UGW F 2 376 F 2 377 CAUTION The following settings i e RGW PORT and RGW ADR in Service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW 7 Select COM TEST and then touch O...

Page 247: ...ing the communication test with UGW E RDS acquires schedule information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation F 2 379 Steps to Service Call button settings Steps for settings to display the service call button In the case of supporting a service by the service call button follow the instructions described below to display the service call button 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Select C...

Page 248: ...technician completes the work for the service call follow the instruction as described below to execute the service call completion work 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Select COPIER Option USER SCALLCMP 3 Touch the numeric button 1 or 0 on the control panel the setting value is changed to 1 or 0 and touch the OK button The data is reflected to the setting value field NOTE E RDS generates an ala...

Page 249: ...Request button on the Service Call screen CAUTION When a service call has been already requested another service call cannot be sent The previous service call needs to be canceled or a service technician needs to perform processing for service call completion F 2 384 F 2 385 4 Select the request details and touch the Request button NOTE E RDS generates an alarm of service call request at this timi...

Page 250: ...s described below 1 Touch the Counter Check button on the control panel to display the Check Counter screen 2 Touch the Monitoring Service button and touch the Service Call button on the Monitoring Service screen 3 Touch the Cancel button and touch the Yes button in the check screen NOTE E RDS generates an alarm of service call cancellation at this timing and sends the alarm to UGW F 2 388 F 2 389...

Page 251: ... the connection is established with UGW successfully OK is displayed When NG is displayed perform the steps referring to Troubleshooting until connection is established with UGW F 2 391 F 2 392 3 Reboot this machine 4 Make sure that 1 ACTIVE is set under COPIER Display USER BRWS STS 5 When the above shown setting values are enabled Service Browser is displayed in the Service Mode screen NOTE Gener...

Page 252: ...becoming NG case 1 Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name or DNS server has been halted 2 Network cable is blocked off 3 Proxy server settings is not correct No 2 Q I want to know the interval of data transmitting from E RDS to the UGW and what data size is sent to the UGW A The schedule of data transmitting the start time are determined by settings in the UGW side The timing is ...

Page 253: ... sleep won t be done if the next data transmission will be done within 10 minutes No 9 Q Is E RDS compatible with Department counter A No E RDS does not support Department counter No 10 Q Is there any setting to be made on the device side to enable the service mode menu transmission function Moreover what is Service mode menu set as the object of transmission A No steps peculiar to Transmitting Se...

Page 254: ...ormation are displayed in the following form Error strings Method name Error details provided by UGW NOTE is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test method name getConfiguration or communicationTest only No Code Error strings Cause Remedy 1 0000 0000 SUSPEND mode changed Unmatched Operation Mode Initialize the E RDS setting ERDS DAT 2 0500 0003 SUSPEND Comm...

Page 255: ...xx 2002 URL server specified is illegal A URL different to that specified by the UGW has been set Check that the value of URL of UGW RGW ADR is https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 No Code Error strings Cause Remedy 20 8xxx 2003 Network is not ready try later Communication attempted without confirming network connection just after booting up a device in which the network preparations are not rea...

Page 256: ... found There is a mistake in the UGW URL and UGW cannot be accessed Path is wrong Check that the value of URL of UGW RGW ADR is https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 32 8xxx 2052 URL error The data which is not URL is inputted into URL field Check that the value of URL of UGW RGW ADR is https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 33 8xxx 2058 Unknown error SOAP Client fails to obtain SOAP Response Pos...

Page 257: ...date by the SST SST Yes Yes Yes 1 Do not execute distribution of updated module only 2 Only the versions for which remote update is allowed can be selected 3 Device Firmware Update Plug in T 2 103 a UGW linked Download and Update Full Remote Update If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule and update setting are registered on UGW in advance full remote firmware update is availab...

Page 258: ...R ADVANCE series and devices of imageRUNNER ADVANCE series that are not connected with external network the foregoing three methods cannot be used to distribute firmware Firmware released in the future will be distributed via CDS instead of distribution using a master CD In the field these firmware can be downloaded from CDS using a PC web browser Sales Company Service Technician 3 Update via SST ...

Page 259: ...mit MEAP Application LF If a customer enters LAN purchased from the sales company to an imageRUNNERADVANCE series device MEAP application LF can be installed LAN License Access Number LF License File DSN Device Serial Number automatically sent to CDS upon LAN entered 5 Manuals etc LMS LAN MEAP Application 3 Create LF 2 License Authentication Canon Inc Sales Company Manual Upload User Installing Sy...

Page 260: ...Service Mode User Mode Remote UI UGW linked Firmware Checking firmware compatibility Yes Checking special firmware Yes Checking latest firmware version Yes Yes Registering deleting firmware distribution schedule Yes Yes Yes Confirming and downloading firmware Yes Yes Yes Yes Updating downloaded firmware Yes Yes Yes Cancelling downloaded firmware Yes Yes Yes Acquiring firmware distribution informat...

Page 261: ...tallation Flow Service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 4 methods a UGW linked download and update b UGW linked download c Manual download and update d Local CDS Download and Update iW EMC DFU Plug in e Update via SST Operator of each company User operation Firmware Market Release b d c a Scheduled download Scheduled update Distribution Setting to UGW UGW linked 1 Aut...

Page 262: ...me the firmware distribution may not be performed as scheduled But there is not the problem if it is time adjustment of several minutes with NTP servers Change of Setting from Service mode Any settings from Service mode will be enabled after restarting the device Cautions Concurrent use of Updater functions Multiple users cannot use Updater functions on a device concurrently by using it together w...

Page 263: ...or EOJ SEND Cancel processing to trigger update Cancel processing to trigger update The data are guaranteed even if cut off in the middle of a job It becomes the recovery object after the device reboot and carry out send reception again Even during transfer Pull SCAN job processing is cancelled soon after scanning is completed Firmware update is cancelled if the jobs are not completed within 10 mi...

Page 264: ...ethod Network Settings Enabling Install Application Options Button of User Mode LMS linked Installation Yes LMA linked installation via Local UI Yes Yes LMS linked installation via Remote UI Yes Yes Setting Sales Company s HQ When using devices input in the markets listed below the default setting of Sales Company s HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS Unless the set...

Page 265: ...art service mode and enable the following setting COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS FIRM COPIER OPTION FNC SW LCDSFLG Then disable the following setting COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS UGW F 2 407 COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS Local CDS CDS FIRM To set whether to permit update of the firmware by user administrator When 1 Enabled is set Updater can be activated from the user mode 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 1 LCDSFLG...

Page 266: ...tings button F 2 409 F 2 410 5 Ensure to enter https device c cdsknn net cds_soap updaterif in the field beside the Delivery Server URL button If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field click Delivery Server URL button to show the virtual keypad Check the URL and enter the correct one Delivery Server CDS Delivery Server Local CDS F 2 411 F 2 412 ...

Page 267: ...gister Update Software It is not displayed in service mode 6 Press OK to set the entered items Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully set Communication Test This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and or the file server Note CDS and RDS are another servers You need the communication test of CDS by all means even if You su...

Page 268: ...Service Technician Setting of Device Service Mode Level 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS UGW 0 1 Setting of UGW WebPortal In Customer Management screen set Do not distribute firmware to Distribute firmware Sales Company s HQ Setting of Authorities on UGW WebPortal See Analysis Firmware Distribution Information to grant the appropriate authorities to each account NOTE See imageWARE Remote Operator s Manu...

Page 269: ...OPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS FIRM 0 1 User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is not enabled CDS FIRM 0 User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is enabled CDS FIRM 1 F 2 418 F 2 419 Enabling Install Application Options Button of User Mode To allow users to install applications using Updater the setting of application installation should be set to ON for users in advance Service Technician S...

Page 270: ...I screen of Updater when the setting is enabled LOCLFIRM 1 Note In order to use manual update of the remote UI firmware for manual update is required Since firmware update is not supposed to be done by users at this point we have no plan to provide dedicated firmware Just in case it becomes necessary to support such update on the host machine side the default value of LOCLFIRM in service mode is s...

Page 271: ...2 2 2 233 2 233 Technology Updater Preparation Enabling Scheduled Update Button of User Mode Technology Updater Preparation Enabling Scheduled Update Button of User Mode F 2 426 F 2 427 ...

Page 272: ...Setting URL of Distribution Server This section describes how to set URL of the distribution server 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Software Management Settings button F 2 428 4 Press Settings button 5 Press Delivery Server URL to show the virtual keypad Enter the URL Delivery Server URL Enter the https device c cdsknn net cds_soap updaterif F 2 429 F 2 430 ...

Page 273: ...ment Settings License Other Register Update Software It is not displayed in service mode The URL setting of the local CDS server can be made through the following 2 methods Manual input on this screen Distribute the setting information from Device Firmware Update Plug in DFU Plug in and remotely make the setting 6 Press OK to set the entered items Now the URL of the distribution server is successf...

Page 274: ...g Output Log Output Description Trace Detailed logs for debug Information Logs related to operations done on the system Important Message Update logs output by firmware type Installation logs by MEAP application Logs related to enabled functions by system option Ordinary Error Logs for ordinary errors System Error Logs for internal system errors 6 Press OK button to set the selected log level Now ...

Page 275: ...Technology Updater System Management Operations Displaying Logs 4 Press Select Log Display button 5 Press Display Update Logs button F 2 436 F 2 437 6 System Option MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown Press OK button to exit this operation F 2 438 ...

Page 276: ...ogs System Logs This section describes how to confirm System Logs 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Software Management Settings button 4 Press Select Log Display button F 2 439 F 2 440 5 Press Display System Logs button 6 Updater internal logs are displayed Press OK button to exit this operation F 2 441 F 2 442 ...

Page 277: ...rsion Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual for more detailed information Communication Test This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and or the file server 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Software Management Settings button 4 Press Test Communication button F 2 443 ...

Page 278: ... server to execute the communication test to the distribution server Using the download file information for communication test the contents for test are downloaded from the file server for the communication test to the file server F 2 444 F 2 445 6 Upon the communication test completed the communication test result screen is shown Press OK button to exit this operation Caution Carry out the commu...

Page 279: ...eplacing HDD See MEAP Service Manual for further information The settings initialized in format or replacement should be restored See Preparation in chapter 2 of this manual for details NOTE When formatting or replacing HDD distribution schedule downloaded firmware not updated yet and logs update system logs will be deleted How to Replace Controller Boards The steps are different depending on whic...

Page 280: ...if the user downloads the firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with UGW linked download before A The previously downloaded firmware in the method of UGW linked download will be overridden by the subsequently downloaded one This is because only one downloaded firmware can be held on the device The firmware downloaded in the method of Service mode linked download and...

Page 281: ...Q How many devices can be managed by 1 set of DFU Plug in Local CSD A Up to 1000 devices can be registered However only up to 5 updaters can access the local CSD at a time FAQ on Firmware Distribution Task Q If the version of the firmware on the local CDS is the same with or older than the firmware on the device what will occur when firmware update is performed Will an error occur because firmware...

Page 282: ... restarted Users should restart the device manually FAQ on General Matters of Updater No 1 Q What preparation is needed in each installation method A See the table below for preparation required in each installation method For updating firmware Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS CTL CDS UGW CDS FIRM LOCLFIRM LCDSFLG Installation Method Setting Sales Company s HQ Network ...

Page 283: ...te UI Yes Yes No 2 Q How can operations using Updater be masked on the users side A Be sure to perform the following from the service mode Masking Firmware Installation Setting Device Service Mode Level 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS FIRM 1 0 Setting Device Service Mode Level 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW LOCLFIRM 1 0 Masking Application Installation Setting Device Service Mode Level 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW C...

Page 284: ...es 1 Perform the import of the DCM data of the service mode earlier 2 Reboot the Host machine 3 Import the DCM data of the user mode As for service mode if the process is not completed within 5 minutes in the case of export and 15 minutes in the case of import the item performed at that time is continued until it ends but the final result becomes ERROR Data to which no password is set when exporti...

Page 285: ...llectively Exported from RUI For the reason of security it is not appropriate that the user mode can be exported from service mode without user s permission Because of that it cannot be exported due to the specification However it is possible to import the setting values of user mode exported from RUI Preparation PC and web browser USB memory device to store the data of reference machine Overall f...

Page 286: ...tdown Weekly Timer Yes Yes Yes Auto Sleep Time Yes Yes Yes Sleep Mode Energy Use Yes Yes Yes Auto Sleep Weekly Timer Yes Yes Yes Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings Yes Yes Yes Network Confirm Network Connection Set ChangesYes Yes Yes TCP IP Settings Setting Information Lev 1 Lev 2 Lev 3 IPv4 Settings Use IPv4 Yes Yes Yes IP Address Settings IP Address Yes Subnet Mask Yes Yes Yes Gateway Address Yes Yes...

Page 287: ...Yes Yes Yes Optimize PDF for Web Yes Yes Yes 256 bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF Yes Yes Yes Document Scan Lock Operational Settings Yes Yes Yes Set Authentication Method Yes Yes Yes Setting Information Lev 1 Lev 2 Lev 3 Copy Auto Collate Yes Yes Yes Auto Orientation Yes Yes Yes Select Color Settings for Copy Yes Yes Yes Send Common Settings Yes Yes Yes E Mail I Fax Settings Register Unit Name ...

Page 288: ...Auto Select Adjustment Yes Yes Yes Make Remote Add Book Open Make Address Book Open Yes Yes Yes Management Settings Device Management Device Information Settings Yes Setting Information Lev 1 Lev 2 Lev 3 Device Information Delivery Settings Register Destinations Yes Yes Set Auto Delivery Yes Yes Restrict Receiving Device Information Yes Yes Yes Restrict Receiving for Each Function Yes Yes Yes Repo...

Page 289: ...2 116 Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM The numbers shown in the Compatibility level are explained in the table below Compatibility level Lv Description 0 Not supported 1 Can import to a device of the same model and same SN only Usable for the purpose of backup restore 2 Can import to a device of a same model 3 Can import to a device of a different model also DCM list for Se...

Page 290: ...ER ADJUST CCD MTF S8 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S9 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH R2 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH R10 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH B2 Yes Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH B10 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH G2 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH G10 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M10 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M11 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M12 Yes COPIER ADJUST ...

Page 291: ...DJUST DENS CONT M Yes COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT C Yes COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT K Yes COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK T Yes COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK L Yes Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK R Yes COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK B Yes COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT Y Yes COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT M Yes COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT C Yes COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT K Yes CO...

Page 292: ... 2TR N2 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR P1 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR P2 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H1 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H2 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR UH1 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR UH2 Yes Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR N12 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR N22 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H12 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H22 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV...

Page 293: ...JUST FEED ADJ ADJ MFRE Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG THCK Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG OHT Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG DUP1 Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG DUP2 Yes Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ LP FEED1 Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ LP MULT1 Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ LP DUP1 Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG SPD Yes COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A4R Yes...

Page 294: ... COPIER OPTION FNC SW SJB UNW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION FNC SW WEBV SW Yes Yes Yes Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER OPTION FNC SW COMP PRT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION FNC SW ARCDT SW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION FNC SW SJOB CL Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION FNC SW USB RCNT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION FNC SW MIBCOUNT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION FNC SW MEAP PRI Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPT...

Page 295: ...Yes COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEV SW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEV INT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEV POT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEV RTR Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEN LIV Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION NETWORK IFX CHIG Yes Yes Yes Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER OPTION NETWORK DNSTRANS Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION NETWORK PROXYRES Yes Yes Y...

Page 296: ...OPIER OPTION IMG DEV DELV THY Yes COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DELV THC Yes COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DELV THM Yes COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DELV THK Yes COPIER OPTION IMG DEV ADJ VPP Yes COPIER OPTION IMG DEV PAP W EN Yes Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER OPTION IMG DEV PTN LVL Yes COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DMX OF Y Yes COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DMX OF M Yes COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DMX OF C Y...

Page 297: ...ION USER DATE DSP Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER MF LG ST Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER CNT DISP Yes Yes Yes Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER OPTION USER NW SCAN Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER JOB INVL Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER LGSW DSP Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER PR PSESW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER CPRT DSP Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER PCL COPY Yes Yes...

Page 298: ...Yes Yes COPIER OPTION CST U1 NAME Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION CST U2 NAME Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION CST U3 NAME Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION CST U4 NAME Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION ACC COIN Yes COPIER OPTION ACC DK P Yes COPIER OPTION ACC CARD SW Yes COPIER OPTION ACC SC TYPE Yes COPIER OPTION ACC CC SPSW Yes COPIER OPTION ACC UNIT PRC Yes COPIER OPTION ACC MIN PRC Yes Initial screen Large Middle Small I...

Page 299: ...Yes T 2 118 Import export by service mode external The following shows the procedure for importing and exporting the service mode setting values in service mode With export by which data is collected from the machine service mode setting values can be backed up With import data backed up from service mode and that backed up from remote UI can be restored The save destination of backup data can be ...

Page 300: ...ice mode and press BACKUP 3 Select LIST after the screen moves to BACKUP 4 When saving to the external USB memory device select 1 and press OK F 2 450 F 2 451 5 The names of dcm files saved in the external USB memory device are displayed 6 Select PASSWD enter a password from the software keyboard and then press OK Clickhere F 2 452 F 2 453 F 2 454 ...

Page 301: ...ton on the main menu F 2 455 F 2 456 Reference Model S N Export YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS iAC5255_JWH00003_V0102_0040_2012_0124_193650 dcm DCM File format Main controller firm ware version DCM Job management number Import Preparation USB memory device Required when importing from an external USB memory device It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device No firmware registration is necessa...

Page 302: ...or restoring data from an external USB memory device 1 Connect the USB memory device When using the external USB memory device 2 Log in to service mode and press RESTORE 3 Select LIST after the screen moves to RESTORE F 2 458 F 2 459 4 When referring to the external USB memory device select 1 and press OK 5 The names of dcm files referred to in the external USB memory device are displayed F 2 460 ...

Page 303: ...e of the file to be selected and press OK F 2 462 F 2 463 8 When the correct file is displayed press Note Specification of file selection display is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected in SELECT USB memory device Up to 8 files are displayed in a screen 9 Select PASSWD enter a password from the software keyboard and then press OK Clickhere F 2 464 F 2...

Page 304: ...f the file has been confirmed is displayed after the password is entered 10 After registering the password select RESTORE Press OK to execute import F 2 466 F 2 467 11 OK is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed Press 12 After access to the USB memory device has occurred select LIST 0 and press OK Unmount the USB memory device It can also be removed by pressi...

Page 305: ...troller 2 service mode backup of DCON RCON DCM enables to back up only service mode setting values There is still necessary information other than setting values when replacing a PCB SRAM backup or service mode backup enables to save data other than setting values Export Preparation There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine Overall flow Here is a procedure for exp...

Page 306: ...hen 0 character is entered The setting in which no password is set is allowed only for service mode No space is allowed in the middle of a password Password is case sensitive F 2 473 F 2 474 6 After registering the password select BACKUP Press OK to execute export 7 OK is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed Press Reference Model S N Export YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS ...

Page 307: ... a procedure for Importing data of the HDD of the machine Procedure 1 Select internal HDD as save destination LIST 2 2 Register password 3 Import from the internal HDD Import from the internal HDD 1 Log in to service mode and press RESTORE 2 Select LIST after the screen moves to RESTORE F 2 478 F 2 479 3 When referring to the internal HDD select 2 and press OK 4 The names of dcm files referred to ...

Page 308: ... the left side of the file to be selected F 2 482 F 2 483 7 When the correct file is displayed press Note Specification of file selection display is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected in SELECT HDD Up to 2 files are displayed in a screen 8 Select PASSWD enter a password from the software keyboard and then press OK Clickhere F 2 484 F 2 485 ...

Page 309: ... selection display is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has been confirmed is displayed after the password is entered 9 After registering the password select RESTORE Press OK to execute import F 2 486 F 2 487 10 OK is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed Press OK F 2 488 ...

Page 310: ...3 3 Periodical Service Periodical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts Cleaning Parts ...

Page 311: ... 11 Primary transfer roller Color FC0 0257 3 20 minutes 500 000 Replace DRBL 1 TR ROLC Yes p 4 119 12 Primary transfer roller Bk FC0 0257 1 20 minutes 500 000 Replace DRBL 1 TR ROLK Yes p 4 117 13 Secondary transfer inner roller FC8 4402 1 20 minutes 500 000 Replace Yes Replacing when replace secondary transfer outer roller p 4 123 14 Secondary transfer outer roller FC0 4878 1 5 minutes 500 000 Re...

Page 312: ...leanig If necessary cleaning with alcohol p 4 176 37 Pre registration guide 1 5 minutes 50 000 Cleanig If necessary cleaning with lint free paper p 4 176 38 Fixing delivery guide 1 5 minutes 50 000 Cleanig If necessary cleaning with lint free paper p 4 179 39 Vertical path sensor FK2 6470 1 5 minutes 150 000 Cleanig Cleaning with lint free paper p 4 177 40 Lightproof Sheet 1 5 minutes 150 000 Clea...

Page 313: ...ing Parts Periodical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts When Replacing Parts When replacing the Consumable Parts be sure to clear the Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 DRBL 2 Recycle toner bottle Dust blocking glass cleaning pad Toner filter F 3 1 ...

Page 314: ...iodical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts Primary transfer roller Secondary transfer inner roller Secondary transfer outer roller ITB ITB cleaning blade Transfer Separation guide unit Developing unit Y Developing unit M Developing unit C Developing unit Bk F 3 2 ...

Page 315: ...odical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts Periodical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts Roller pressure Fixing bearing Fixing bearing Film unit 100V 120V 230V F 3 3 ...

Page 316: ...iodical Service Consumable Parts Replacement Parts and Cleaning Parts Pickup idler gear Pickup idler gear Cassette separation 2 roller Cassette feeding 2 roller Cassette feeding 1 roller Cassette separation 1 roller Multi Purpose Tray Separation Roller Multi Purpose Tray Feed Roller F 3 4 ...

Page 317: ...5 minutes 150K DRBL 2 C3 FD RL 13 Cassette4 Feed Roller 1 5 minutes 150K DRBL 2 C4 FD RL 14 Cassette3 Separation Roller FC6 6661 1 5 minutes 150K DRBL 2 C3 SP RL 15 Cassette4 Separation Roller 1 5 minutes 150K DRBL 2 C4 SP RL 16 Paper Deck Unit B2 Pickup Roller Front FF5 7829 1 10 minutes 500K DRBL 2 PD PU RL 17 Pickup Roller Rear FF5 7830 1 10 minutes 500K 18 Feed Roller FF5 7541 1 10 minutes 250...

Page 318: ...0 1 30 minutes 1 000 000 sheets 32 Inlet static charge eliminator FL2 0822 1 30 minutes 1 000 000 sheets DRBL 2 ENT STC 33 Swing guide inside static charge eliminator 4F3 0929 1 30 minutes 1 000 000 sheets DRBL 2 CENT STC 34 Buffer Roller FC5 3442 2 30 minutes 1 000 000 sheets DRBL 2 FN BFFRL 35 Paper Return Roller Front 4A3 0950 1 30 minutes 1 000 000 sheets DRBL 2 BACK ROL 36 Paper Return Roller...

Page 319: ...2 Stream reading glass Surface FL2 9620 000 1 CL Use Oil Glass Cleaner FY9 6020 Do not use alcohol Stream reading glass Surface Back 1 CL Including the white plate positioning of the glass surface 3 Scanner rail shaft CL LU SHC Oil FY9 6029 CAUTION Cleaning the Stream Reading Glass with alcohol results in thinning of the oil film on the surface As a result the frictional resistance of the surface ...

Page 320: ...or 16 Shutter cover 2 Third Delivery Roller 7 Duplex Feed Lower Roller 12 Transparency Sensor 17 Fixing separation guide 3 Second Third Delivery Inlet Roller 8 Registration Roller 13 Dust blocking Glass 18 Post Fixing Roller 4 Fixing Inner Delivery Roller 9 Pre registration Guide Assembly 14 Secondary Transfar Guide Assembly 19 First Delivery Roller 5 Duplex Feed Upper Roller 10 Lightproof Sheet 1...

Page 321: ...ement and Cleaning Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Main Controller Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing System Pickup Feed System Option Data to be handled by SRAM with HDD Encryption Board ...

Page 322: ... Reader front cover 3 Control panel under cover 4 Control panel upper cover 5 Control panel side cover 1 6 Control panel side cover 2 7 Front right cover 8 Front upper cover 9 Toner replacement cover 10 Front cover 11 Left grip cover 12 Left duct cover 13 Left lower cover 14 Left upper cover 15 Inner bottom cover 16 Reader left cover 17 Glass retainer Left 18 DF base left cover 19 Glass retainer C...

Page 323: ... cover 29 Right rear cover 1 30 Conector cover 31 Right rear cover 2 32 Heater switch cover 33 Right rear cover 3 34 Right lower sub cover 2 35 Right lower sub cover 3 36 Right lower cover 37 casset right upper sub cover 2 38 Right lower sub cover 1 39 Casset grip 40 casset right upper cover 2 41 casset right upper sub cover 1 42 casset right upper sub cover 3 43 Right front cover 3 44 Stack bypas...

Page 324: ...Cleaning List of Parts List of Cover 54 53 52 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 No Name 52 Inner output cover 53 Inner right cover 54 Output tray 55 Output tray guide 56 Output stopper 57 Output frame 58 Inner rear cover 3 59 Inner rear cover 2 60 Inner rear cover 1 61 Inner output sensor cover F 4 3 T 4 3 ...

Page 325: ... 4 4 5 4 5 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts List of Main Unit Unit Layout Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts List of Main Unit Unit Layout List of Main Unit Unit Layout 1 2 3 F 4 4 ...

Page 326: ... 6 4 6 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts List of Main Unit Unit Layout Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts List of Main Unit Unit Layout 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 18 14 15 16 17 19 20 F 4 5 ...

Page 327: ...4 4 4 7 4 7 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts List of Main Unit Unit Layout Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts List of Main Unit Unit Layout 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 F 4 6 ...

Page 328: ...4 4 4 8 4 8 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts List of Main Unit Unit Layout Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts List of Main Unit Unit Layout 30 F 4 7 ...

Page 329: ...13 Drum Unit Y Compatible with iR ADV C5051 series 14 Developing Assembly Bk C5051 C5045 iR ADV C5051 C5045 is compatible with iR ADV C5255 C5250 iR ADV C5035 C5030 is compatible with iR ADV C5240 C5230 No compatibility with other models 15 Developing Assembly C C5051 C5045 16 Developing Assembly M C5051 C5045 17 Developing Assembly Y C5051 C5045 18 Process Unit 19 Laser Scanner Unit C5051 C5045 N...

Page 330: ...livery flapper solenoid Third delivery flapper solenoid P006 15 1 ON SL 7 SL ON OK 2 SL6 Second delivery flapper solenoid Second delivery flapper solenoid P005 1 1 ON SL 6 SL ON OK 3 SL5 First delivery flapper solenoid First delivery flapper solenoid P005 2 1 ON SL 5 SL ON OK 4 SL3 Cassette 2 pickup solenoid Cassette 2 pickup solenoid P015 1 1 ON SL 3 SL ON OK 5 SL2 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid Cass...

Page 331: ...4 4 4 11 4 11 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Clutch Solenoid Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Clutch Solenoid 6 7 8 10 11 12 9 F 4 9 F 4 10 ...

Page 332: ... clutch P010 5 1 ON CL 1 CL ON OK 7 SL4 Multi purpose tray lifting solenoid Multi purpose tray lifting solenoid P005 0 1 ON SL 4 SL ON OK 8 SL1 Registration shutter solenoid Registration shutter solenoid SL 1 SL ON OK 9 CL2 Toner supply clutch Y Toner supply clutch Y CL 2 CL ON OK 10 CL3 Toner supply clutch M Toner supply clutch M CL 3 CL ON OK 11 CL4 Toner supply clutch C Toner supply clutch C CL...

Page 333: ...4 4 4 13 4 13 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Switch Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Switch Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F 4 11 ...

Page 334: ...4 4 4 14 4 14 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Switch Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Switch 9 8 F 4 12 ...

Page 335: ...switch 1 3 SW4 DC interlock switch 2 DC interlock switch 2 4 SW9 Cassette 2 size switch B Cassette 2 size switch B P012 4 7 0 detect 5 SW8 Cassette 2 size switch A Cassette 2 size switch A P012 0 3 0 detect 6 SW6 Cassette 1 size switch A Cassette 1 size switch A P012 8 11 0 detect 7 SW7 Cassette 1 size switch B Cassette 1 size switch B P012 12 15 0 detect 8 SW1 Main power supply switch Main power ...

Page 336: ...4 4 4 16 4 16 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Motor Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Motor Motor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 F 4 13 F 4 14 ...

Page 337: ... MTR 17 MTR ON OK 4 M18 Multi purpose tray motor Multi purpose tray motor P011 7 1 enable MTR 18 MTR ON OK 5 M19 Registration motor Registration motor P011 11 1 enable MTR 19 MTR ON OK 6 M9 Toner container motor Y Toner container motor Y MTR 9 MTR ON OK 7 M10 Toner container motor M Toner container motor M MTR 10 MTR ON OK 8 M11 Toner container motor C Toner container motor C MTR 11 MTR ON OK 9 M1...

Page 338: ...4 4 4 18 4 18 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Motor Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Motor 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 22 15 F 4 15 ...

Page 339: ...delivery motor P011 15 1 enable MTR 23 MTR ON OK 17 M24 Reverse roller motor Reverse roller motor P010 3 1 enable MTR 24 MTR ON OK 18 M25 Third delivery motor Third delivery motor P005 7 1 enable MTR 25 MTR ON OK 19 M26 Waste toner stirring motor Waste toner stirring motor P010 8 1 ON MTR 26 MTR ON OK 20 M30 CBk Scanner Motor High Low Laser Scanner Unit 21 M29 YM Scanner Motor High Low Laser Scann...

Page 340: ...4 4 4 20 4 20 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Motor Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Motor 33 32 31 30 26 27 28 29 F 4 16 ...

Page 341: ... M3 Drum motor C Drum motor C MTR 13 MTR ON OK 28 M2 Drum motor M Drum motor M MTR 13 MTR ON OK 29 M1 Drum motor Y Drum motor Y MTR 13 MTR ON OK 30 M5 Developing motor Y Developing motor Y MTR 5 MTR ON OK 31 M6 Developing motor M Developing motor M MTR 6 MTR ON OK 32 M7 Developing motor C Developing motor C MTR 7 MTR ON OK 33 M8 Developing motor Bk Developing motor Bk MTR 8 MTR ON OK The 5 motors ...

Page 342: ...4 4 4 22 4 22 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Fan Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Fan Fan 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 F 4 17 F 4 18 ...

Page 343: ...4 4 4 23 4 23 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Fan Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Fan 10 13 11 12 F 4 19 ...

Page 344: ...y fan 1 P004 14 0 connect FAN 7 FAN ON OK 5 FM5 Fixing cooling fan front Fixing cooling fan front P007 14 1 ON FAN 5 FAN ON OK 6 FM10 Process cartridge fan front Process cartridge fan front P015 1 ON FAN 10 FAN ON OK 7 FM4 Process cartridge fan rear Process cartridge fan rear FAN 4 FAN ON OK 8 FM6 Fixing cooling fan rear Fixing cooling fan rear P007 14 1 ON FAN 6 FAN ON OK 9 FM8 Secondary transfer...

Page 345: ...4 4 4 25 4 25 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Sensor Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Sensor Sensor 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 F 4 20 ...

Page 346: ...ivery sensor Inner delivery sensor P009 4 1 paper 9 PS32 Fixing shutter position sensor Fixing shutter position sensor P009 3 1 ON lightproof 10 PS31 Fixing shutter HP sensor Fixing shutter HP sensor P009 2 1 ON lightproof 11 PS58 ITB displacement sensor 5 ITB displacement sensor 5 P004 13 1 ON 12 PS28 ITB displacement sensor 4 ITB displacement sensor 4 P005 8 1 ON 13 PS26 ITB displacement sensor ...

Page 347: ...4 27 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Sensor Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Sensor 30 32 31 34 33 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 19 F 4 21 ...

Page 348: ...sor M Toner container cam HP sensor M P024 5 1 HP 32 PS11 Toner cap position sensor C Toner cap position sensor C 33 PS7 Toner container cam HP sensor C Toner container cam HP sensor C P024 6 1 HP 34 PS12 Toner cap position sensor Bk Toner cap position sensor Bk 35 UN38 Bk drum encoder sensor 2 Bk drum encoder sensor 2 36 UN37 Bk drum encoder sensor 1 Bk drum encoder sensor 1 37 UN36 C drum encode...

Page 349: ...4 4 4 29 4 29 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Sensor Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Sensor 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 66 65 64 72 71 70 69 68 67 F 4 22 ...

Page 350: ...009 8 1 paper 60 UN51 Transparency sensor Transparency sensor P009 7 1 paper 61 UN49 Patch sensor center Patch sensor center P006 4 1 LED_ON 62 UN48 Patch sensor rear Patch sensor rear P006 5 1 LED_ON 63 PS33 Registration sensor Registration sensor P009 9 1 paper 64 UN50 Environment sensor 2 Environment sensor 2 65 PS29 Laser shutter sensor Laser shutter sensor P014 8 1 lightproof 66 UN22 Environm...

Page 351: ...4 4 4 31 4 31 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Sensor Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Sensor 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 F 4 23 ...

Page 352: ...Cassette 2 pre registration sensor Cassette 2 pre registration sensor P013 8 1 paper 78 PS50 Cassette 2 paper sensor Cassette 2 paper sensor P013 11 0 paper 79 PS53 Cassette 2 paper level sensor A Cassette 2 paper level sensor A P013 10 0 paper 80 PS54 Cassette 2 paper level sensor B Cassette 2 paper level sensor B P013 9 0 paper 81 PS52 Cassette 1 paper level sensor B Cassette 1 paper level senso...

Page 353: ...4 4 4 33 4 33 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Heater Other Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Heater Other Heater Other 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 F 4 24 ...

Page 354: ...4 4 4 34 4 34 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Heater Other Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Heater Other 8 9 F 4 25 ...

Page 355: ...NDEX No No Name Replacement unit 1 H1 Fixing heater Film Unit 2 TH1 Sub thermistor 2 Film Unit 3 TP1 Temperature fuse Film Unit 4 TH1 Main thermistor 2 Film Unit 5 TH1 Main thermistor 1 Film Unit 6 TH1 Sub thermistor 1 Film Unit 7 H2 Drum heater Bk Drum heater Bk 8 SP1 Speaker Speaker 9 ELCB1 Leakage breaker Leakage breaker T 4 16 ...

Page 356: ...4 4 4 36 4 36 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts PCB Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts PCB PCB 1 2 3 4 7 6 5 8 9 10 11 12 F 4 26 ...

Page 357: ...sor relay PCB Bk Toner sensor relay PCB Bk 5 Ten key PCB Ten key PCB 6 CPU PCB CPU PCB 7 Volume PCB Volume PCB 8 Sub key PCB Sub key PCB C5051 C5045 9 UN15 Laser driver PCB C Laser Scanner Unit 10 UN14 Laser driver PCB Bk Laser Scanner Unit 11 UN13 Laser driver PCB Y Laser Scanner Unit 12 UN12 Laser driver PCB M Laser Scanner Unit C5035 C5030 9 UN15 Laser driver PCB C Laser Scanner Unit 10 UN14 La...

Page 358: ...4 4 4 38 4 38 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts PCB Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts PCB 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 27 26 25 24 23 F 4 27 ...

Page 359: ...ssembly 17 UN24 Y pre exposure LED PCB rear LED PCB 18 UN26 M pre exposure LED PCB rear LED PCB 19 UN28 C pre exposure LED PCB rear LED PCB 20 UN30 Bk pre exposure LED PCB rear LED PCB 21 UN19 Drum unit new old detection PCB Drum unit new old detection PCB 22 UN29 Bk pre exposure LED PCB front LED PCB 23 UN21 Recycle toner sensor PCB Recycle toner sensor PCB 24 UN27 C pre exposure LED PCB front LE...

Page 360: ...4 4 4 40 4 40 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts PCB Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts PCB 28 29 30 31 32 37 36 35 34 33 38 39 40 41 42 43 F 4 28 ...

Page 361: ...T 2 PCB HVT 2 PCB 33 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB Cassette feed driver PCB 34 UN5 Relay PCB Relay PCB 35 UN4 Drum driver PCB Drum driver PCB 36 UN10 24V power supply PCB 2 Power Supply Unit 37 UN16 HVT 1 PCB HVT 1 PCB 38 UN11 12V power supply PCB Power Supply Unit 39 UN9 All night power supply PCB All night power supply PCB 40 UN6 AC driver PCB AC driver PCB 41 UN2 Feed driver PCB Feed driver PCB ...

Page 362: ... 42 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Conector 23 23 23 23 26 25 28 27 13 22 1 10 21 7 6 5 4 3 2 24 18 15 17 20 11 19 14 9 8 16 12 F 4 29 ...

Page 363: ...CB 6 J109 UN1 DC controller PCB 18 J313 UN4 Drum driver PCB 7 J110 UN1 DC controller PCB 19 J654 UN16 HVT 1 PCB 7 J110 UN1 DC controller PCB 20 J653 UN16 HVT 1 PCB 8 J111 UN1 DC controller PCB 21 J656 UN17 HVT 2 PCB 8 J111 UN1 DC controller PCB 22 J655 UN17 HVT 2 PCB 9 J112 UN1 DC controller PCB J5026 J5075 J5012 23 J42 TH1 Main thermistor 1 9 J112 UN1 DC controller PCB J5026 J5075 J5012 23 J42 TH...

Page 364: ...4 4 4 44 4 44 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 18 19 21 17 20 1 2 9 6 5 4 16 7 15 14 3 12 13 10 11 8 F 4 30 ...

Page 365: ...controller PCB 14 J401 UN5 Relay PCB 4 J122 UN1 DC controller PCB 15 J2001 UN6 AC driver PCB 5 J125 UN1 DC controller PCB 16 J252 UN2 Feed driver PCB 6 J126 UN1 DC controller PCB J815 Buffer Pass Unit 6 J126 UN1 DC controller PCB J816 Inner Finisher 7 J127 UN1 DC controller PCB J5037 J809 Finisher 7 J127 UN1 DC controller PCB J813 Paper Deck Unit B1 8 J132 UN1 DC controller PCB 17 J5042 Key Switch...

Page 366: ...4 4 4 46 4 46 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 1 2 4 10 8 9 7 5 6 3 17 16 15 11 12 13 14 18 F 4 31 ...

Page 367: ...cement sensor 3 1 J255 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5052 J5062 8 J6028 PS26 ITB displacement sensor 2 1 J255 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5052 J5062 9 J6027 PS25 ITB displacement sensor 1 1 J255 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5052 10 J6026 PS24 ITB steering sensor 2 J258 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5086 11 J6082 CL1 Multi purpose tray pickup clutch 2 J258 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5086 12 J6083 M18 Multi purpose tray motor 2 J258 UN2 ...

Page 368: ...4 4 4 48 4 48 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 2 3 1 10 9 5 8 7 6 11 13 12 14 4 F 4 32 ...

Page 369: ...driver PCB J5051 J755 6 J600 UN20 Process unit relay PCB 1 J254 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5051 J755 7 J6111 M26 Waste toner stirring motor 1 J254 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5051 J755 8 J6110 UN21 Waste toner sensor PCB 2 J256 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5046 9 J6108 UN49 Patch sensor center 2 J256 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5046 10 J6107 UN48 Patch sensor rear 2 J256 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5046 11 J6106 UN47 Patch sensor f...

Page 370: ...4 4 4 50 4 50 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 1 3 2 16 14 13 17 15 11 12 9 4 5 6 7 8 18 10 F 4 33 ...

Page 371: ...5032 J5106 J5083 8 J6065 SL5 First delivery flapper solenoid 1 J262 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5032 J5106 J5083 9 J6089 PS42 Second delivery sensor 1 J262 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5032 J5106 10 J6090 PS39 Reverse sensor 1 J262 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5032 11 J6092 PS45 Second delivery tray full sensor 1 J262 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5032 12 J6078 PS57 Pre reverse sensor 2 J264 UN2 Feed driver PCB 13 J6071 FM8 Seco...

Page 372: ...4 4 4 52 4 52 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 1 5 2 3 4 8 9 17 18 10 6 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 F 4 34 ...

Page 373: ...J5075 J5012 J5060 9 J6101 PS37 Inner delivery sensor 2 J261 UN2 Feed driver PCB 10 J6084 M21 Fixing motor 3 J263 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5031 11 J6140 M25 Third delivery motor 3 J263 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5031 12 J6141 M24 Reverse roller motor 3 J263 UN2 Feed driver PCB J5031 13 J6142 M23 First Second delivery motor 4 J264 UN2 Feed driver PCB 14 J6091 PS44 First delivery tray full sensor 4 J264 UN2 Fe...

Page 374: ...or 1 4 2 3 KeyNo J No Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo J No Symbol Parts Name 1 J273 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB 2 J6060 M28 Laser shutter motor 1 J273 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB 3 J6123 FM10 Process cartridge fan front 1 J273 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB 4 J6097 PS29 Laser shutter sensor F 4 35 T 4 26 ...

Page 375: ...4 4 4 55 4 55 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 1 2 3 18 19 7 5 4 10 11 8 12 9 6 15 13 16 17 14 F 4 36 ...

Page 376: ...sor 2 J275 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5065 10 J6136 PS54 Cassette 2 paper level sensor B 2 J275 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5065 11 J6135 PS53 Cassette 2 paper level sensor A 2 J275 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5065 12 J6134 PS50 Cassette 2 paper sensor 2 J275 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5064 13 J6133 SL2 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid 2 J275 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5064 14 J6132 PS55 Ca...

Page 377: ...4 4 4 57 4 57 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 1 2 5 7 6 3 4 8 9 F 4 37 ...

Page 378: ...276 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB 4 J6156 M17 Cassette 2 pickup motor 2 J277 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5028 J5068 5 J6087 PS34 Fixing inlet sensor 2 J277 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5028 J5068 6 J6086 PS36 Fixing arch sensor 2 2 J277 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5028 J5068 7 J6085 PS35 Fixing arch sensor 1 2 J277 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB J5028 J5054 8 J6077 PS38 Duplex paper sensor 2 J27...

Page 379: ...4 4 4 59 4 59 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 3 4 1 2 17 20 19 18 16 15 12 8 9 7 10 11 14 5 6 13 F 4 38 ...

Page 380: ...CB J5030 10 J6050 PS15 Toner container inner cover sensor C 2 J309 UN4 Drum driver PCB J5030 11 J6048 PS16 Toner container inner cover sensor Bk 2 J309 UN4 Drum driver PCB 12 J6046 PS17 Toner container outer cover sensor 3 J310 UN4 Drum driver PCB J5015 J5016 13 J5017 UN39 Toner sensor relay PCB Y 3 J310 UN4 Drum driver PCB J5018 J5019 14 J5020 UN40 Toner sensor relay PCB M 3 J310 UN4 Drum driver ...

Page 381: ...4 4 4 61 4 61 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 1 2 5 4 3 23 10 11 12 13 24 25 22 6 7 8 9 F 4 39 ...

Page 382: ...loping motor M 2 J305 UN4 Drum driver PCB 13 J6015 M5 Developing motor Y 3 J306 UN4 Drum driver PCB 14 J6024 UN31 Y drum encoder sensor 1 3 J306 UN4 Drum driver PCB 15 J6023 UN32 Y drum encoder sensor 2 3 J306 UN4 Drum driver PCB 16 J6022 UN33 M drum encoder sensor 1 3 J306 UN4 Drum driver PCB 17 J6021 UN34 M drum encoder sensor 2 3 J306 UN4 Drum driver PCB 18 J6020 UN35 C drum encoder sensor 1 3 ...

Page 383: ...4 4 4 63 4 63 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 10 11 12 9 4 1 2 5 3 6 7 8 13 F 4 40 ...

Page 384: ...CB 3 J425 UN5 Relay PCB 9 J650 UN16 HVT 1 PCB 3 J425 UN5 Relay PCB 10 J651 UN17 HVT 2 PCB 3 J425 UN5 Relay PCB 11 J652 UN18 HVT 3 PCB 4 J426 UN5 Relay PCB J5101 Reader controll PCB 5 J427 UN5 Relay PCB J801 CPU PCB 5 J427 UN5 Relay PCB J802 USB Device Port 6 J428 UN5 Relay PCB J804 Inner Finisher 6 J428 UN5 Relay PCB J805 Cassette feeding Unit 6 J428 UN5 Relay PCB J803 Finisher 7 J432 UN5 Relay PC...

Page 385: ...4 4 4 65 4 65 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 2 1 5 3 4 6 9 12 8 13 11 14 7 10 F 4 41 ...

Page 386: ...UN5 Relay PCB 7 J835 UN11 12V power supply PCB 2 J412 UN5 Relay PCB 8 J834 UN10 24V power supply PCB2 3 J422 UN5 Relay PCB 9 J129 UN1 DC controller PCB 4 J423 UN5 Relay PCB 10 J259 UN2 Feed driver PCB 4 J423 UN5 Relay PCB 11 J272 UN3 Cassette feed driver PCB 5 J424 UN5 Relay PCB 12 J301 UN4 Drum driver PCB 5 J424 UN5 Relay PCB 13 J302 UN4 Drum driver PCB 6 J431 UN5 Relay PCB 14 J2001 UN6 AC driver...

Page 387: ...ol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo J No Symbol Parts Name 1 J1003 UN6 AC driver PCB SW5 AC interlock switch SW5 AC interlock switch J5006 J5087 J5012 J5007 3 J5013 H1 Fixing heater 4 J5014 H1 Fixing heater SW5 AC interlock switch J5006 J5087 J5012 J5007 TP1 Temperature fuse 2 J1007 UN6 AC driver PCB 5 J5005 H4 Cassette heater F 4 42 T 4 33 ...

Page 388: ...2 3 KeyNo J No Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo J No Symbol Parts Name 1 J1001 UN6 AC driver PCB AC in cable 2 J1002 UN6 AC driver PCB J5099 J866 GND 2 J1002 UN6 AC driver PCB J5099 J833 GND 3 J1005 UN6 AC driver PCB J5038 4 J5088 H3 Drum heater YMC 3 J1005 UN6 AC driver PCB 5 J5039 H2 Drum heater Bk F 4 43 T 4 34 ...

Page 389: ...4 4 4 69 4 69 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 1 4 7 6 2 3 5 10 8 9 11 F 4 44 ...

Page 390: ...y PCB2 1 J1004 UN6 AC driver PCB 9 J1101 UN11 12V power supply PCB 2 J1006 UN6 AC driver PCB J5006 J5010 SW1 Main power supply switch 2 J1006 UN6 AC driver PCB J5102 Reader controll PCB 3 J1008 UN6 AC driver PCB Cassette Feeding Unit AD1 4 J1009 UN6 AC driver PCB SW2 Environment switch 5 J1012 UN6 AC driver PCB Cassette heater unit 31 32 6 J1014 UN6 AC driver PCB 10 J681 UN9 All night power supply...

Page 391: ...4 4 4 71 4 71 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 13 8 2 3 1 7 6 4 5 11 14 12 10 9 F 4 45 ...

Page 392: ...ver PCB M 8 J6159 M32 Image skew correction motor M 2 J204 UN12 Laser driver PCB M 9 J6160 M31 Image skew correction motor Y 3 J205 UN12 Laser driver PCB M 10 J6161 M29 YM Scanner Motor High Low 4 J202 UN14 Laser driver PCB Bk 11 J103 UN15 Laser driver PCB C 5 J204 UN14 Laser driver PCB Bk 12 J6166 M33 Image skew correction motor C 5 J204 UN14 Laser driver PCB Bk 13 J6165 M34 Image skew correction...

Page 393: ...4 4 4 73 4 73 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 16 17 20 21 6 5 7 9 8 10 1 2 3 4 11 15 18 19 22 12 13 14 F 4 46 ...

Page 394: ...on PCB 13 J5095 UN45 Developing sub bias PCB C 4 J905 UN19 Drum unit new old detection PCB J5096 14 J6120 TS8 ATR sensor Bk 4 J905 UN19 Drum unit new old detection PCB 14 J5096 UN46 Developing sub bias PCB Bk 5 J601 UN20 Process unit relay PCB 15 J6115 UN23 Y pre exposure LED PCB front 6 J602 UN20 Process unit relay PCB 16 J6147 UN24 Y pre exposure LED PCB rear 6 J602 UN20 Process unit relay PCB 1...

Page 395: ...4 4 4 75 4 75 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 4 3 2 1 18 14 10 6 17 20 16 12 8 19 15 11 7 13 9 5 F 4 47 ...

Page 396: ... relay PCB M 10 J6038 PS10 Toner cap position sensor M 2 J659 UN40 Toner sensor relay PCB M 11 J6037 PS2 Toner supply sensor M 2 J659 UN40 Toner sensor relay PCB M 12 J6036 TS2 Piezo sensor M 3 J660 UN41 Toner sensor relay PCB C 13 J6152 PS7 Toner container cam HP sensor C 3 J660 UN41 Toner sensor relay PCB C 14 J6041 PS11 Toner cap position sensor C 3 J660 UN41 Toner sensor relay PCB C 15 J6040 P...

Page 397: ... Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 10 6 7 3 1 4 2 5 12 11 8 27 30 26 23 13 9 33 28 32 31 29 34 15 21 14 19 17 18 20 22 25 24 16 36 35 F 4 48 ...

Page 398: ...ontroller PCB 1 Copu Card Reader Attachment 12 J21 Main controller PCB 1 Signal interface Kit 13 J1025 Main controller PCB 1 14 J13 Main controller PCB 2 Additional Memory 15 J14 Main controller PCB 2 34 J101 Riser PCB 16 J15 Main controller PCB 2 USB D 17 J16 Main controller PCB 2 18 J17 Main controller PCB 2 19 J18 Main controller PCB 2 IN 20 J23 Main controller PCB 2 Debug SERIAL 21 J24 Main co...

Page 399: ...4 4 4 79 4 79 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts Conector 4 3 7 6 2 8 5 9 1 10 F 4 49 ...

Page 400: ... Intermediate Connector KeyNo J No Symbol Parts Name 1 J1001 CPU PCB Mein Controller PCB 1 2 J1002 CPU PCB Mein Controller PCB 1 3 J1003 CPU PCB J4001 Sub key PCB 4 J1004 CPU PCB 5 J1005 CPU PCB TTP 6 J1006 CPU PCB J2 LCD 7 J1007 CPU PCB J1 LCD 8 J1008 CPU PCB J3002 Ten key PCB 9 J1009 CPU PCB J3001 Ten key PCB Sub key PCB 10 J5001 Volume PCB T 4 40 ...

Page 401: ...ort Select Select All and enter the encryption password Execute Start Exporting to create a backup file DCM file CAUTION Collective export cannot be executed in the following cases Job is being executed or job is being waited for various functions set by transmission forwarding fax reception I FAX reception report print and timer Individual import export is being executed The address book is being...

Page 402: ...ler Removing the HDD Procedure 4 Disconnect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable from HDD and move them to the hole side of the Controller Box x2 Signal Cable Wire Saddle Power Cable 5 Remove the HDD Unit 2 screws x2 F 4 52 F 4 53 6 Remove the plate 2 screws x2 7 Remove the HDD 4 screws x4 HDD HDD Fixing Plate F 4 54 F 4 55 ...

Page 403: ...nother machine be sure to get agreement from user in advance that user data will be deleted In addition an HDD used in iR ADV C5255 series and later cannot be accessed from a PC due to enhanced security When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager 1 Go to COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD and enter the numerical value of the leading card which is used for Department ID Then press OK butt...

Page 404: ... Right Rear Cover 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw Claw x3 Procedure 1 If the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide Connectors Wire saddles Reader power cable Cable guide x2 x2 F 4 56 F 4 57 2 Remove the USB cable and the control panel communication cable x2 USB Cable Control Panel Communication Cable 3 Remove the 2 screws and lift the...

Page 405: ...installed backup to an HDD is not possible It is therefore recommended to perform backup to an USB memory device Temporarily backing up SRAM data to a USB memory device recommended USB memory device where the system software for this machine has been registered using the SST Or USB memory device formatted as FAT32 which has been checked that it can be recognized by the host machine In order to let...

Page 406: ... Service mode Lv1 COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD OK 2 When the download Menu HDD appears press the 5 key on the Control Panel 3 When the Backup Menu HDD appears press the 6 key on the Control Panel Backup Menu HDD 6 SRAM HDD C Return to Main Menu 4 Press the 0 key to confirm and then the SRAM data is stored in the internal HDD 5 Press the C key to return to the download Menu HDD 6 Press the Reset...

Page 407: ...Procedure 2 If the Reader Unit is installed remove the reader signal cable 1 connector 3 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 screw 1 hook Left Rear Sub Cover Hook F 4 66 F 4 67 Procedure 1 If the FAX Unit is installed remove the connector of communication cable 2 Hold the grip and remove the Main Controller PCB 2 2 screws x2 Grip NOTE When the option PCB is installed remove it F 4 68 F 4 69 ...

Page 408: ... Restore Menu USB will appear Press the 2 key 6 Press the 0 key to confirm and then the SRAM data is restored from the USB memory F 4 70 device 7 Press the C key to return to the download Menu USB 8 Press the Reset key to shut down the host machine When SRAM data is temporarily backed up to an HDD 1 After replacing the PCB start the machine by 2 8 startup 2 When the download Menu HDD appears press...

Page 409: ...r 3 Remove the Left Rear Cover and the Left Rear Sub Cover Refer to page 4 86 4 Remove the Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 1 claw x2 Rubber caps Rear cover Claw F 4 73 Procedure 1 When the Reader is installed remove the reader power cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide Connectors Wire saddles Reader power cable Cable guide x2 x2 NOTE If the Fax Unit is not installed refer to step 2 1 ...

Page 410: ...When replacing the DC Controller PCB execute the following Service Mode to backup the DC Controller PCB SRAM Execute COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP LEVEL2 After ACTIVE is displayed for approx 2 minutes OK is displayed After the above execution is completed turn OFF the main power supply Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 84 2 Remove the Right Rear Cove...

Page 411: ... Turn ON the main power supply and restore the DC Controller PCB SRAM Execute COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES LEVEL2 After the above execution ACTIVE is displayed for approx 2 minutes then OK is displayed Restoration is completed now Removing the Main Power Unit Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 84 2 Remove the Right Rear Cover 3 Remove the Left Rear C...

Page 412: ... Power Unit Procedure 7 Remove the Rear Lower Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 2 claws 2 hooks x2 Claw Claw x2 Hook Hook F 4 81 Procedure 1 Open the Drum Driver Unit 1 screw Drum Driver Unit Screw 2 Remove the FIN Lattice Connector Unit 1 wire saddle 2 connectors 2 screws 1 Protrusion x2 x2 Connectors Wire Saddle Protrusion Finisher Lafficeconnector Unit F 4 82 F 4 83 ...

Page 413: ...it Wire saddles Wire saddles 12 Connectors F 4 84 F 4 85 Removing the AC Driver Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 84 2 Remove the Right Rear Cover 3 Remove the Left Rear Cover Refer to page 4 86 4 Remove the Rear Cover Refer to page 4 89 5 Remove the Rear Lower Cover Refer to page 4 91 Procedure 1 Remove all the connector on the PCB and remove the AC D...

Page 414: ...ntrol Panel Procedure Removing the Control Panel Procedure 1 Pull out the Control Panel and remove the mold Claws Control Panel Mold x2 2 Remove the stopper 2 screws x2 Stopper F 4 87 F 4 88 3 Stand the Control Panel as indicated CAUTION Be careful not to drop the Control Panel when pulling it out 4 Remove the cover 1 screw 2 Claws Cover Claw x2 F 4 89 F 4 90 ...

Page 415: ...ning Main Controller Removing the Control Panel Procedure Parts Replacement and Cleaning Main Controller Removing the Control Panel Procedure 5 Remove the cable Harness Guide A 1 wire saddle 2 connectors x2 x2 Wire Saddle Connectors A F 4 91 ...

Page 416: ...tem Cleaning the Dust blocking Glass Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Procedure 1 Remove the Glass Cleaning Tool F 4 92 F 4 93 2 Clean the Dust blocking Glass from the 4 holes of the Waste Toner Container Dust blocking glass cleaning tool Removing the Dust blocking Glass Cleaning Pad Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Refer to page 4 96 Procedure 1 Remove the Glass Cleaning Tool 2 Remove the D...

Page 417: ...ient the plate is not inserted to the slit of the ITB Cover which may cause the damage of the sensor F 4 97 F 4 98 Remove the ITB Unit 3 Check that the arrow of ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is aligned with the triangle mark If it is not aligned adjust the arrow of lever to the triangle mark Triangle mark Triangle mark ITB sub pressure release lever ITB sub pressure release lever 4 Turn the ITB P...

Page 418: ...ky sense is felt If the ITB Unit is pulled out while the lever is lowered the ITB is scraped by the Plate and this may cause to make scratches on the ITB surface Click position Not to lower the ITB Pressure Releace Lever below the position where clicky sense is felt ITB pressure release lever F 4 101 CAUTION When pulling out the ITB Unit it may drop because it does not click at stop position if pu...

Page 419: ...rection of the arrow CAUTION When installing the ITB Unit align the ITB Unit with the 2 positions at the lead edge of rail ITB unit Rails F 4 104 Removing the Process Unit CAUTION When installing removing the Process Unit do not remove the Waste Toner Container F 4 103 8 Pull out the Process Unit until it stops 2 screws x2 9 Remove the 4 stepped screws fixed on the right and left rails x4 10 Hold ...

Page 420: ...it to protect the Drum Unit from the light Paper 12 Take the 2 rails of Process Unit back to the host machine NOTE When removing the Laser Scanner Unit 1 Y M laser Refer to procedure 13 14 15 F 4 108 F 4 109 Remove the Left Rear Cover and the Left Rear Sub Cover 13 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 5 claws x2 x5 Claws Rubber cap Rubber cap 14 If the Reader Unit is installed remove ...

Page 421: ...nit When removing the Laser Scanner Unit be sure to check the serial numbers affixed on both units and installation position of the units before operation Before installing the units be sure to see the foregoing serial numbers and install each unit to the original position If the unit is installed reversely the image displacement might occur NOTE This procedure describes the removal of Bk C Laser ...

Page 422: ... Image Formation Suction Duct 1 screw 1 claw Image formation suction duct Screw Claw NOTE When removing the Laser Scanner Unit 1 Y M laser Refer to procedure 3 4 5 3 Remove the Left Upper Cover 5 rubber caps 5 screws x5 Rubber caps Left upper cover F 4 114 F 4 115 4 Remove the Left Duct Unit 1 connector 2 screws x2 Left Duct Unit Connector 5 Remove the Scanner Fixing Spring 1 screw Fixing spring S...

Page 423: ...ON Since the Laser Scanner Unit needs adjustment do not disassemble it CAUTION At installation push the protrusion of Laser Scanner Unit into the hole of rear plate and adjust the front boss with the plate hole and install it Boss Protrusion Laser scanner unit Protrusion Hole F 4 118 CAUTION At installation pass the harness through the Sheet Guide and install it Sheet guide Sheet guide Actions aft...

Page 424: ...aw Claw 2 Remove the Fan Protection Plate and the Toner Filter Fan protection plate Toner filter F 4 119 F 4 120 Removing the ITB Unit Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 2 Remove the ITB Cover 2 screws loosen CAUTION Do not touch the ITB surface When installing the ITB Cover be sure to push it to the left If the pushing is insufficient the plate is not inse...

Page 425: ... it is not aligned adjust the arrow of lever to the triangle mark Triangle mark Triangle mark ITB sub pressure release lever ITB sub pressure release lever 2 Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the arrow direction until the protrusion of grip is aligned with the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure ITB pressure release lever CAUTION Before operating the ITB Pressure Release Lever ...

Page 426: ...lowered the ITB is scraped by the Plate and this may cause to make scratches on the ITB surface Click position Not to lower the ITB Pressure Releace Lever below the position where clicky sense is felt ITB pressure release lever When pulling out the ITB Unit it may drop because it does not click at stop position if pulled out while lifting it Thus be careful of pulling it out 4 Pull out the ITB Uni...

Page 427: ...ate 2 When the machine is in a standby state execute the following in user mode Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Cleaning the Patch Sensor Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 104 2 Remove the ITB Cover Refer to page 4 104 3 Remove the ITB Unit Refer to page 4 105 Procedure 1 While pushing...

Page 428: ...nd Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 104 2 Remove the ITB Cover Refer to page 4 104 3 Remove the ITB Unit Refer to page 4 105 4 Remove the Process Unit Refer to page 4 132 Procedure 1 Release the hook and remove the Shutter of the sensor 2 Claws Hook Shutter Claw F 4 129 2 Remove the Pre secondary Transfer Guide Be sure not to put too much force on the Pre secondary Transfer Guide when removing it...

Page 429: ...eplacement When replace the Patch Senosor center Initialization of Patch sensor center is necessary COPIER ADJUST DENS P ALPHA Input Patch Sensor alpha value Execute the following in user mode Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation F 4 132 F 4 133 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Co...

Page 430: ...ter Replacement 1 After installing the ITB Unit put the machine into a standby state 2 When the machine is in a standby state execute the following in user mode Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation F 4 135 F 4 136 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 104 2 ...

Page 431: ...e ITB Cleaning Blade Unit so that it is easy to remove F 4 137 Installing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 104 2 Remove the ITB Cover Refer to page 4 104 3 Remove the ITB Unit Refer to page 4 105 4 Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit Refer to page 4 109 5 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit Refer to page 4 110 Procedu...

Page 432: ...e Alignment Plate is installed and then install the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit At this time be sure to move the paper inserted in step 1 toward the direction shown in the figure to prevent the sheet from flipping before the installation Paper Sheet Boss ITB Cleaning Blade F 4 138 F 4 139 3 While paying attention not to bend the Protection Sheet lift the sheet using a screwdriver After that check that...

Page 433: ...ating the motor by hand At this time turn the motor counterclockwise and do not turn it clockwise Actions after Replacement 1 After installing the ITB Unit put the machine into a standby state 2 When the machine is in a standby state execute the following in user mode Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation F 4 141 Removing the ITB Preparations 1 Ope...

Page 434: ...rear pin 1 screw NOTE Place the ITB cover upside down on the place where the ITB Unit will be stood F 4 143 F 4 144 6 Lift the ITB and stand it on the ITB Cover CAUTION Make sure that it is removed from the front and rear hooks Make sure to align the claw of the ITB Cover with the cut off of protection sheet In order to prevent the ITB from being damaged be sure to place a sheet of paper between t...

Page 435: ...TE To lock the pressure pull out the pin while holding the ITB Unit with hand 1 screw 8 Bend the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit by 90 degree and reinstall it with the pin removed in step 7 F 4 146 F 4 147 9 Insert papers as shown in the figure to prevent the ITB getting damage by the plate when removing the ITB 10 Hold the ITB within 10mm from the edge and remove it upward 10mm 10mm F 4 148 ...

Page 436: ... Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure CAUTION When replacing ITB with a new one affix the label to the specific position after the ITB Unit is installed When affixing the new label be sure to remove the old label and replace with the new one on the same position Actions after Replacement 1 Turn ON the power of the host machine 2 When the machine is in standby condition execute the fol...

Page 437: ...ITB Cleaning Unit Refer to page 4 109 5 Remove the ITB Refer to page 4 113 Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the surface of Drive Roller Secondary Transfer Inner Roller and Primary Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure 1 Pull out the pin and make the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit straight 2 Install the pin removed in step 1 to the original position 3 Remove the ITB Unit from the IT...

Page 438: ...ary Transfer Roller When touching it be careful not to accidentally put grease to other parts Primary transfer roller BK Paper A F 4 153 CAUTION When the parts Shaft support front Shaft support rear Spring configuring the Primary Transfer Roller of each color Bk C M Y are mixed be sure to refer to the list in the figure below name shape feature Num Shaft support front Bk C Y front side back side C...

Page 439: ...urely installed Actions after Replacement 1 Turn ON the power of the host machine 2 When the machine is in standby condition execute the Auto gradation correction Removing the Primary Transfer Roller C M Y Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 104 2 Remove the ITB Cover Refer to page 4 104 3 Remove the ITB Unit Refer to page 4 105 4 Remove the ...

Page 440: ... the ITB Cover and place it onto the paper 2 claws Paper ITB unit ITB cover Claws x2 4 Turn the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever to make the Primary Transfer Roller C M Y lifted ITB sub pressure release lever Primary transfer roller C Primary transfer roller M Primary transferr oller Y F 4 154 F 4 155 F 4 156 5 While holding down the Shaft Support Front remove the Engagement Disengagement Arm from t...

Page 441: ...Primary Transfer Roller When touching it be careful not to accidentally put grease to other parts Primary transfer roller C Paper A F 4 159 CAUTION When the parts Shaft support front Shaft support rear Spring configuring the Primary Transfer Roller of each color Bk C M Y are mixed be sure to refer to the list in the figure below name shape feature Num Shaft support front Bk C Y front side back sid...

Page 442: ...ger compared to the springs for Bk 6 T 4 44 CAUTION After installing the Primary Transfer Roller C M Y turn the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever to make sure that the Primary Transfer Roller C M Y moves up and down After checking be sure to make the Primary Transfer Roller C M Y lowered position ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever Primary Transfer Roller M Primary Transfer Roller Y Primary Transfer Rolle...

Page 443: ...TB Cleaning Unit Refer to page 4 109 5 Remove the ITB Refer to page 4 113 Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the surface of Drive Roller Secondary Transfer Inner Roller and Primary Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure F 4 160 1 Pull out the pin and make the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit straight 2 Install the pin removed in step 1 to the original position 3 Remove the ITB Unit from...

Page 444: ...f the installation direction when installing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Actions after Replacement 1 Turn ON the power of the host machine 2 When the machine is in standby condition Execute the following in user mode Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation 3 Execute the ITB equilibrium position detection in service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P...

Page 445: ...gure below to use as the reference when correcting the position Mark Mark F 4 166 F 4 167 When the values are above 350 Move the ITB Motor Support Plate up Moving it by 1 mm changes the values of ITB POS and ITB POS2 by approx 200 After adjustment check that the values of COPIER DISPLAY MISC ITB POS and ITB POS2 are within the range from 350 to 350 Loosen When the values are below 350 Move the ITB...

Page 446: ... mistakes when installing since there is no compatibility between the ITB Unit of iR ADV C52XX series and that of iR ADV C50XX series 1 Check that the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is in the below position ITB sub pressure release lever 2 Stand the ITB Unit on the ITB Cover 2 claws x2 ITB cover Claws Claw F 4 170 F 4 171 NOTE Cover the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet included in the package as s...

Page 447: ...when bringing it down fully Paper 10mm 10mm Marking line 5 Remove the pin and move the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit toward the 2 direction to take up the slack of the belt To stretch the ITB fro approx 90 F 4 173 F 4 174 6 Put the ITB under the Belt Retainer Sheet on the left side of the figure bring the ITB Displacement Sensor Flag into contact with the ITB edge at the center of the figur...

Page 448: ...re 7 Return the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit to straight and then install the pin removed 1 screw 8 Remove the ITB Unit from the ITB Cover hook it on the 2 hooks and then install it to the plate 2 claws x2 Claws Hooks F 4 176 F 4 177 9 Install the rear pin 1 screw 10 Push the ITB Pressure Release Lever and install the Bush Slider to the boss 1 stop ring Boss F 4 178 F 4 179 ...

Page 449: ...edure 11 PuII the ITB Pressure Release Lever and Install the harness 1 edge saddle 3 wire saddles x4 CAUTION Make sure that there is no gap between the ITB Pressure Release Lever and the Plate Space F 4 180 CAUTION Make sure that the shaft is fixed to the fixing member CAUTION Make sure that the hook is fixed to the plate 12 Turn over the ITB Unit 13 Install the ITB Cleaning Unit ...

Page 450: ... the ITB the Drive Roller or the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller wipe it with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the motor by hand At this time turn the motor counterclockwise and do not turn it clockwise CAUTION When replacing ITB with a new one affix the label to the specific position near the Waste Toner Ejection Mouth of the ITB Cleaning Unit after the ITB Unit is installed ...

Page 451: ...ss Unit Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 104 2 Remove the ITB Cover Refer to page 4 104 Procedure 1 Make sure that the arrow of ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is aligned with the triangle mark of the plate If it is not aligned align the arrow of lever with the triangle mark of plate Triangle mark Triangle mark ITB sub pressure release leve...

Page 452: ...e Drum Unit from the light Paper F 4 185 F 4 186 Removing the Process Unit Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 104 2 Remove the ITB Cover Refer to page 4 104 3 Pull out the Process Unit Refer to page 4 131 Procedure CAUTION When installing removing the Process Unit do not remove the Recycle Toner Bottle 1 Remove the 4 stepped screws fixed on ...

Page 453: ...it turn ON and then OFF the power Be sure to check that the Dustproof Shutter is closed before installation F 4 189 F 4 190 Reinstalling the Process Unit Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 104 2 Remove the ITB Cover Refer to page 4 104 3 Pull out the Process Unit Refer to page 4 131 4 Remove the Process Unit Refer to page 4 132 Procedure 1 P...

Page 454: ... the Process Unit with 4 stepped screws x4 CAUTION Make sure that there is no gap A between the host machine and the Process Unit and fix it with the screw A A F 4 194 F 4 193 4 Slowly take the Process Unit back to the host machine and fix it with 2 screws x2 CAUTION After closing the Process Unit hold the edge of each Drum Unit from above as described below If the Drum Unit is not secured it may ...

Page 455: ...th the lower triangle mark of plate 6 Install the ITB Cover and tighten the 2 loosened screws 7 Close the Front Cover 8 Close the Right Upper Cover 9 Close the Right Lower Cover F 4 197 F 4 198 Removing the Drum Unit Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 104 2 Remove the ITB Cover Refer to page 4 104 3 Pull out the Process Unit Refer to page 4 ...

Page 456: ... 200 Reinstalling the Drum Unit Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 104 2 Remove the ITB Cover Refer to page 4 104 3 Pull out the Process Unit Refer to page 4 131 4 Remove the Drum Unit Refer to page 4 135 Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the drum surface Be sure to refer to the following NOTE when installing the Bk Drum CAUTION When installing...

Page 457: ...s unit Guide of process unit Guide of drum unit CAUTION Be sure to check that the shutter slides along the rail and is located in the correct position as shown in the figure below to prevent the rail from being damaged Shutter Rail Shutter Rail F 4 205 F 4 203 F 4 204 NOTE When installing the Drum Unit Bk to the host machine perform the following procedures 2 1 Place the half fold paper included i...

Page 458: ...andby condition execute the following in user mode Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation F 4 208 Removing the Developing Assembly Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 104 2 Remove the ITB Cover Refer to page 4 104 3 Pull out the Process Unit Refer to page 4 131 4 Remove the Drum Unit Refer to p...

Page 459: ...uides x2 Connector Harness 2 Remove the stepped screw 3 While pulling out the stopper remove the Developing Assembly upward Developing assembly Stopper F 4 209 F 4 210 F 4 211 CAUTION Fit the 2 pins of the Developing Assembly into the holes of the Process Unit and insert the 2 pins of the stopper in the holes of the Developing Assembly when assembling Developing Assembly Pins of the Developing Ass...

Page 460: ...INISET K Initialization of Bk Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET 4 Initialization of 4 colors Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch Execute the following in user mode Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Installing a new Developing Assembly Preparations 1 Open the Front Cover Right Lower Cover and Right Up...

Page 461: ...on the Seal on the Developing Assembly is stressed and may cause tear of the seal F 4 214 CAUTION If the Seal on the Developing Assembly is torn remove the torn seal by pulling the end of it in the direction of the arrow At that time be careful not to leave the torn sheet in the Developing Assembly Seal Seal Front side Rear side F 4 215 3 By following installing the Drum Unit install the each colo...

Page 462: ...Assembly toner ratio and patch COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET C Initialization of C Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET K Initialization of Bk Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET 4 Initialization of 4 colors Developing Assembly toner ratio and patch Execute the following in user mode Settings Registration Adjustment Maintena...

Page 463: ...ste Toner Feed Unit Procedure Procedure 1 Remove the Process Unit Right Front Cover 2 Screws Process Unit Right Front Cover x2 2 Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit Upper Cover 4 Screws x4 F 4 217 F 4 218 3 Disconnect the 4 connectors from the PCB 3 Wire Saddles 1 Edge Saddle 3 Harness Guides x4 x7 Cable guides Connectors Wire saddle Wire saddle Edge saddle Connector Cable guide F 4 219 ...

Page 464: ...Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit Procedure 4 Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit 6 Screws NOTE To make the work easier remove the leftmost screw first see the callout on the upper left of the figure x6 F 4 220 Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 175 Procedure C...

Page 465: ...lace the paper to put the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit 2 Remove the rear stopper 1 claw 3 Pinch the claws on both sides of bearing holder and remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit 4 claws x4 F 4 222 F 4 223 4 Remove the Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit 1 bushing 2 springs Bushing Secondary transfer separation guide unit Spring Spring 5 Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer ...

Page 466: ...4 175 2 Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit Refer to page 4 144 Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the surface of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 1 Fit the side with longer shaft to the hole of Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit and install the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Longer shaft Shorter shaft Hole CAUTION After installing the Secondar...

Page 467: ... Replacement When replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller execute the service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING TNR COAT Execute the following in user mode Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation F 4 229 Removing the Toner Bottle manually Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 175 2 Remove the Right Rear Cov...

Page 468: ...Unit is installed remove the reader signal cable 1 connector 5 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 screw 1 hook Left Rear Sub Cover Hook F 4 232 F 4 233 6 Remove the Rear Cover 3 rubber caps 3 screws 1 claw x2 Rubber caps Rear cover Claw Open the Controller Box 7 When the Reader is installed remove the reader power cable 2 connectors 2 wire saddles 1 cable guide Connectors Wire saddles Reader power c...

Page 469: ...s installed refer to step 8 2 8 1 Avoid the harness and open the Controller Box 2 screws x2 8 2 Avoid the harness and open the Controller Box and the FAX Unit 3 screws x3 F 4 236 F 4 237 Procedure NOTE This procedure describes the procedure of Toner Bottle Bk Go through the same procedure for Toner Bottle C M Y 1 Open the Toner Replacement Cover 2 Remove the handle 1 screw Handle 3 Install the han...

Page 470: ...l the way in and close the small cover F 4 241 F 4 240 Removing the Main Drive Unit Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 175 2 Remove the Right Rear Cover Refer to page 4 147 3 Remove the Left Rear Cover and the Left Rear Sub Cover Refer to page 4 147 4 Remove the Connector Cover 1 screw 5 When the Cassette Pedestal is installed remove the connector 1 reu...

Page 471: ... Main Drive Unit Procedure 6 Remove the Rear Lower Cover 2 rubber caps 2 screws 2 claws 2 hooks x2 Claw Claw x2 Hook Hook 7 Open the Front Cover F 4 244 Procedure 1 Remove the Left Upper Cover 5 rubber caps 5 screws x5 Rubber caps Left upper cover NOTE If the Fax Unit is installed remove it from the host machine 2 Hooks 3 Screws 1 Connector x3 FAX Unit Hook Connecter F 4 245 ...

Page 472: ...en the High voltage PCB 2 screws HVT PCB x2 4 Remove the Drum Driver PCB 3 screws x3 Drum driver PCB F 4 246 F 4 247 F 4 248 5 Remove the Harness Guide Cover 1 screw Harness guide cover 6 Free the Harness from the Harness Guide A and free the Laser Scanner harness from the Harness Guide B 1 Edge Saddle 4 Wire Saddles 7 Shift the Harness Guide 1 Screw 1 Claw Wire Saddle Wire Saddle A B x6 Edge Sadd...

Page 473: ...law Claw Fan duct Connector x2 A 9 Disconnect the 8 connectors of the hopper Connectors Connectors Connectors Connectors x8 F 4 251 F 4 252 10 Disconnect the 9 connectors of the Drum Driver PCB and the 4 Reuse Bands and free the harness by opening the 4 Wire Saddles Reuse Band Reuse Band Reuse Band Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Connector Connector Wire Saddle Reuse Band x9 x8 Connector 11 Re...

Page 474: ...Cover Preparations 1 Open the Toner Replacement Cover 2 Execute the service mode and release the lock of Toner Container NOTE To release the lock of Toner Container manually refer to the step 1 to 4 in Removing the Toner Container manually At that time do not pull out the toner container 3 Turn OFF the power before closing the Small Cover and the Toner Replacement Cover 4 Close the 4 Small Covers ...

Page 475: ...ner Front Inner Cover Procedure 2 Open the Toner Replacement Cover and Remove the Small Plate 1 screw P tight Small Plate Toner Replacement Cover 3 Remove the Front Upper Cover 1 screw P tight 1 screw RS x2 4 Remove the Front Upper Right Cover F 4 257 F 4 258 F 4 259 5 Remove the Delivery Tray 1 Hook 2 Protrusions Protrusions Hook 6 Open the 4 Small Covers and remove the 4 Toner Containers F 4 260...

Page 476: ... Connector F 4 262 Removing the Hopper M Preparations 1 Release the lock of Toner Container By service mode 2 Open the Front Cover the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 104 3 Remove the ITB Unit Refer to page 4 105 4 Remove the Process Unit Refer to page 4 132 5 Remove the Color Drum Heater When the option is installed Refer to page 1 1 6 Remove the Toner Container Front Inne...

Page 477: ...atter inside the Hopper and it may cause the operation failure Thus stand and put the Hopper Unit on the paper Paper F 4 265 CAUTION Before installing the hopper to the host machine be sure to check that the leading edge of the protrusion of the Bottle Fixing Ring and the leading edge of the Bottle Fixing Arm are aligned If not rotate the gear in the direction as shown in the figure below to align...

Page 478: ...order Otherwise toner supply failure may occur Actions after Replacement When replacing the Developing Assembly make sure to initialize before installing the Toner Container COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M If install the Toner Container before initialization T D ratio cannot set the right value Removing the Hopper Y Preparations 1 Release the lock of Toner Container By service mode 2 Open the Fro...

Page 479: ...g Image Formation System Removing the Hopper Y Procedure 2 Remove the Left Cover 5 rubber caps 5 screws 5 claws x5 x5 Crows Crows Crow 3 Remove the Left Middle Stay 4 screws x4 Left Middle Stay F 4 269 F 4 270 4 While avoiding the duct sheet remove the Hopper Unit 1 connector 4 screws x2 x2 Connector Duct sheet Hopper unit F 4 271 ...

Page 480: ...re below to align the leading edge of the protrusion of the Bottle Fixing Ring with the leading edge of the Bottle Fixing Arm Gear Bottle Fixing Ring Bottle Fixing Arm F 4 273 CAUTION When installing the Toner Tray align the Rod Lever with the Toner Cover Open Close Rod Lever and install it Toner Cover Open Close Rod Lever Rod Lever F 4 274 CAUTION When installing the removed Toner Container be su...

Page 481: ...Remove the ITB Unit Refer to page 4 105 4 Remove the Process Unit Refer to page 4 132 5 Remove the Color Drum Heater When the option is installed Refer to page 1 1 6 Remove the Toner Container Front Inner Cover Refer to page 4 154 Procedure 1 Remove the Reverse Tray 2 Remove the Inside Rear Cover 1 2 3 caps 3 screws RS x3 Inner rear cover 1 Inner rear cover 2 F 4 275 3 Remove the 2 screws from the...

Page 482: ...acement and Cleaning Image Formation System Removing the Hopper C Procedure 6 Remove the rail Retaining Plate 4 screws M4 binding x4 7 Remove the Toner Tray 1 screw M4 binding F 4 279 F 4 280 8 While avoiding the Duct Sheet remove the Hopper Unit 1 connector 4 screws x2 x2 Connector Duct Sheet Hopper Unit F 4 281 ...

Page 483: ...re below to align the leading edge of the protrusion of the Bottle Fixing Ring with the leading edge of the Bottle Fixing Arm Gear Bottle Fixing Ring Bottle Fixing Arm F 4 283 CAUTION When installing the Toner Tray align the Rod Lever with the Toner Cover Open Close Rod Lever and install it Toner Cover Open Close Rod Lever Rod Lever F 4 284 CAUTION When installing the removed Toner Container be su...

Page 484: ...d Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 104 3 Remove the ITB Unit Refer to page 4 105 4 Remove the Process Unit Refer to page 4 132 5 Remove the Color Drum Heater When the option is installed Refer to page 1 1 6 Remove the Drum Heater Bk 7 Remove the Toner Container Front Inner Cover Refer to page 4 154 8 Remove the Hopper C Refer to page 4 161 Procedure 1 Remove the Harness from the Fixing Guide Guid...

Page 485: ...inside the Hopper and it may cause the operation failure Thus stand and put the Hopper Unit on the paper Paper F 4 289 CAUTION Before installing the hopper to the host machine be sure to check that the leading edge of the protrusion of the Bottle Fixing Ring and the leading edge of the Bottle Fixing Arm are aligned If not rotate the gear in the direction as shown in the figure below to align the l...

Page 486: ...ver Open Close Rod Lever Rod Lever F 4 291 CAUTION When installing the removed Toner Container be sure not to shake it CAUTION When the Main Drive Unit is removed simultaneously make sure to install the Main Drive Unit first and then the Hopper Unit in order Otherwise toner supply failure may occur Actions after Replacement When replacing the Developing Assembly make sure to initialize before inst...

Page 487: ... Assembly Procedure Fixing System Removing the Fixing Assembly Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover F 4 292 Procedure 1 Open the Fixing Rail and loosen the 5 screws or 4 screws NOTE The screw A has been newly added The machine has 5 screws or 4 screws Loosen the screws Loosen the screws Loosen the screws Fixing Rail Fixing Rail A F 4 293 ...

Page 488: ...Assembly Tabs 3 Hold the grip and remove the Fixing Assembly F 4 294 F 4 295 CAUTION When installing the Fixing Assembly be sure to insert it until it stops and then tighten the screws while holding the area A part as shown in the figure below 1 1 A A If the Fixing Assembly is not installed properly abnormal noise from the Fixing Gear or E009 may occur In such case remove and then install the Fixi...

Page 489: ...Film Unit and Pressure Roller 1 Change the direction of the Fixing Assembly Place it in the position where the Drawer connector side faces up 2 Remove the harness 3 connectors Harness Guide A Connectors Drawer connector Harness x3 A F 4 297 3 Remove the Shutter Unit 4 screws x4 4 Turn the pressure gear with hand and make the Pressure Roller engaged condition Pressure roller engaged condition CAUTI...

Page 490: ...Do not leave the Pressure Roller engaged for a long time 5 Open the left and right Pressure Levers 2 screws x2 6 Remove the left and right Fixing Plates and the Terminal Plate 3 screws x3 Fixing Plates Terminal Plate F 4 301 F 4 302 7 Remove the harness from the harness guide and remove the Film Unit 8 Remove the Separation Guide from the Film Unit 2 leaf springs F 4 303 F 4 304 ...

Page 491: ...allation Illustration at the center The Fixing Separation Guide is placed on the rib A Illustration at the right The Fixing Separation Guide is installed in opposite direction Checking method After installing the Fixing Separation Guide swing the guide with your finger If it is installed properly it is stable If not it becomes wobbly When installing the Leaf Spring while the guide is not installed...

Page 492: ...fer to page 4 169 Procedure 1 Clean the Fixing Separation Guide with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 4 306 Cleaning the Shutter Cover Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 175 2 Remove the Fixing Unit Refer to page 4 167 Procedure NOTE When installing removing it do not touch the Film Unit and Pressure Roller 1 Change the direction of the Fixing A...

Page 493: ...free paper moistened with alcohol F 4 308 F 4 309 Removing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearing Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 175 2 Remove the Fixing Unit Refer to page 4 167 3 Remove the Film Unit Refer to page 4 169 Procedure NOTE When installing removing it do not touch the Pressure Roller 1 Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide 1 screw 3 hoo...

Page 494: ... the Inner Delivery Guide and the Pressure roller Pressure Roller Paper Paper Pressure Roller Inner Delivery Guide Space About 5mm thickness Inner Delivery Guide 3 Lift the right side and remove the Pressure Roller Unit Pressure roller unit F 4 311 F 4 312 4 Remove the Pressure Roller and the 2 Pressure Roller Bearings from the Pressure Roller Unit 2 bearing holders 1 E ring 1 gear E ring Gear Pre...

Page 495: ...ry Transfer Guide Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Procedure 1 Clean the Transfer Guide with the lint free paper moistened with alcohol Secondary transfer guide F 4 314 F 4 315 Cleaning the Feed Contact Point Guide Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 175 Procedure 1 Clean the Feed Contact Point Guide with lint free paper mo...

Page 496: ...Registration Roller with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating it Registration roller F 4 317 F 4 318 Cleaning the Pre registration Guide Assembly Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 175 Procedure CAUTION Be sure not to soil the ITB 1 Clean the Secondary Transfer Guide area covered by black sheet and the inside of the Pre registration Gui...

Page 497: ...ions 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 175 Procedure 1 Clean the Transparency Sensor with lint free paper moistened with water in one direction Transparency sensor 2 Clean the Prism with lint free paper Prism F 4 321 F 4 322 Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 175...

Page 498: ...ning Pickup Feed System Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet Procedure 2 Remove the wire from the machine and further open the Right Lower Cover Wire Right lower cover 3 Clean the Vertical Path Sensor with dry lint free paper Vertical Path Sensor F 4 324 F 4 325 4 Clean the Lightproof Sheet with dry lint free paper Lightproof Sheet F 4 326 ...

Page 499: ...e Assembly with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Fixing delivery guide 3 Clean the outside of Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Fixing delivery guide F 4 327 F 4 328 Cleaning the Post fixing Roller Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 175 Procedure 1 Open the Fixing Delivery Guide 2 Clean the Post fixing Roll...

Page 500: ...the Fixing Delivery Roller 1 with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the gear Fixing delivery roller 3 Clean the Fixing Delivery Roller 2 with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating it Fixing delivery roller F 4 331 F 4 332 Cleaning the Duplex Feed Upper Roller Wheel Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 175 Procedure 1 Op...

Page 501: ...r to page 4 175 Procedure 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 2 Clean the Duplex Feed Lower Roller Wheel with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating it Duplex feed lower rollers Duplex feed lower wheels F 4 335 F 4 336 Cleaning the Second and Third Delivery Roller and Wheeis and the First Second and Third Delivery Rollers Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refe...

Page 502: ...ons First delivery roller Second delivery roller Third delivery roller F 4 339 F 4 340 F 4 341 Removing the Second and Third Delivery Unit Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 175 2 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw Claw x3 3 Remove the Front Right Cover 1 rubber cap 1 screw remove 1 screw loosen Loosen Front right cove...

Page 503: ...e 4 Remove the Reverse Trail Edge Guide and the Inner Delivery Cover 1 screw 2 hooks Reverse trail edge guide Hooks x2 Inner delivery cover F 4 344 Procedure 1 Remove the 2 connectors and 3 wire saddles x3 x2 Wire saddles Connectors 2 Open the Toner Replacement Cover 1 and the Front Cover 3 Remove the Right Front Cover 1 2 Screws 2 Hooks x2 Hook Hook Front cover Right front cover 1 Toner replaceme...

Page 504: ...cond delivery sensor I O DC CON P005 13 Second delivery sensor Sensor flag F 4 348 F 4 347 Removing the First Delivery Unit Preparations 1 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 175 2 Remove the Right Rear Cover Refer to page 4 182 3 Remove the Front Right Cover Refer to page 4 182 4 Remove the Reverse Trail Edge Guide and the Inner Delivery Cover Refer to page 4 183 5 Re...

Page 505: ...ry Unit 2 screws 1 stepped screw x3 First delivery unit F 4 350 F 4 351 CAUTION At installation align the First Delivery Sensor and the Sensor Flag and install it First delivery tray full sensor First delivery sensor Sensor flag Sensor flag F 4 352 CAUTION After installing the First Delivery Unit make sure that the 2 Sensor Flags work normally Reference First delivery sensor I O DC CON P005 13 Ref...

Page 506: ... Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 175 Procedure 1 Remove the Front Cover of Right Unit 1 screw 1 claw Claw 2 Remove the connector and the grounding wire 1 screw 1 wire saddle 2 connectors Connectors Wire saddle Grounding wire x２ F 4 354 F 4 355 3 Hold the sides of Duplex Unit and remove it CAUTION When removing the Duplex Unit note that the Right Door Rotation Hinge and the spring are easily disa...

Page 507: ...ge 4 175 2 Remove the Duplex Unit Refer to page 4 186 Procedure 1 Remove the Both Angle Guide 2 screws x2 2 Remove the gear 2 stop rings and the bushing Gear Stop rings Bushing F 4 358 F 4 359 3 Tilt the shaft pull the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller and remove it CAUTION Be careful of the Split Pin securing the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller Multi purpose tray pickup roller Shaft Split pin CAU...

Page 508: ... Removing the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller Refer to page 4 187 Procedure 1 While opening the Multi purpose Tray Sub Cover remove the Front Feed Guide 1 Screw 2 Shaft Supports 2 Claws x2 Front Feed Guide Multi purpose Tray Sub Cover Claws Shaft Supports F 4 362 2 While holding down the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft remove the Middle Feed Guide 1 Screw 2 Shaft Supports 1 Claw Middle...

Page 509: ...ed Guide and the Front Feed Guide be sure to follow the following steps when installing Be careful not to remove the 2 rubbers of the Middle Feed Guide when installing When the rubbers are not properly installed abnormal noise may occur at pickup from the Multi purpose Tray 1 While holding down the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft insert the Middle Feed Guide from the hole A of the plate...

Page 510: ...de x2 4 Remove only the 2 Shaft Supports of the Middle Feed Guide from the Feed Guide Shaft 5 Align the height of the Middle Feed Guide and the Front Feed Guide and install the 4 Shaft Supports of the Middle Feed Guide and the Front Feed Guide to the Feed Guide Shaft Shaft Supports Shaft Supports Front Feed Guide Middle Feed Guide Check by hand whether the height of the Middle Feed Guide and the F...

Page 511: ...r the Pickup Roller of cassette 2 CAUTION Do not touch the surface of Pickup Roller and the Separation Roller 1 Remove the cassette 1 and cassette 2 2 Remove the Pickup Roller 1 pin 1 tab F 4 368 Removing the Feed Roller Procedure NOTE This procedure describes the removing steps of cassette 1 Feed Roller Go through the same procedure for the Feed Roller of cassette 2 CAUTION Do not touch the surfa...

Page 512: ... Roller of cassette 2 CAUTION Do not touch the surface of Pickup Roller and the Separation Roller 1 Remove the cassette 1 and cassette 2 2 Remove the Separation Roller 1 tab F 4 370 Removing the Pickup Assembly Idler Gear Preparations 1 Remove the Cassette1 and Cassette2 2 Remove the Pickup Roller Refer to page 4 191 3 Remove the Feed Roller Refer to page 4 191 Procedure NOTE This procedure descri...

Page 513: ...orm step 1 1 If the Cassette Pedestal is not connected perform step 1 2 If the Side Paper Deck is connected perform step 1 3 1 1 When the Cassette Pedestal is installed remove the Right Front Cover 3 1 screw Right front cover 3 F 4 372 1 2 When the Cassette Pedestal is not installed remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 1 and the Right Front Cover 3 1 claw 1 screw 3 Claw Right lower sub cover 1 Right f...

Page 514: ...moving the Right Lower Cover Procedure 2 Open the Cassette Right Upper Cover 3 If the Cassette Pedestal is connected Open the Cassette Right Lower Cover 4 Open the Right Upper Cover and the Right Lower Cover 5 Remove the Right Rear Cover 3 3 claws 1 hook x4 Right rear cover 3 Claws Claw F 4 375 F 4 376 6 Remove the 2 screws and the connector Connector F 4 377 ...

Page 515: ... Feed System Removing the Right Lower Cover Procedure 7 Remove the E rings at the front and the rear sides and disconnect the arm while closing the Right Lower Cover CAUTION Be sure not to touch the roller Arm Stop ring Stop ring Arm F 4 378 8 Remove the wire from the host machine and remove the Right Lower Cover Wire Right lower cover F 4 379 ...

Page 516: ...ocedure 1 Lift the lever and remove the Right Front Inner Cover 2 screws D x2 Right front inner cover Lever 2 Remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 2 and the Right Rear Inner Cover simultaneously 2 Screws 1 Shaft Support Right rear inner cover Right lower sub cover 2 x2 F 4 380 F 4 381 3 Remove the Pickup Harness 1 wire saddle 1 edge saddle 2 connectors x2 x2 Connector Connector Wire saddle Edge saddle...

Page 517: ...ertical Path Sensor Preparations 1 Pull the Cassette1 and Cassette2 2 Remove the Right Lower Cover Refer to page 4 193 3 Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit Refer to page 4 196 Procedure 1 Remove the cam 1 Claw Claw Cam 2 Remove the Gear Unit 2 Screws x2 Gear Unit F 4 384 F 4 385 3 Disconnect the round shape terminal and 2 Connectors 1 Screws x2 Connector Round Shape Terminal 4 Turn over the Pre reg...

Page 518: ...ng procedure remove only sensors that require replacement 5 Remove the Transparency Sensor 4 Claws 1 Connector 6 Remove the Registration Sensor 4 Claws 1 Connector x8 x2 Registration Sensor Transparency Sensor 7 Turn over the Pre registration Guide Unit and remove the Paper Feed Guide 1 Screw 2 Hooks Paper Feed Guide Hook Hook F 4 388 F 4 389 8 Open the Edge Saddle and remove the Vertical Path Sen...

Page 519: ...step 1 1 If the Cassette Pedestal is not connected perform step 1 2 1 1 When the Cassette Pedestal is installed open the Cassette Right Lower Cover Cassette right lower cover 1 2 When the Cassette Pedestal is not installed remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 1 1 claw Right lower sub cover 1 Claw F 4 391 F 4 392 2 Open the Cassette Right Upper Cover 3 Lift the Lower Guide and remove the arm Arm Lower ...

Page 520: ...tte2 2 Remove the Right Lower Cover Refer to page 4 193 3 Remove the Cassette Right Upper Cover Refer to page 4 199 Procedure 1 Remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 2 and the Right Rear Inner Cover simultaneously 2 Screws 1 Shaft Support Right rear inner cover Right lower sub cover 2 x2 2 Remove the Pickup Harness 1 wire saddle 1 edge saddle 2 connectors x2 x2 Connector Connector Wire saddle Edge sadd...

Page 521: ...ette 1 Size Detection Unit make sure to remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit Refer to page 4 196 3 When removing the Cassette 2 Size Detection Unit make sure to remove the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit Refer to page 4 200 Procedure NOTE This procedure describes the removing steps of Cassette 1 Size Detection Unit Go through the same procedure for Cassette 2 Size Detection Unit 1 Remove the Cassette 1 Size D...

Page 522: ...ader Right Cover Reader Left Cover and Reader Front Cover 3 Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover 4 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 screw RS tight M4 2 screws TP M3 1 claw Claw x3 5 Close the Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper Cover F 4 398 6 Disconnect the Reader Power Supply Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide Connectors Wire saddles Reader power cable Cable guide x2 x2 7...

Page 523: ... Scanner System Fixation Screws that have been kept in a safe place since installation 2 Screws x2 10 Install the handle 2 Bosses 2 Screws RS Tightening M3x8 x2 F 4 401 F 4 402 11 Release the fixation on the left side of the Reader Unit 1 Boss Screws Binding M4x8 x4 Boss 12 Release the fixation on the front side of the Reader Unit 1 Boss 2 Screws Binding M4x8 x2 Boss F 4 403 F 4 404 ...

Page 524: ... 14 Lift the Reader Unit with 2 or more people and remove it CAUTION How to hold the Reader Unit When lifting the Reader Unit be sure to work with 2 or more people Also be sure to lift the equipment horizontally Be sure to lift the Reader Unit carefully as it is heavy at the rear When installing the Reader Unit on the host machine be careful not to get the cables and fingers caught Be sure to hold...

Page 525: ...5 F 4 407 Part to be replaced Description Procedure When TPM is enabled ON Main Controller 2 SRAM of the Main Controller PCB 2 includes user data and MEAP related data If there are any files backed up from RUI by the user restore them after recovery Explain the user that the reinstallation of everything related to MEAP is necessary Hold down 2 and 8 to start the machine and then use SST to clear t...

Page 526: ...able below to format the HDD User Forwarding Settings Remote UI Import Export Settings Registration Except Paper Type Management Settings Remote UI Import Export Mail Box Memory RX Inbox Confidential Fax Inbox Remote UI Back Up Restore Settings Form for Superimpose Image Remote UI Back Up Restore Settings Auto Adjust Gradation Enforcement of Auto Adjust Gradation Key information to TPM to use for ...

Page 527: ...g SST has the following functions that are necessary for service work 1 To download system software 2 To copy the system software into a USB memory device 3 To backup and restore information of SRAM and MEAP in Main Controller 2 4 To format HDD 5 To collect device log 6 To clear the encryption key of HDD Encryption Board Upgrading using a USB memory device Using a USB memory device the following f...

Page 528: ...5 5 Adjustment Adjustment Main Controller Image Formation System Pickup Feed System ...

Page 529: ... 6 When an encryption key certificate CA certificate has been generated or added by the user ask the user to execute regeneration 7 Execute auto gradation adjustment full adjust Settings Registration mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager 1 Go to COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD and enter the numerical value of...

Page 530: ...stalled backup to an HDD is not possible It is therefore recommended to perform backup to an USB memory device Preparation USB memory device where the system software for this machine has been registered using the SST Or USB memory device formatted as FAT32 which has been checked that it can be recognized by the host machine In order to let the USB memory device be recognized in service mode creat...

Page 531: ...agement information included in the SRAM data and box data on the HDD occurs which is caused by starting the machine normally without restoring SRAM data after replacing the Main Controller 2 PCB the box management information is initialized As a result box documents on the HDD are deleted Therefore be sure to back up the box documents on remote UI Restrictions Do not transfer the following parts ...

Page 532: ...mbly toner ratio and patch After replacement execute the user mode Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Patch sensor How to Replace the Parts Refer to Remove the Patch Sensor front center rear Adjustment procedure When replacing the Patch Sensor enter the alpha value of the Patch Sensor in the following service mode COPIER ADJUST DENS P ALPHA Inpu...

Page 533: ...r iR ADV C5240 C5235 After executing the above check that the values of COPIER DISPLAY MISC ITB POS and ITB POS2 are within the range from 350 to 350 If not execute the following adjustment Preparation 1 Open the ITB Cover 2 Remove the ITB Motor 1 4 Screws 3 1 Connector 2 x4 2 1 3 3 Adjustment Procedure Procedure 1 Put markings as shown in the figure below to use as the reference when correcting t...

Page 534: ... COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING TNR COAT After replacement execute the user mode Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Hopper Unit How to Replace the Parts Refer to Removing the Hopper M Removing the Hopper Y Removing the Hopper C Removing the Hopper Bk Adjustment Procedure When installing the removed Toner Container do not shake it When removing the Mai...

Page 535: ... pressure adjustment Distortion on the trailing edge 0 3 mm 1 2 Fixing alignment adjustment Distortion on the trailing edge 0 3 mm 1 3 Pre secondary Transfer Guide Adjustment Adjustment is possible by loosening the screws as shown in the figure below and moving the Pre secondary Transfer Guide toward the inside of the machine The range which can be adjusted by this adjustment is maximum approx 0 7...

Page 536: ...y this adjustment is maximum approx 0 3mm Differs according to the paper type Symptom Operation Points to check The left side of the trailing edge of image is distorted Turn the screw counterclockwise The Adjustment Plate moves to the right The right side of the trailing edge of image is distorted Turn the screw clockwise The Adjustment Plate moves to the left Screw Adjustment Plate Evaluation Obj...

Page 537: ...imum approx 0 3mm Differs according to the paper type Symptom Operation The right side of the trailing edge of image is distorted Move the Adjustment Plate up The left side of the trailing edge of image is distorted Move the Adjustment Plate down Adjustment Plate Evaluation Objective Note This procedure cannot be performed correctly when the Fixing Assembly is installed Be sure to remove the Fixin...

Page 538: ...v 2 COPIER OPTION CST CST K SW 1 4 Lv 2 COPIER OPTION FNC SW MODELSZ2 0 5 Turn OFF and then ON the main power Method of Setting Special Paper Service mode COPIER OPTION CST CSTX UY Setting number X Cassette number Y Size category X 1 to 4 Y 1 to 4 Size category Size category Size U1 FLSC A FLS OFI E OFI A LTRR A LGL G LGL A OFI M OFI FA4 FB4 U2 K LGLR G LTRR U3 K LGL A LTR G LTR U4 B OFI Setting N...

Page 539: ...6 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Initial Check Test Print Troubleshooting items Version upgrade Startup System Failure Diagnosis Controller Self Diagnosis Debug log Embedded RDS ...

Page 540: ...l ventilated and the fl oor keeps the machine level 6 The machine s power plug remains connected to the power outlet Checking the Paper 7 The paper is of a recommended type 8 The paper is not moist Try paper fresh out of package Checking the Placement of Paper 9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specifi c level 10 If a transparency is used check ...

Page 541: ...ea Right Angle Straight Lines Color displacement 0 Normal copy print 1to3 For R D 4 16 gradations Yes Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 5 Full half tone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 6 Grid Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 7to9 For R D 10 MCYBk horizontal stripes sub scanning direction Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 11 For R D 12 64 gradation Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 2 13 Fo...

Page 542: ...est print is for mainly checking the black line white line and uneven density MEMO 1 Select service mode COPIER TEST PG and specify developing color COLOR Y M C K to output the print by developing color 2 To change the density of test print select service mode TEST PG DENS Y M C K and set the density Check item Check method Assumed cause Transfer failure Check that the transfer failure does not ap...

Page 543: ...Check that white line does not appear on solid area of each color Failure of ITB Unit Failure of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Dirt on Laser Light Path T 6 5 MCYBk horizontal stripe TYPE 10 2 5 1 5mm 1 5mm 4 0 1 5 1 0mm F 6 4 This test print is for mainly checking the dark area density of each color each color balance and white line on development Check items Check method Assumed cause Uneven de...

Page 544: ...re of Drum Unit end of life Failure of Laser Scanner Unit White line Check that there is no white line on entire image Failure of Developing Assembly T 6 7 Full color 16 gradations TYPE 14 Light areas White White F 6 6 This test print is for mainly checking the gray balance gradations of YMCBk singe color and fogging Check item Check method Assumed cause Gradation Check that 64 gradations density ...

Page 545: ...p 6 15 Process Unit cannot be closed p 6 16 Productivity is reduced on paper stack delivery in thin paper mode 52g m2 to 63g m2 Staple Finisher C1 Saddle Stitch Finisher C1 p 6 16 Error Code E732 0001 Scanner communication error p 6 17 E732 0021 E732 0022 Scanner communication error p 6 18 E732 0023 Scanner communication error p 6 19 E732 8888 ADF detection error p 6 20 E733 0000 Printer communica...

Page 546: ...set to 2 The setting value is set to 4 If not improved Notes about remedy A drum life will be influenced if the 2nd service mode adjustment of electrostatic charge AC current is changed For this reason please do not set the setting value to 4 or more at the maximum 35 mm pitch ghost due to toner deterioration Occurrence area Developing cylinder Cause In case that the image pattern which has extrem...

Page 547: ...ode setting value is set to 1 and turn OFF and then ON the main power If a defect is not improved check the images with lowering the setting value one step by one step F 6 9 Uneven Image Density at 94 mm of Paper Leading Edge About 95mm Occurrence area Fixing Unit Cause Usually the paper which passed the Fixing Unit is fed to the Inner Delivery Roller along with the separation guide However when t...

Page 548: ...is fed fixing capability may deteriorate Missing color due to the laser exposure failure Occurrence area Developing Assembly Cause If pushing the drum unit to the Developing Assembly in installation there is a possibility to catch the Mylar sheet of the Developing Assembly downward As a result since an optical path is shut when the laser for the applicable color is irradiated the image may become ...

Page 549: ...ms Image Faults Missing color due to the laser exposure failure Troubleshooting Troubleshooting items Image Faults Missing color due to the laser exposure failure 5 Hold the folded portion and pull this paper out to the direction of upper Paper F 6 14 ...

Page 550: ...ondary transcription ATVC target current COPIER ADJUST HVTR XXXX F 6 15 Set the setting value of the applicable service mode to 10 after checking the sub item name corresponding to XXXX from the following table If not improved please increase the setting value by 10 each Example When the paper type is the plain paper 1 environmental classification is 1 and it is on a first side COPIER ADJUST HVTR ...

Page 551: ...en making 2 sided copies of solid image continuously in high temperature high humidity environment rib side on the Fixing Inlet Guide is deteriorated and resin part may be scraped As a result when the leading edge of paper enters the Fixing Inlet Guide it is trapped by the scraped rib and the paper deflects leading to the wrinkle at the trailing edge of paper Condition When making 2 sided copies o...

Page 552: ...ttach to the leading edge of Fixing Separation Guide and it may accumulate At that time when making 2 sided solid print with 2 colors curled leading edge of paper on 2nd side may contact with the Delivery Flapper Thus movement of this paper changes and it may touch the leading edge of Fixing Separation Guide As a result oil attached to the leading edge of guide may appear on the image Condition Wi...

Page 553: ...etween the Fixing Film and the heater surface may be decreased As a result the Fixing Film contacts with the heater surface when it rotates and noise may be generated Field Remedy By pushing the Fixing Film area grease inside the film circulates and sliding performance will be improved Operation procedure is as below 1 Remove the Fixing Unit 2 Change the direction of the Fixing Assembly Place the ...

Page 554: ...that the Laser Shutter is surely closed At this time do not put your hands inside the machine 3 Turn OFF the main power switch and install the Process Unit to the host machine Productivity decrease at stack delivery in thin paper 52g m2 63g m2 mode Staple Finisher C1 Saddle Stitch Finisher C1 Location Process Tray on the Staple Finisher C1 Saddle Stitch Finisher C1 Cause When the thin paper 52g m2...

Page 555: ...cause of the error cannot be identified by analyzing Sublog it may require investigation separately End F 6 22 Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 J3003 and the Reader Controller PCB PCB1 J109 Unit of replacement CABLE INTERFACE Harnesses from the Relay PCB to the Reader Controller PCB 1 Relay PCB UN5 J426 to Relay Connector 6P Unit of replacement CABLE DC POWER SUPPLY 2 Relay ...

Page 556: ...d parts Refer to Related parts F 6 23 Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 J3003 and the Reader Controller PCB PCB1 J109 Unit of replacement CABLE INTERFACE Harnesses from the Relay PCB to the Reader Controller PCB 1 Relay PCB UN5 J426 to Relay Connector 6P Unit of replacement CABLE DC POWER SUPPLY 2 Relay Connector 6P to Reader Controller PCB PCB1 J101 Unit of replacement CABLE...

Page 557: ...ler Collect Sublog and contact to the sales company NOTE If the cause of the error cannot be identified by analyzing Sublog it may require investigation separately End Is the error cleared Yes End F 6 24 Related parts 1 Communication Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 J3003 and the Reader Controller PCB PCB1 J109 Unit of replacement CABLE INTERFACE Main Controller PCB 2 Unit of replacement ...

Page 558: ...ich was different from the one set in service mode was detected Remedy Start remedy for error at installation Yes No Turn OFF and then ON the main power Check the setting of the following service mode COPIER OPTION CUSTOM SCANTYPE Is the error cleared Collect Sublog and contact to the sales company End NOTE If the cause of the error cannot be identified by analyzing Sublog it may require investiga...

Page 559: ...hly possible that signal is not detected normally between the DC Controller and the Main Controller End Is the error cleared Yes End Collect Sublog and contact to the sales company NOTE If the cause of the error cannot be identified by analyzing Sublog it may require investigation separately F 6 26 Related parts 1 Communication Harness between the Riser PCB J102 and the DC Controller PCB UN1 Unit ...

Page 560: ...contact to the sales company Place an original on the Copyboard and make a copy Disconnect and then connect the connector of the harness End NOTE If the cause of the error cannot be identified by analyzing Sublog it may require investigation separately F 6 27 Related parts Harness between the Riser PCB J102 and the DC Controller PCB UN1 Unit of replacement Flat Cable DC Controller PCB UN1 Unit of ...

Page 561: ...ad the system software using SST installed in the PC 2 Download using the USB memory storage device Insert the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine and download the system software stored in the device 3 Download via Contents Delivery System hereinafter CDS Access to CDS via Internet to download the system software directly to the machine System CD System Software CD...

Page 562: ...rted This machine supports the remote version upgrade via CDS When upgrading the system software via CDS the warning message is shown on the control panel to alert the user not to turn OFF the power switch When the system software is successfully written the machine is automatically restarted to activate the downloaded system software If any error occurs during the writing process the error code E...

Page 563: ...6 6 6 25 6 25 Troubleshooting Version upgrade Overview Writing System Software Troubleshooting Version upgrade Overview Writing System Software Log Error massage version up error massage F 6 30 ...

Page 564: ...ssing 1 and 7 keys However the procedure above automatically assigns a static IP address and enables the download same as before You can obtain the version information and avoid unnecessary download and errors NOTE When entering Download mode be sure to go into Service mode after all items of main menu have been displayed This machine reads the version information of system software when it starts...

Page 565: ...X Board AE1 Box Checker BCT Key Certificatefor Encrypted Communication iAXXXX KEY Staple Finisher C1 Saddle Stitch Finisher C1 Finisher Controller FIN_C1 FIN_CON Staple Finisher C1 Saddle Stitch Finisher C1 Saddle Controller SDL_CON Saddle Stitch Finisher C1 External 2 hole Puncher B1 Punch Controller EXP_B1 EXP_CON External 2 hole Puncher B1 Inner Finisher A1 Finisher Controller IFN_A1 FIN_CON In...

Page 566: ...LANGUAGE RUI and SDICT can be obtained but version information of other system software such as DCON and RCON cannot be obtained Therefore the following points to note are required when downloading in safe mode RCON The version is not upgraded except in a case where Single mode of SST is used or when Overwrite all of USB download menu is used DCON and others The following symptoms occur when SST S...

Page 567: ...em software components i e DCON RCON or options When reloading the system software after HDD is formatted Downloading System Software System software is saved in the temporary storage area on HDD after downloaded with SST Restart the machine after download so that it will be written to the system area and the flash ROM After the writing has been completed normally this machine automatically restar...

Page 568: ... memory capacity If the above is the case decompress the file before copying it to SST Preparation Requirements PC with SST Ver 4 41 or later installed The system CD for this machine Steps to copy the system software 1 Start the PC 2 Set the system CD in the PC 3 Start SST 4 Click Register Firmware button F 6 32 5 Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button 6 The system sof...

Page 569: ...the PC has the connection to the network the settings changed to the above mentioned may cause network failures due to redundant IP addresses etc Ensure that the PC is disconnected from the network when you change the PC network settings Alternatively use the cross cable to connect the PC to this machine Preparation Requirements PC with SST Ver 4 41 or later installed and the system software for t...

Page 570: ...talled 2 Turn on the main power switch of this machine 3 Enter Service mode to start the machine in Download mode Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD and press OK F 6 36 4 Check the IP address of the PC Go to Start menu to select Program Accessory Command Prompt Type IPCONFIG and press Return to see the network settings of the PC If any discrepancies from the description in the figure below are...

Page 571: ...is stored in SST the new set is automatically selected NOTE If no upgrade is stored the existing system software set is unchanged At any rate any versions of the system software can be downloaded by manual selection F 6 38 NOTE If the PC in Assist mode is connected to the machine in Safe mode only the system software of SYSTEM LANGUAGE RUI MEAPCONT and SDICT can acquire version information 4 Click...

Page 572: ...nload and overwrite the existing versions Confirm whether to download downgraded versions Overwrite all versions Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade all versions of the system software are downloaded without message By default Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions is selected 5 Click Next button 6 Disconnect the cross cable from the machine 7 Enter S...

Page 573: ...kip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions Upgraded versions are downloaded without message Skip download of the existing versions Confirm whether to download downgraded versions Confirm whether to download the existing versions downgraded versions Upgraded versions are downloaded without message Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions Con...

Page 574: ...em software can be deleted not written on HDD or Flash ROM 1 Click Clear button Clear button 2 Click Execute Clear button The system software which is stored in the temporary memory space of HDD is deleted 3 Click OK button Return to the previous screen 6 Click Shutdown Restart button 7 Click Restart button The machine is restarted The downloaded system software is written on HDD or Flash ROM 8 Cl...

Page 575: ...y in Single mode After HDD is formatted the machine cannot be started before the system software is downloaded After Format ALL is executed the machine is automatically restarted to reflect formatting to HDD At this time the machine automatically starts in Download mode For BOOTDEV format the machine is ready to download the system software without restarting After formatting enter either Assist m...

Page 576: ...m software Automatically restart Automatically restart Automatically restart Automatically restart Automatically restart Automatically restart Writing process Writing process Start in the same version of the system software Automatically restart Start in Download mode of Normal mode restart the machine manually Since there is no system software to be downloaded the shutdown sequence is executed Wh...

Page 577: ... mode Assist mode recommended See the steps to download the system software for details CAUTION After HDD is formatted ensure to download the system software If the system software is not downloaded E602 error is triggered at power on CAUTION Restarting takes more time after HDD is formatted and the system software is downloaded to write the downloaded software Down time may be approx 5 minutes in...

Page 578: ...ing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad Connect to SST Confirm that the new HDD is successfully mounted Format HDD Format ALL Follow the steps as described in Format ALL section F 6 53 When the new HDD is mounted the machine cannot be started in the normal procedure Start the machine in Safe mode as Download mode When gaining connection to SST the message is shown to confirm if the n...

Page 579: ... of Reader Controller PCB COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Backup COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES Restore Backup of DC Controller PCB COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Backup COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Restore Data is stored in HDD T 6 12 T 6 13 NOTE Before replacing the Reader Controller PCBs back up the data from Service mode The backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are ...

Page 580: ...ckup data can be downloaded only on the machine from which the data were uploaded This machine does not use SramRCON and SramDcon Service PC Main controller Main controller PCB1 iR MeapBack SramImg bin SST HDD Meapback bin System Upload Download iR ADVNCE C5051 Series Main controller PCB2 SRAM SramImg bin F 6 56 Listed below are the sample steps to upload MeapBack 1 Enter Download mode 2 Connect t...

Page 581: ...N The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were uploaded Store Meapbackup bin and Settings Registration Data Management Initialize All Data Setings Restore it even if it cannot log in to SMS Restore Meapbackup bin which backed up after Initialize All Data Setings store it Listed below were the sample steps to download MeapBack 1 Enter Download mode 2 Connect the PC to t...

Page 582: ... storage device for version upgrade the system software should be copied to the USB memory storage device storage device By inserting the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine the system software can be upgraded The figure below shows the relation between SST and USB memory storage device storage device Downloading the system software System software SST HDD Flash ROM...

Page 583: ...g complete Upgrading complete Upgrading complete Download Mode iR2270i JPjaxxxx MN dsh iR2270iM JPjaxxxx 1F77 MN PRG iR2270iM ZZjaxxxx 49AD PRG iR2270iW JPjaxxxx 5C16 MN PRG iR2270iW ZZjaxxxx A825 PRG iR2270iF JPjaxxxx DE96 ICC PRG iR2270iW ZZjaxxxx A825 PRG iR2270iG JPjaxxxx EC30 ICC PRG Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete HDD System Software Temporary memory s...

Page 584: ...ge Device Copying System Software 5 Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button 6 The list of the system software components stored in the system CD is shown on the screen Uncheck the box es of unnecessary folder s and or system software component s and click Copy button F 6 67 F 6 68 7 The message is shown when the system software is copied Click OK button F 6 69 ...

Page 585: ...Interface USB 1 1 or later USB 2 0 is recommended Memory capacity 1GB or more is recommended the total file size of the system software is approx 500MB Format FAT FAT 16 FAT32 NTFS and HFS are not supported The memory is formatted in a partition multiple partitions are not supported Unavailable USB memory memory that is protected by a password or the encryption technology Steps to copy the system ...

Page 586: ... Stored in SST N Not stored in SST 7 Click Start button Start copying the system software to the USB memory storage device storage device F 6 72 F 6 73 NOTE When the accessory configuration is known for the machine where the system software is to be downloaded uncheck the boxes of unnecessary accessories E753 0001 is triggered if the software for an unnecessary accessory is downloaded If this occu...

Page 587: ...g in Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD and then press OK In the case of safe mode This mode should not be used as general rule To be used only when normal startup fails such as a system error etc While pressing 2 8 keys at the same time turn ON the Main Power Switch Once this machine recognizes the USB memory storage device the following menu is displayed on the Control Panel download M...

Page 588: ...e 1 Upgrade Auto To download write the system software automatic 2 Upgrade w Confirmation To download the system software confirmation 3 Upgrade Overwrite all To download the system software overwriting 4 Format HDD To format the HDD BOOTDEV partition 5 Backup Collection of debug Log or Service Print Because You are for R D review do not use it other than the following 7 Clear downloaded files To ...

Page 589: ...ring downloading writing Do not turn OFF the power during downloading or writing of the system software otherwise this machine may not be started even if the power is turned ON If the machine fails to be started even if the power is turned ON start the machine in safe mode pressing 2 8 keys When the machine can be started in safe mode be sure to download the system software once again If the machi...

Page 590: ...l E753 is displayed When Download Mode Version to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the download mode is 00 36 For the Finisher that is not connected the system software is not to be downloaded G3CCB G3CCM is to be downloaded even if Super G3FAX Board AE1 is not installed E753 is displayed When Download Mode Version to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the download mo...

Page 591: ...d SYSTEM LANGUAGE RUI MERAPCONT SDICT As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained the software for RCON is not downloaded but other software are downloaded For the system software of the option that is not connected it is handled as follows In the case of startup in normal mode Recommended When Download Mode Version to be displayed on the initial screen ...

Page 592: ...e system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or older than the system software in the HDD a message is displayed in each case to confirm whether to overwrite or not Press the key on the Control Panel 0 To overwrite Any key other than 0 Not to overwrite F 6 83 Once downloading is complete a message is displayed to encourage pressing the Reset key F 6 82 4 Press the Reset k...

Page 593: ...t HDD 5 Backup 7 Clear downloaded files 8 download Menu 2 9 Other Menu 3 has been selected Execute OK 0 CANCEL Any other keys During downloading download status is displayed on the Control Panel F 6 85 CAUTION In overwriting download mode of the USB memory storage device all the system software stored in the USB memory storage device is downloaded as well Therefore be sure to keep the following in...

Page 594: ...reinstall the system software HDD formatting is not required After formatting this machine cannot be started unless the system software is downloaded When Format ALL is executed initialization process is reflected to the HDD so that this machine is automatically restarted to automatically enter download mode In the case of formatting BOOTDEV the machine is not automatically restarted but the syste...

Page 595: ...e menu screen download Menu USB 1 Upgrade Auto 2 Upgrade w Confirmation 3 Upgrade Overwrite all 4 Format HDD 5 Backup 7 Clear downloaded files 8 download Menu 2 9 Other Menu 4 has been selected Execute OK 0 CANCEL Any other keys F 6 88 4 Press the key on the Control Panel 1 0 To execute formatting BOOTDEV Any key other than 0 To return to the menu screen 2 0 To execute formatting the entire HDD An...

Page 596: ...vicePrint 5 Netcap C Return to Main Menu ーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーー Clearing Download File 7 Clear downloaded files This menu clears the system software stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD This function is used to clear the downloaded file without writing it after downloading the system software in menu 2 or 3 Operation procedure F 6 90 1 After downloading by menu 2 or 3 press the Reset key to...

Page 597: ...led and see if the software to download is for the correct target option and then execute downloading again Upgrading by SST Be sure to use Assist mode as a general rule because the system software of the non connecting option is not to be downloaded in Assist mode In Single mode it is available to download the system software of the option that is not installed In the case of downloading the Fini...

Page 598: ...eduled download Scheduled update Distribution Setting to UGW UGW linked 1 Automatic download Automatic update Distribution setting Download Via Service mode Local UI Apply Update Via Service mode Local UI Distribution setting Download Via User mode Local UI Apply Update Via User mode Local UI Distribution setting Download Via User mode Remote UI Apply Update Via User mode Remote UI Download via SS...

Page 599: ...llation Method Network Settings Enabling Install Application Options Button of User Mode LMS linked Installation Yes LMA linked installation via Local UI Yes Yes LMS linked installation via Remote UI Yes Yes Setting Sales Company s HQ When using devices input in the markets listed below the default setting of Sales Company s HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS Unles...

Page 600: ...vice to the external network Before using UGW link or User mode see the sections below to prepare as required Enabling UGW Link Enabling Update Firmware Button of User Mode Enabling Install Application Options Button of User Mode NOTE External Network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet 2 Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server This section describes how to confi...

Page 601: ...ocal CDS F 6 97 F 6 98 Note For the URL of the L CDS server enter the address beginning with htts specified in L CDS If the port number has not been specified 443 is internally added as the port number To display the button of the local CDS execute Settings Registration Management Settings License Other Register Update Software It is not displayed in service mode 6 Press OK to set the entered item...

Page 602: ...utton Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server to execute the communication test to the distribution server Using the download file information for communication test the contents for test are downloaded from the file server for the communication test to the file server 6 Upon the communication test completed the communication test result screen is s...

Page 603: ... not distribute firmware to Distribute firmware Sales Company s HQ Setting of Authorities on UGW WebPortal See Analysis Firmware Distribution Information to grant the appropriate authorities to each account NOTE See imageWARE Remote Operator s Manual e Maintenance Business Operation Manual for how to operate UGW WebPortal Distribute Firmware should be set on Customer Management screen for staff in...

Page 604: ... update during non business hours Devices with Wait for EOJ Function Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the queue Print Scan Fax except I FAX this function is enabled for I FAX only during Print Scan operation See Chapter 1 Limitations and Cautions of this manual for more detailed information NOTE To contacts registered for E mail notification on UGW th...

Page 605: ... CDS b UGW linked Download Remote Distribution Update Troubleshooting Version upgrade Version Upgrade via CDS b UGW linked Download Remote Distribution Update 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Update Firmware button F 6 106 F 6 107 4 Press Apply Firmware button F 6 108 ...

Page 606: ... version corresponds to Controller Version Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of Manual Download and Update F 6 109 CAUTION Devices without Wait for EOJ end of job Function Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue Ensure to notify users of this before you start updating It is recommended to perform firmware update during non business hours Devices with Wait for EOJ F...

Page 607: ...ow of Manual Download and Update STEP 2 Update using Updater STEP 1 Download using Updater STEP 1 Download using Updater The firmware can be downloaded from CDS to the device using Updater 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button F 6 110 F 6 111 3 Press Update Firmware button 4 Confirm the firmware to be updated in either of the following 2 ways To update to the official edition pres...

Page 608: ... firmware version is shown Applicable Firmware Select the firmware applicable to the device from the dropdown list Additional Languages If there are any additional languages they are displayed More than 1 language can be selected and it is possible to add another language when upgrading the firmware Up to 8 languages can be added including Japanese and English The languages already registered in t...

Page 609: ... button On Only difference between the current and new firmware is downloaded Off The firmware to be applied is wholly downloaded F 6 116 E mail E mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here Enter the E mail address of the service technician in charge Enter 1 byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 64 characters Comments Enter the comment in 1 byte alphanume...

Page 610: ...on Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to Now and Auto respectively Firmware is downloaded and updated automatically to the device The device is automatically restarted upon update completed Now STEP 1 is successfully completed F 6 117 F 6 118 When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to Now and Manual respectively Confirm the firmware and pres...

Page 611: ...Mode STEP 2 Update using Updater The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions When Timing to Apply is set to Auto in Distribution Setting in STEP 1 the firmware is updated automatically Only when Timing to Apply is set to Manual follow the steps below to update the firmware 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button F 6 121 3 Press Update Firmware button...

Page 612: ...panel 2 Press Check Device Configuration button 3 Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to Controller Version Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of Manual Download and Update CAUTION Devices without Wait for EOJ end of job Function Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue Ensure to notify users of this before you start updating It is recommended to perf...

Page 613: ...le This section describes how to delete firmware distribution schedule set by Updater 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Update Firmware button F 6 125 4 Press Delete Scheduled Delivery button 5 Confirm the contents of the distribution schedule and press Yes button 6 Confirm the result of deletion shown on the screen and press OK button Now the firmware distribution sch...

Page 614: ...e the downloaded firmware 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Update Firmware button F 6 128 4 Press Apply Firmware button 5 Confirm the downloaded firmware and press Yes button 6 The firmware is applied to the device The device is automatically restarted when the firmware is successfully applied 7 When the device is restarted confirm the version of the firmware 1 Press ...

Page 615: ...Deleting Downloaded Firmware 3 Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to Controller Version Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method Deleting Downloaded Firmware This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Update Firmware button F 6 131 ...

Page 616: ...oubleshooting Version upgrade Version Upgrade via CDS Deleting Downloaded Firmware 4 Press Delete Firmware button 5 Confirm the downloaded firmware to be deleted and press Yes button 6 Confirm the result of deletion and press OK button Now the downloaded firmware is successfully deleted F 6 132 F 6 133 ...

Page 617: ...lackout and the like Action Service technicians should follow the steps below via SST 1 Press 2 and 8 buttons at a time to start the device 1 Turn on the power and hold down 2 and 8 buttons at a time on the control panel 2 Download Mode is shown on Local UI If the operation above does not trigger the download mode BOOT Flash Memory service parts should be replaced takes up to 1 minute for rewritin...

Page 618: ...ad Information required for Reports Information required for Service Technicians to Obtain on Site Update Logs System Logs Log Level 4 Information to Report Symptom occurred Location of the device Date and Time that symptom occurred Steps taken for reproduction Firmware Application you tried to install Occurrence frequency Model dependency if the same symptom occurred in other models Dependency on...

Page 619: ...FNC SW CDS MEAP 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS FIRM 1 2 Log in the remote UI URL http device s IP address or host name using the system administrator right 3 From Display Logs Communication Test screen obtain System Logs log level 4 and Update Logs by copy paste Top page Remote UI Settings Registration Management Settings License Others Register Update Software Display Logs Communication Test F 6 137 ...

Page 620: ...n error occurred with the file server Check the network At the time of file download Communication error to the delivery server occurred Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence If the network environment of the device is correct obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and co...

Page 621: ... recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company again 10 Delivery Server Connect OK File Server Retrieve Failed Error Code xxxx Delivery Server Connect OK File Server Retrieve Failed Error Code XXXX Due to no return of data for the communication test time out in HTTP communica...

Page 622: ...rect to solve the cause of the error occurrence If the network environment of the device is correct obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company No return of notifying version information Network cable was disconnected during notice of version information Re connect the network cab...

Page 623: ... 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company Immediate download error dialogue An internal error occurred at the time of requesting firmware delivery information Re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company During th...

Page 624: ...power of device main body Re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company Manual update main screen Automatic update main screen Updated version was different from the ordered version Re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Version U...

Page 625: ...under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company 15 Applicable firmware is not registered On site error dialogue At the user site no latest firmware exists This means the current firmware is the latest so this error has no impact But when the latest firmware to be retrieved must exist e g released new firmware information has been notif...

Page 626: ...e local UI and explanation of those error codes How to read an error code 84014206 Code Value Contents The first digit Error field 8 Error The second digit Operator 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Not defined CDS server Updater UGW Service person IT administrator User Scheduled Update The 3rd 4th digits Method category XX Method The 5th digit Category code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Category code The 6 8th digits Description cod...

Page 627: ...he number of digits of E mail Address mailAddress is larger than 128 Characters other than single byte alphanumeric characters and symbols are used for E mail Address mailAddress An invalid e mail address was input The domain name is missing dot was input instead of comma etc When 81060002 is displayed due to an error in Firm Type Firmware Version or Firmware Group Version register the correct fir...

Page 628: ...in the DNS server and start the operation again 82005203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device the proxy settings etc and start the operation again 82005204 An input output error occurred during the connecting process to the server Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication test If any problem was found check the network envir...

Page 629: ...sh code of the download file Check the network environment of the device and start the operation again 84005309 The proxy authentication method is not supported or access to the CDS file server is not permitted Check the proxy authentication method being used change the setting to use a supported proxy authentication and then start the operation again Check that access to the following URL is perm...

Page 630: ...vice 86005203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device the proxy settings etc and start the operation again 86005204 An input output error occurred during the connecting process to the server Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication test If any problem was found check the network environment 86005205 Failed to read a HTTP respo...

Page 631: ...numeric characters 81060002 is displayed in the following cases The number of digits or type of characters used for Firm Type Firmware Version Firmware Group Version or Firmware Label does not meet the specified number of digits or type of characters The character string of Firmware Group Version firmGroupVersion includes characters other than numeric values The number of digits of E mail Address ...

Page 632: ... the firmware to be updated was disabled after distribution schedule was registered using auto update If distribution of the firmware is necessary search the applicable firmware again and perform distribution of the firmware Yes Yes 8 1 x x 1 002 In a notice of delivery allowed information an install set was release to the market but the market release was stopped during the delivery Contact the s...

Page 633: ...again and perform distribution of the firmware Yes 8 1 x x 1 00E The delivery status is New Waiting to Distribute Distributed Applying Finished Failed Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 1 x x 1 00F The delivery code is other than Distributing Firmware distribution Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 1 x x 1 010 The delivery status is New Waiting to Dist...

Page 634: ...port department of the sales company Yes 8 1 x x 2 I O 8 1 x x 2 001 The specified license access number does not exist in LMS Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 1 x x 2 002 The specified license access number has been deauthorized Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 1 x x 2 003 The package product of the entered license access number doesn t include ME...

Page 635: ...tment of the sales company Yes 8 1 x x F L CDS 8 1 x x F 000 Unclassified Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 1 x x F 001 Communication test information not registered Download file information for communication test does not exist Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 1 x x F 003 Firmware information not registered Firmware information corresponding to th...

Page 636: ...Restart the device and start the operation again Yes 8 2 6 x x 1 101 Failed to process preparation for use Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 2 6 x x 1 102 Failed to process use end Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 2 6 x x 1 103 Time out during restart of readiness preparation Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 2 6 x x 1 104 Se...

Page 637: ...s company Yes 8 2 6 x x 2 402 Failure in deletion of the auto shutdown stop file Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 2 6 x x 3 Device 8 2 6 x x 3 1xx An internal error in CPCA Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 2 6 x x 3 2xx An internal error in IMI Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 2 6 x x 3 3xx An internal error in SMS Contact ...

Page 638: ...tion sent from the device the distribution server returned an error and stopped the operation of the device within a certain period of time before the distribution server maintenance time In the case of distribution executed by specifying the date and time The firmware version of the device at the time when the distribution settings were specified and the version at the time immediately before upd...

Page 639: ...ck that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 2 6 x x 5 301 Failed to retrieve the data stream Contact the support department of the sales company Yes Yes 8 2 6 x x 5 302 Failed to create the file object for receipt Contact the support department of the sales company Yes Yes 8 2 6 x x 5 303 Failed to create the data stream of the file for receipt Conta...

Page 640: ...2 6 x x 7 2xx An internal error in SMS Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 2 6 x x 7 301 No existence of delivery ID Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 2 6 x x 7 302 Invalid delivery ID Contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 2 6 x x 7 303 The updated firmware information is not identical with the firmware information after activation ...

Page 641: ...recurs obtain the Updater log and contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 x x x 3 304 Yes 8 x x x 3 401 Application of the firmware failed Obtain the Updater log and contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 x x x 3 402 Yes 8 x x x 3 403 Yes 8 x x x 3 404 Yes 8 x x x 3 405 Yes 8 x x x 3 406 Yes 8 x x x 3 407 Restart of the device failed Restart the device and perf...

Page 642: ...ork environment collect the Updater log and contact the support department of the sales company Yes 8 x x x 5 201 Yes Yes Yes 8 x x x 5 202 Yes Yes Yes 8 x x x 5 203 Yes Yes Yes 8 x x x 5 204 Yes Yes Yes 8 x x x 5 205 Yes Yes Yes 8 x x x 5 206 Yes Yes Yes 8 x x x 5 300 Yes Yes 8 x x x 5 301 Yes Yes 8 x x x 5 302 Yes Yes 8 x x x 5 303 Yes Yes 8 x x x 5 304 Yes Yes Yes 8 x x x 5 305 Yes 8 x x x 5 30...

Page 643: ...of the sales company Yes 101 Processing in the device event processing failed Restart the device and perform the operation again Restart the device and perform the operation again When this problem recurs the firmware of the device needs to be reinstalled upgraded Yes 303 Queue could not be sent due to failure of processing in the device event processing Restart the device and perform the operatio...

Page 644: ...fication of version information The network cable was disconnected during notification of version information Notification of version information ended in failure because the device was restarted during notification of version information UGW linkage main screen UGW linkage was turned ON while eRDS was OFF On site error dialog An internal error occurred when obtaining the applicable firmware infor...

Page 645: ...CB Pay attention not to cause short circuit when accessing the PCB Useful Operations The items of detailed procedure explanation start with a description of the flow diagram The items and procedures checked in the flow diagram are described separately in a check item table The flow diagram contains numbers e g 1 corresponding to the check items so that the readers can grasp the relevant parts of t...

Page 646: ... Solid black The logo is displayed Only the bar is displayed Power On Display of E code Countermeasures related to system software Reinstall the system Replace the HDD Refer to the error code correspondence table for countermeasures NG is displayed as a result in the startup system failure diagnosis Yes No Flow A Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure Procedure A Detailed Procedure of St...

Page 647: ...the Main Power SW is turned ON the overcurrent protection may be active and stopping the supply of power Consult this flow when checking the 3 3V and 12V power supplies and identifying the location of the failure in Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure described below The Control Panel does not display Does the host machine start warm up rotation Flow D To All night Power Supply 3 3V S...

Page 648: ...w for Control Panel Startup Failure Status Check Check item Item Check item Location 1 Control Panel LED 2 Main Controller PCB1 LED9 3 RISER PCB C26 3 3V Main Controller 1 Main Controller 2 Riser PCB C26 Tester Item Check item Location 4a Main Controller PCB1 LED9 Main Controller PCB2 LED4 4b Check each of the pins 1 through 4 12V of J104 on the Riser PCB e g pins 1 12V and pins 5 GND 1 4 5 J104 T...

Page 649: ...d of the Hard Key Is 12V supplied to C1005 of the Control Panel CPU PCB Start Assumed failure location 1 Control Panel CPU PCB 2 Main Controller PCB1 3 12V Connector of the Control Panel 4 Control Panel Unit Yes No 1 Yes No No No Yes Yes Check the following resistances of the cables connected to J1002 of the Control Panel CPU PCB Between pins 2 orange and pins 3 blue Between pins 2 and the chassis...

Page 650: ...en connect the 12V Power Supply Connector of the Control Panel Disconnect and then connect the 12V Connector of the Control Panel J1002 3 Control Panel CPU PCB Control Panel CPU PCB Note that an open circuit is likely to occur when the cable is being disconnected and then connected Item Check item Location 4 Relay PCB J427 J427 5 Disconnect J427 of the Relay PCB and check the following resistance ...

Page 651: ... 12V Check Flow Item Check item Location 6 Relay PCB J427 J427 Control Panel CPU PCB J1002 J1002 Check the cables between J427 of the Relay PCB and J1002 of the Control Panel CPU PCB 1 Disconnect the connectors of J427 and J1002 2 Check if power is distributed between all pins of J427 connector and all the corresponding pins of J1002 connector Normal value 0 ohm T 6 25 ...

Page 652: ... following procedure Yes No 3 Analysis complete Has the machine normally started up Is LED 4 ON Visually check the Main Controller 1 LED 9 Is LED 9 ON Visually check the Main Controller 1 LED 9 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 Replace the Main Controller PCB1 Restart the host machine Is LED 9 ON E60Is E602 displayed Wait about five minutes until it is displayed Yes No No No Yes Yes No Yes 2 After ...

Page 653: ...nalysis Flow Status Check Check item Item Check item Location 1 Check the Main Controller 1 LED 9 activation Check the Main Controller 2 LED 4 activation LED4 LED4 You can check the activation of LED 4 orange through the hole of the connector for Main Controller 2 Item Check item Location 2 Remove the Main Controller 2 Main Controller PCB1 Main Controller PCB2 3 Display of E code T 6 26 ...

Page 654: ...PCB J413 DC 3 3V AC power e g 115 V 230V F 6 145 Identify the cause in the following flow Check if the Leakage Breaker is turned OFF Failure of the AC Driver Failure of the All night Power Supply The All night Power Supply 3 3V is not supplied to the Main Controllers 1 Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch 2 Disconnect J413 of the Relay PCB 3 Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch Do the yellow and ...

Page 655: ...he cable side respectively e g pins 1 yellow and pins 4 blue Lead Wire Blue Lead Wire Yellow J413 is the connector to input 3 3V from the 3 3V All night Power Supply to the Relay PCB Normal value 3 3V Item Check item Location 2 AC driver PCB AC driver PCB AC driver PCB J1014 PCB side of J1014 Between pins 1 and pins 4 Normal value AC power e g 115 V 230 V J1014 is the connector to supply AC from t...

Page 656: ...e Lead Wires of the 12V Power Supply Connector 1 Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch 2 If the FU10 and FU11 of the Relay PCB are disconnected check whether the cables are trapped 3 If any of the cables are trapped between J421 of the Relay PCB and J104 of the Riser PCB correct them 4 If no cable is trapped replace all of the following Main Controller 1 Main Controller 2 Riser PCB and Relay PCB Y...

Page 657: ...er is distributed between all pins of J421 connector and all the corresponding pins of J104 connector Normal value 0 ohm In case FU10 or FU11 on the Relay PCB is blown out 3 Check for any trapped cables and short circuit between pin 1 of J421 connector and all the pins of J104 connector except for the corresponding one as well as between pin 1 of J421 and the chassis Normal value ohm 4 Check the r...

Page 658: ...ooting Startup System Failure Diagnosis Flow E 12V Power Supply System Flow Flow for narrowing down troubles Item Check item Location 4 J401 J411 J431 J431 J411 J401 J431 J401 Check cable from the triangle mark J401 Eighth cable J431 Fifth cable 1 5 3 Check whether the cables are trapped J401 pins 8 J411 pins 1 pins 3 pins 5 J431 pins 5 T 6 29 ...

Page 659: ...connector of the DC Controller PCB in order and identify the location of failure Replace the 12V Power Supply No F 6 148 Check item 1 If the problem remains unsolved even after checking the short circuit of the harnesses disconnect the following connector one by one and repeat the following procedure to check whether the symptoms change 1 a Open the front door Disable the operation of the host mac...

Page 660: ... PCB Relay PCB Control Panel The power on signal which keeps the supply of 12V power is sent through the following route Main Controller 2 Main Controller 1 Riser PCB DC Controller Relay PCB 12V Power Supply The 12V Power Supply receives its power supply from the AC Driver PCB and the power on signal which keeps the supply of AC power is sent through the following route Main Controller PCB2 Main C...

Page 661: ...ete properly with only the Control Panel bar displayed identify the location of the failure according to the flow Flow for narrowing down troubles Description The workflow of the Controller system failure diagnosis to be executed when only the Control Panel bar is displayed F 6 150 Check item Startup Method 1 Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys 2 and 4 simultaneous...

Page 662: ... Install the system software Download by 2 8 startup Replace the Main Controller PCB1 Replace the HDD Replace the Main Controller PCB2 2 When the detected location is displayed on the screen where NG is displayed identify the location of the failure by referencing the controller system failure diagnosis and perform the remedy If the diagnosis does not proceed to a status where NG is displayed proc...

Page 663: ... PCB 1 2 PCBs and units diagnosed by each tool are as follow Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool Main Controller PCB 1 side Main Controller PCB 1 SDRAM TPM PCB Main Controller PCB 2 side Main Controller PCB 2 SDRAM M0 M1 SDRAM P Memory PCB Open I F PCB option Rizer PCB HDD SDRAM M0 is an option Overview Error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine and stored in the locations shown below ...

Page 664: ...Diagnosis Controller Self Diagnosis Overview Troubleshooting Controller Self Diagnosis Controller Self Diagnosis Overview Layout Drawing Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis F 6 154 Main Controller PCB 1 SDRAM BAT Main Controller PCB 2 F 6 155 ...

Page 665: ...ntrol Panel light up Turn ON the m ain power switch Execute basic check Execute Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool Take an action appropriate for the error No Yes No Yes Basic Check Items 1 Check if the Leakage Breaker is turned OFF 2 Check if the Power Supply Plug is disconnected 3 Check if the Connection Cable between the Main Controller PCB 1 and Control Panel is disconnected 4 Check if the...

Page 666: ...ultaneously F 6 158 F 6 159 2 Keep pressing the numeric keys for approx 20 seconds until the following screen appears on the Control Panel NOTE When this tool is not installed correctly the following regular screen is displayed In this case perform the following remedy Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch again and execute step 1 and 2 shown above If this tool still does not boot it means that BC...

Page 667: ...r is detected by diagnosis Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result In detailed information the name of the test where an error was detected is indicated F 6 162 F 6 163 How to view the error result The following screen is an enlarged view of the detailed information indicated above Explanation of the detailed error information is described no means that optional PCBs are not mo...

Page 668: ...e the Main Controller PCB 1 SN 10 LANC SPI Check failure of LANC SPI on the Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 1 1 Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 Test Name Description Assumed Error Location Remedy Error Code SN 11 RTC CHECK Check failure of RTC on the Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 1 1 Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 SN 12 TPM Check failure of the TPM PCB on the Main Contro...

Page 669: ...k the connection of the Fun connector J109 J110 on Riser PCB SN 100 HDD S M A R T information collection and performance check Refer to the display example shown below HDD If the result S M A R T Check is not 0 recommend the backup of user data If Performance is 20 MB s or less recommend to replace the HDD If the result CheckResult is CAUTION recommend the backup of user data If the result Exec SN...

Page 670: ...ether the green LED is lit on the LED PCB The firstly blinked green LED ChA or ChB in a high speed tells the Master HDD which is accessed firstly The green LED not lit on a channel tells the location of Backup HDD Restrictions Controller System Error Diagnosis Regarding the diagnosis for the test names SN 1 2 7 15 21 24 if an error occurs in the diagnosis under the test names this diagnosis tool w...

Page 671: ...ED16 Green LED1 Green LED 4 Red Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 Riser PCB Preconditions Check whether the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2 are properly inserted Check whether the connectors are securely connected LEDs are not lit when the contaction is poor Power on is not possible When the LED of the Control Panel main power is not lit check the connection of cables...

Page 672: ...Controller PCB 1 side is securely connected Replace the Main Controller PCB Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1 Yes No LED9 is lit Yes No Determine the faulty PCB by the error code E602 0001 after removing the Main Controller PCB 2 and turning ON the power No error code is displayed Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 Error code E602 0001 is displayed Replace the Main Control...

Page 673: ...are rather than a mechanical electrical failure Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduction procedure is identified and the error can be reproduced by the sales company HQ or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow up Types of Logs There are continuous logs event logs and manual logs Type Collecting method Size of logs Setting Event log Automatically recorded in accordan...

Page 674: ...rom the machine by any of the following methods Make the machine recognize the USB memory device Select the following in service mode Lev1 COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD and click OK Use SST on a PC with the network cable connected to transfer the debug log Transfer the debug log to a USB memory device that stores the system of the machine File Name of Sublog Whether the file is new or old can be...

Page 675: ...F 6 173 Uploading Data by SST The following shows a method to collect a log by connecting a PC with SST Ver 4 63 or later running to the machine Preconditions In addition to continuous logs obtained manual logs holding down the counter 1 2 and 3 keys and event logs DEBUG 1 are stored in the machine A PC where SST is running is connected to the machine and the machine is in download mode Note Execu...

Page 676: ...s no log in the machine it results in blank option items for data to upload When the file name is longer than the frame it displays that it is a log in the comment column just below It is displayed as log in the figure below Note The log is not stored when You cancel it before pushing the Start button It is deleted from the main body F 6 175 F 6 176 4 Press the Save button 5 Check that the data st...

Page 677: ...ion Preconditions Troubleshooting Debug log Collecting System Information Preconditions 6 Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC In the initial setting Windows C ServData iAxxxx Model JWH00003 Serial number 20120524192934 Log yymmddhhmm F 6 179 ...

Page 678: ...nough capacity when logs are obtained multiple times Capacity required for one log collection is 140MB and it takes approx 5 minutes for writing Estimation In order that the USB memory device is recognized in download mode it is recommended to store the system software of the host machine In case of emergency if there is an empty folder named iAC5255 the USB memory device can be recognized As for ...

Page 679: ...ormed operations include turning OFF the power use the file name SHT as a clue for identifying the date and time If the number of seconds is expressed as 99 three digit number the number shows the cause which triggered the log acquisition e g acquisition due to an error code E three digit number Example When an error code E747 occurred SUBLOG00_0001_0918140799747 TXT When checking the occurrence d...

Page 680: ...unicate between machines across a network packet collection for both sides becomes easy Caution The network capture function may fail to collect a part of packet in a high loaded network environment The network capture function of the machine is more prone to failures in collecting packet than when using a PC to do so When collecting packet due to trouble of print data etc a case is assumed in whi...

Page 681: ...tached to the file When the HDD space reaches full during packet collection the oldest file is deleted to continue collecting packet data to the currently stored file CAPSTATE of capturing continues to be RUNNING When the overwriting setting is OFF Capturing is stopped CAPSTATE of capturing becomes HDDFULL Note that STT STP remains as start state 1 Capturing is started again by changing the value ...

Page 682: ...d packet data is XXX cap This setting applies only when using USB memory for data extraction This setting is ignored when using SST for data collection because both files in encrypted format and clear text format are extracted F 6 185 Start stop network capture 1 Select the following Service Mode Level 2 Copier Test NET CAP STT STP 1 2 To stop capturing set 0 RUNNING is displayed for the item CAPS...

Page 683: ...failure is complete It is required to disable and transfer the license however the further step LMS license transfer is not required F 6 188 Other functions Payload discard function Payload is customer data Data is collected including payload by default To prevent leak of customers information or large volume of network packet the network packet can be collected while payload is discarded Service ...

Page 684: ...ored on the HDD Select Service Mode level 2 Copier Test NET CAP FILE CLR and then click the OK button SST Network Packet File Collection Overview Collect the network capture data that has been stored in the machine using SST It is possible to use files in clear text format for in house analysis by using free software such as Wireshark Note that only Canon Inc can analyze encrypted files In the cas...

Page 685: ...data files to upload F 6 193 F 6 194 Note When using SST to collect data you can select both files in encrypted format and clear text format Collect the network capture data 1 In the case of the default installation destination for SST click the folder with the name of the serial number of the machine stored in C drive ServData target model e g iAC5255 on the PC 2 Three types of files are collecte...

Page 686: ...iles to Canon Inc Preparation USB memory Store in advance the system software of the machine to connect to For the system software it is fine to store just one of the system software of the machine LANG etc There is no need to store the full set Overall flow 1 Enter download mode 2 Select Backup 3 Transfer the network capture data 4 Collect the network capture data Enter Download Mode 1 Connect th...

Page 687: ...press any key 3 Press the C key to return to the download Menu HDD 4 Press the Reset key to shut down the machine Collect the network capture data 1 Check that the network capture files are stored on the USB memory 2 Two types of files are collected a file in clear text format xxx cap and a file in encrypted format xxx can 3 Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in...

Page 688: ...ngs IPv4 Settings PING Command enter 127 0 0 1 and touch the Start button Does the screen display Response from the host See the next figure YES Proceed to Step 3 NO There is a possibility that this machine s network settings are wrong Check the details of the IPv4 settings once more F 6 202 3 Confirmation from another PC connected to same network Request the user to ping this machine from a PC co...

Page 689: ...ouch the Start button Does the screen display Response from the host YES Proceed to Remedy 2 NO There is a possibility that the DNS server address is wrong Reconfirm the address with the user s system administrator F 6 205 Remedy 2 Troubleshooting using communication log COM LOG 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 2 Select COPIER Function INSTALL COM LOG and touch the blank field on the right side The...

Page 690: ...ne is deleted information related to E RDS is also deleted Therefore when 7 days have passed without performing a communication test after registering the E RDS machine again the device setting becomes invalid Remedy Perform a communication test before the device setting becomes invalid No 4 Symptom There was a log indicating Network is not ready try later in error details of COM LOG list Cause A ...

Page 691: ...ificate CA KEY results in NG Cause Initialization process of the CA certificate has completed abnormally Remedy Initialize the HDD No 10 Symptom A service call request is failed and a message Could not send the service call request is displayed Cause A communication test with UGW has not been performed or a communication test result is NG Remedy Perform a communication test and check that the test...

Page 692: ...7 7 Error Jam Alarm Error Jam Alarm Overview Error Code Jam Code Alarm Code ...

Page 693: ...klet Finisher J1 02 05 61 62 Inner Finisher E1 02 05 External 2 Hole Puncher B2 02 05 65 T 7 1 T 7 2 Pickup position code When jam occurs pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code Pickup position Pickup position code At Finisher jam At error avoidance jam At ADF jam without pickup operation at SEND Inbox etc 00 Cassette 1 01 Cassette 2 02 Cassette 3 Cassette Feeding Unit...

Page 694: ...n When clearing MN CON while any login application other than Default Authentication is error such as not displayed login screen occurred In this case access SMS once and switch login application to Default Authentication to recover to the normal status T 7 4 Points to Note When Clearing HDD As a remedy for error codes E602 XXXX E611 0000 HDD partition is selected and the target partition may be c...

Page 695: ...OTE After performing the above remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E001 0003 05 Title High temperature error detected by hardware Description Hardware detects abnormal high temperature of the Thermistor Main Thermistor 1 264 deg C Main Thermistor 2 265 deg C Sub Thermistor 1 2 280 deg C for 400 msec...

Page 696: ...ter performing the above remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E004 0000 05 Title Thermistor disconnection detection error Description Signal name FUSER_CNCTX detects disconnection for 500 msec or longer Remedy 1 Check if the Fixing Assembly is installed 2 Check connection of the connectors in Fixing ...

Page 697: ... detected for 100 msec or more Remedy 1 Check connection of drum encoder sensor 1 2 Take out drum encoder sensor 1 UN31 to clean the Sensor 3 Replace drum encoder sensor 1 4 Check if the harness of the drum encoder sensor is faulty replace the harness if it s disconnected 5 Replace the Drum Driver PCB UN4 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E012 0103 05 Title Faulty signal with Y...

Page 698: ... UN34 and the Wheel 2 Replace the drum encoder sensor Wheel 3 Replace the drum encoder sensor 4 Replace the Drum Driver PCB UN4 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E012 0205 05 Title Failure in M Drum Motor Control Description Unstable rotation of the M Drum Motor Remedy 1 Check if the Drum is installed 2 Take out the drum encoder sensor UN33 UN34 to clean the Sensor and the Whee...

Page 699: ... PCB UN4 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E012 0401 05 Title Bk Drum Encoder 1 and 2 signal error Description Bk Drum Encoder 1 and 2 signal error It was detected that the motor was rotating but not the encoders Remedy 1 Check connection of drum encoder sensor 1 and 2 UN37 UN38 2 Check that the drum encoder sensor Wheel is properly installed 3 Check connection of the Drum Driv...

Page 700: ...curance area Items Description E012 2000 05 Title Failure in rotation of Drum Motors in all colors and ITB Motor Description Faulty rotation with all of the Motors at the same time based on the assumption that all of the motors fail to rotate Remedy 1 Check the connector on the Drum Driver PCB UN4 2 Check the connector on the Relay Board UN5 3 Check the Interlock Switch 4 Check the Drum Driver Har...

Page 701: ...the Patch Sensor 4 Replace the Drum E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E020 0014 05 Title Error in Bk Developing Assembly Description Patch level is higher than the target upper limit although the patch level was minimized at the time of patch initialization Remedy Go through the following DISPLAY P LED DA perform cleaning first If P LED DA is 3F or more 1 Check installation of ...

Page 702: ...um E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E020 0102 05 Title Error in M Developing Assembly Description The value is higher than the upper limit for the patch Remedy Go through the following DISPLAY P LED DA perform cleaning first If P LED DA is 3F or more 1 Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the Drum 2 Clean the Patch Sensor UN47 UN48 UN49 Window 3 Check if the patch...

Page 703: ...er in the Developing Assembly Remedy Go through the following DISPLAY DENS DENS Y if DENS Y is slightly higher than 5 0 output 10 sheets of solid image with the color causing the error to reduce T D ratio See the Service Mode again to see if the problem is improved Remedy is complete if it s improved If not perform the following remedy work 1 Check if the ATR Sensor TS5 Connector is disconnected 2...

Page 704: ...rror in Bk Developing Assembly Description The value is lower than the lower limit for the patch Remedy Go through the following DISPLAY P LED DA perform cleaning first if P LED DA is 3F or more If the Patch Sensor UN47 UN48 UN49 value shows 1 digit perform remedy from 3 If the supply area of the Developing Assembly is badly soiled toner can be leaked 1 Check installation of the Developing Assembl...

Page 705: ...e the Developing Assembly 5 Check short circuit of the harness of the Toner supply sensor PS2 E020 0330 05 Title Error in C Developing Assembly Description The average of ATR reference value was lower than the specified value at the time of ATR Sensor initialization Remedy 1 Check short circuit of the ATR Sensor TS7 Harness 2 Replace the Developing Assembly E code Detailed code Occurance area Item...

Page 706: ...han the specified value 3 2V Remedy 1 Check if the ATR Sensor TS8 Connector is properly connected 2 Check short circuit of the ATR Sensor Harness 3 Replace the Developing Assembly E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E020 0441 05 Title Error in Bk Developing Assembly Description Unable to adjust the control voltage at the time of ATR initialization exceeds the specified value 6 8V...

Page 707: ...e harness to see if the harness is caught disconnected or physically removed 3 If the above measures do not solve the problem replace the Drum Driver PCB UN4 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E021 0400 05 Title Error in Bk Developing Motor Description The motor failed to rotate at the specified speed Remedy 1 Check the load applied to the Developing Assembly turn the gear with ...

Page 708: ...If the above measures do not solve the problem Replace the Drum Driver PCB UN4 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E025 01A0 05 Title Error in Y Toner Container Cam HP Sensor PS5 Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor status ON OFF when opening the Toner Cap so that open and close status of the Toner Cap cannot be judged Remedy Identify the c...

Page 709: ...er reinstall the removed Toner Container at least once in user mode Adjustment Maintenance Replace Specified Toner and check that toner replacement can be performed normally E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E025 01C0 05 Title Error in Cover Sensor PS13 in Y Toner Container Description Unable to detect opening of the Toner Container Inner Cover when removing the Toner Container...

Page 710: ...he cap of the M Toner Container was sealed released Remedy 1 Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Main Drive Unit to check the operation 2 If the Main Drive Unit side failed to rotate check the drive to see damage of the gear etc If it s results in NG replace the Main Drive Unit 3 If the Main Drive Unit side failed to rotate while the Drive rotates turn the Set on Hopper Unit to check the ...

Page 711: ...oved Toner Container at least once in user mode Adjustment Maintenance Replace Specified Toner and check that toner replacement can be performed normally E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E025 02B0 05 Title Error in M Toner Container Cam HP Sensor PS6 Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor status OFF ON when closing the Toner Cap so that op...

Page 712: ...ly removed including the Relay Connector If there is no problem replace the sensor After checking the output value in step 3 perform step 5 and later steps 4 If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing parts replace the Drum Driver PCB UN4 and then perform step 5 and later steps 5 Clear the error in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR and then turn OFF and then ON the main power 6 R...

Page 713: ...If the above measures do not solve the problem Replace the Drum Driver PCB UN4 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E025 03A0 05 Title Error in C Toner Container Cam HP Sensor PS7 Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor status ON OFF when opening the Toner Cap so that open and close status of the Toner Cap cannot be judged Remedy Identify the c...

Page 714: ...r reinstall the removed Toner Container at least once in user mode Adjustment Maintenance Replace Specified Toner and check that toner replacement can be performed normally E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E025 03C0 05 Title Error in Cover Sensor PS15 in C Toner Container Description Unable to detect opening of the Toner Container Inner Cover when removing the Toner Container ...

Page 715: ...he cap of the Bk Toner Container was sealed released Remedy 1 Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Main Drive Unit to check the operation 2 If the Main Drive Unit side failed to rotate check the drive to see damage of the gear etc If it s results in NG replace the Main Drive Unit 3 If the Main Drive Unit side failed to rotate while the Drive rotates turn the Set on Hopper Unit to check the...

Page 716: ...oved Toner Container at least once in user mode Adjustment Maintenance Replace Specified Toner and check that toner replacement can be performed normally E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E025 04B0 05 Title Error in Bk Toner Container Cam HP Sensor PS8 Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor status OFF ON when closing the Toner Cap so that o...

Page 717: ... service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR and then turn OFF and then ON the main power 6 Replace the toner reinstall the removed Toner Container at least once in user mode Adjustment Maintenance Replace Specified Toner and check that toner replacement can be performed normally E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E027 0100 05 Title Error in supply with Y Developing Assembly Descript...

Page 718: ...lly turn the Supply Input Gear to check rotation If it s results in NG replace the Hopper Unit E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E029 0003 05 Title ITB light intensity error Description The reflected value from ITB was lower than the lower limit when adjusting the light intensity of patch LED Remedy 1 Check if the cable of the Registration Shutter Solenoid SL1 is open circuit 2...

Page 719: ...cess Unit side 4 Replace the Drum Unit 5 Replace the Pre exposure LED PCB UN25 UN26 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E061 01E0 05 Title Abnormal current run to the M Drum Description The change in current level for M Drum film thickness detection is too much compared to the previous time Remedy 1 Check with the Host Machine which generates an error to check if a wrong cartridg...

Page 720: ...cution of the color causing the error 5 Replace the Drum Unit 6 Check the primary transfer voltage value if it s not appropriate turn OFF and then ON the main power to forcibly execute the ATVC control E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E061 03F1 05 Title Abnormal current run to the C Drum Description Abnormal initial current level at the time of initialization of the C Drum fil...

Page 721: ...05 Title Error in engagement operation Description Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 2 failed to be detected for 2 sec at the time of engagement operation Remedy 1 Check if the ITB Connector is physically removed 2 Replace the Primary Transfer Detachment Motor M15 and its Drive Assembly the gear Drive Shaft Mounting Plate etc E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E074 0003 05 Titl...

Page 722: ...played E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E075 0103 05 Title Error in full displacement of ITB front Description ITB Displacement Sensor detects full displacement position at the front Remedy 1 Correct the displacement of the ITB 1 1 Place paper and remove the ITB Unit 1 2 Lift the rear left side up where the cleaner is located opposite to the motor and hold the ITB Unit as if t...

Page 723: ... the HP Sensor Replace the Laser Shutter Motor M28 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E112 0001 05 Title Error in Dustproof Shutter Description Failure to be back to the HP although the specified period of time has passed when closing Remedy 1 Check installation of the Dustproof Shutter Drive 2 Check if the connector of the Laser Shutter Sensor PS29 or the Laser Shutter Motor M2...

Page 724: ...ode Description Communication failure between CPU and LSI on the DC Controller PCB UN1 Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Replace the DC Controller PCB UN1 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E197 0102 05 Title Error in communication of HOB single shot mode Description Communication failure between CPU and LSI on the DC Controller PCB UN1 Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the ...

Page 725: ...C Controller PCB UN1 E197 02B0 05 Title Timeout error in HOB reception waiting Description Communication failure between CPU and LSI on the DC Controller PCB UN1 Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Replace the DC Controller PCB UN1 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E197 1001 05 Title Feed Driver PCB disconnection Description Feed Driver PCB disconnection detection Remedy ...

Page 726: ... Scanning Glass HP Sensor PS12 and Scanner Unit 4 Replace the Reader Controller PCB E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E202 0102 04 Title Back Side Scanning Glass HP error This error occurs on Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 only Description Back Side Scanning Glass error when moving to the right side for HP check operation Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Check the d...

Page 727: ... and Relay PCB on the Printer side 5 Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DF Driver PCB E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E240 0000 05 Title Error in communication data Description When communication data error between the controller and DC Controller PCB is detected Remedy Check connection of the connector Check connection of the Sub PCB in the Controller Box Check connection...

Page 728: ...ble is not open circuit 3 Replace the DDI S Cable between Reader and Printer 4 Replace the Reader Controller PCB E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E270 0101 04 Title Scanner Unit Paper Back VSYNC signal error This error occurs on Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 only Description Due to the VSYNC error in the Scanner Unit PCB Paper Back which communicates with Reader Controller...

Page 729: ...d check that the Cable is not open circuit E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E301 0002 04 Title Reading light intensity error Description The light intensity was at the reference level or below at paper back shading Remedy 1 Check that the LED of the Scanner Unit Paper Back is lit 2 Check the connection between Scanner Unit Paper Back and LED and check that the Cable is not ope...

Page 730: ...E350 0000 05 Title System error Description System error Remedy Contact the service company office E350 0001 05 Title System error Description System error Remedy Contact the service company office E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E350 0002 05 Title System error Description System error Remedy Contact the service company office E350 0003 05 Title System error Description Syste...

Page 731: ...code Occurance area Items Description E401 0001 04 Title Pickup error Description Pickup Unit is not returned to the home position Remedy 1 Check that Pickup Unit Lifter HP Sensor flag moves smoothly 2 Check the connection between DF Driver PCB and Pickup Unit Lifter HP Sensor and check that the Cable is not open circuit 3 Check the operation of Pickup Motor Set the service mode FEEDER FUNCTION MT...

Page 732: ...de Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E423 0002 04 Title DF Unit SDRAM error This error occurs on Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1 only Description SDRAM Verify error Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Check the connection between Reader and Controller and check that the Cable is not open circuit 3 Replace the Reader Controller PCB E490 0001 04 Title Different DF model Descript...

Page 733: ...e gear change mechanism is faulty 4 The gear change motor M110 is faulty 5 The finisher controller PCB is faulty E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E519 8001 05 Title Gear change home position error Description The gear change home position sensor does not turn OFF when the gear change motor has been driven for 387 pulses Remedy 1 The gear change home position sensor PI117 is fa...

Page 734: ...r is physically removed 4 Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor S10 failure occurs E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E532 0002 05 Title STP Move Motor fails to move from HP Description At initial rotation when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot move from HP it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry Remedy 1 Check if t...

Page 735: ...ved 2 Check if the Motor failure occurs 3 Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor S14 Connector is physically removed 4 Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor S14 failure occurs E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E540 0005 05 Title Tray Lift Motor clock error Description At initial rotation when the Tray Lift Motor rotates and clock input is not detected within the specified period o...

Page 736: ...ween the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty 3 The tray up down mechanism is faulty 4 The tray 1 shift motor M107 is faulty 5 The finisher controller PCB is faulty E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E542 0001 05 Title Additional Tray Lift Motor timeout error Description Unable to complete the operation even after the specified period of time during initial r...

Page 737: ...tor is faulty 3 The tray up down mechanism is faulty 4 The tray 2 shift motor M105 is faulty 5 The finisher controller PCB is faulty E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E542 8007 05 Title The tray 2 shift motor error Description The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the tray 2 shift motor is at a stop Remedy 1 The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty 2 The wiring bet...

Page 738: ...5 Title Gripper Unit Move Motor fails to move from HP Description At initial rotation when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot move from HP it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry Remedy 1 Check if the Motor M2 Connector is physically removed 2 Check if the Motor failure occurs 3 Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor S7 Connector is phy...

Page 739: ...Items Description E592 8001 05 Title Trailing edge sensor error Description The voltage of the light received is 3 0 V or less even when the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor LED5 PTR5 has been increased to 66 or more Remedy 1 The wiring between the LED PCB photosensor PCB and punch controller PCB is faulty 2 The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty 3 The punch controller PCB is fau...

Page 740: ...e punch controller PCB is faulty 3 The finisher controller PCB is faulty E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E593 8001 05 Title Horizontal registration home position error Description At time of horizontal registration motor initialization the punch slide unit does not leave the horizontal home position sensor even when it has been driven for 9 mm Remedy 1 The horizontal registra...

Page 741: ...ON when the aligning plate motor has been driven for 500 pulses Remedy 1 The aligning plate home position sensor PI5 is faulty 2 The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty 3 The aligning motor M5 is faulty 4 The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E5F3 8002 05 Title Aligning plate home position error Description The aligning plate home p...

Page 742: ...mber of pulses detected by the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor is 6 pulses or less Remedy 1 The paper pushing plate home position sensor PI14 paper pushing plate top position sensor PI15 and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor PI1 is faulty 2 The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty 3 The paper pushing plate motor M8 is faulty 4 The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty E5F6 ...

Page 743: ...stem for the main CPU Remedy 1 Start in Safe Mode then perform overall format using SST or USB memory and reinstall the system and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Switch Prepare the USB memory which system software was registered Insert the USB memory to the equipment Execute 3 Upgrade Overwrite All in the main menu 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure wi...

Page 744: ...h 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can be caused by failure with the HDD therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system E602 0009 00 Title Error in HDD Description There is no Font file in BOOTDEV BOOT Remedy 1 Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the system using SST and then turn OFF and then ON the main power switch 2 If the above measures do not solve the problem it can b...

Page 745: ...problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases there is a possibility that the error may occur again therefore be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E602 0111 00 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of image data Inbox etc after startup Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power ask the follow...

Page 746: ...problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases there is a possibility that the error may occur again therefore be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E602 0211 00 Title Error in HDD Description Error in management data area of image after startup Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power ask the followings to...

Page 747: ...problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases there is a possibility that the error may occur again therefore be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E602 0311 00 Title Error in HDD Description Storage area of image data temporary data after startup Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power ask the followings...

Page 748: ...problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases there is a possibility that the error may occur again therefore be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E602 0411 00 Title Error in HDD Description Error in thumbnail area after startup Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power ask the followings to user A Preferr...

Page 749: ...problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases there is a possibility that the error may occur again therefore be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E602 0511 00 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of universal data after startup Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power ask the followings t...

Page 750: ...problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases there is a possibility that the error may occur again therefore be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E602 0611 00 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of universal data temporary data after startup Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power ask t...

Page 751: ...problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases there is a possibility that the error may occur again therefore be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E602 0711 00 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of fax temporary data after startup Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power ask the followin...

Page 752: ...problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases there is a possibility that the error may occur again therefore be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E602 0811 00 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of PSS temporary data after startup Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power ask the followin...

Page 753: ...form the steps 1 through 3 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E602 0911 00 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of PDL related file after startup Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power ask the followings to user A Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is deleted B Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with...

Page 754: ...roblem is not solved with step 4 format the HDD using SST or USB and download the firmware 6 Replace the HDD Note Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases there is a possibility that the error may occur again therefore be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E602 1111 00 Title Error in HDD Description Error in MEAP area aft...

Page 755: ...hen turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Back up necessary data 3 Format the all using SST or USB and download the firmware 4 Replace the HDD E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E602 1401 00 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of system log at startup Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power ask the followings to user A Preferring to...

Page 756: ...gh the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases there is a possibility that the error may occur again therefore be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E602 1501 00 Title Error in HDD Description Error in Advanced Box area at startup Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power ask the followings to user A ...

Page 757: ...gh the problem can be solved with step 1 in some cases there is a possibility that the error may occur again therefore be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E602 1601 00 Title Error in HDD Description Error in CDS area at startup Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the power ask the followings to user A Preferrin...

Page 758: ...e Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E602 2000 00 Title Authentication error between the host machine and the Encryption Board Description Error in combination of the controller Encryption Board and HDD Remedy 1 After checking the connection of the Encryption Board removing and then installing the board turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 Perform key clear and system recovery procedu...

Page 759: ...nidentified after startup Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the power 2 Disconnect and then connect the HDD connector 3 Format the HDD using SST or USB and download the firmware 4 Replace the HDD E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E604 0512 00 Title Memory error Description Memory of Main Controler PCB 1 is faulty Remedy Replace Main Controller PCB 1 E604 1024 00 Title Memory error ...

Page 760: ...ror code to prevent repeated retransmission at power down during fax transmission Description When the power is down during fax transmission this machine resends the fax at the next power on However the operation retransmission rebooting retransmission might be repeated due to the damage on SRAM at the power down To prevent this symptom this error code is displayed when this operation is repeated ...

Page 761: ... 0030 07 Title Failure in communication of FAX board Description Error in checksum of USB FAX MAINROM Remedy Get in the download mode from the Service Mode when the power is turned ON and execute downloading of USBFAX MAINROM E674 0100 07 Title Failure in communication of FAX board Description Logging was failed after completion of fax communication Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the power The logs c...

Page 762: ...heck the connector connected to the Finisher E713 0022 05 Title Error in UFDI communication Description Undefined error for specified times in a row at reception Remedy Check the connector connected to the Finisher E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E719 0001 00 Title Error in Coin Vendor Description Error in starting of the CoinVendor The Coin Vendor which should have been conn...

Page 763: ...Card Reader was successful at start up Remedy Check if the cable of the serial New Card Reader is disconnected E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E720 0001 00 Title Error due to non compatible Finisher Description Non compatible Finisher was connected Remedy Connect either the Staple Finisher J1 or Saddle Stitch Finisher J1 E730 1001 00 Title Error in PDL software Description In...

Page 764: ...CB PCB1 J109 Unit of replacement CABLE INTERFACE Harnesses from the Relay PCB to the Reader Controller PCB 1 Relay PCB UN5 J426 to Relay Connector 6P Unit of replacement CABLE DC POWER SUPPLY 2 Relay Connector 6P to Reader Controller PCB PCB1 J101 Unit of replacement CABLE READER POWER SUPPLY Main Controller PCB 2 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS Y 2 Reader Controller PCB PCB1 Unit of r...

Page 765: ...RSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E732 0022 00 Title Scanner communication error Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 2 was detected at startup recovery from sleep Remedy Related parts Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 J3003 and the Reader Controller PC...

Page 766: ...tems Description E732 0F01 00 Title Scanner communication error Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot An error not displayed on LUI but recorded in the error log If it is detected again after reboot E732 0001 is generated Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted E732 0F20 00 Title Scanner communication error Description ...

Page 767: ...Sublog and contact to the sales company because of the possibility of sequence error Reference If the cause of the error cannot be identified by analyzing Sublog it may require investigation separately Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCT...

Page 768: ...U FRPPXQLFDWLRQ HUURU HVFULSWLRQ RPPXQLFDWLRQ HUURU WKDW FDQ EH UHFRYHUHG E UHERRW Q HUURU QRW GLVSOD HG RQ 8 EXW UHFRUGHG LQ WKH HUURU ORJ I LW LV GHWHFWHG DJDLQ DIWHU UHERRW LV JHQHUDWHG 5HPHG W LV QRW QHFHVVDU WR SHUIRUP D UHPHG EHFDXVH WKH PDFKLQH LV DXWRPDWLFDOO UHERRWHG FRGH HWDLOHG FRGH 2FFXUDQFH DUHD WHPV HVFULSWLRQ 7LWOH 3ULQWHU FRPPXQLFDWLRQ HUURU HVFULSWLRQ RPPXQLFDWLRQ HUURU WKDW FDQ E...

Page 769: ...n Because both the voice composition board and the composition recognition board are inserted Remedy Insert only 1 board of the appropriate voice board E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E746 0021 00 Title Image Analysis Board error Description Self check NG of Image Analysis Board PCB used for PCAM Remedy 1 Replace the Image Analysis Board PCB used for PCAM 2 Remove the Image A...

Page 770: ...rror in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 2 Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board E747 001E 00 Title Erro...

Page 771: ...ass PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E747 031B 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact...

Page 772: ...ass PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E747 061B 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact...

Page 773: ...ass PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E747 0919 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact...

Page 774: ...ass PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E747 0B1B 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact...

Page 775: ... if printing the data with which the error was displayed 2 Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E747 1202 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 2 Replace the Bypass PCB or...

Page 776: ...ass PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E747 2018 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact...

Page 777: ...ass PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E747 221D 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact...

Page 778: ...HDD replace the new encryption board E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E747 620E 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 2 Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB...

Page 779: ...ass PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E747 651B 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact...

Page 780: ...ass PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E747 651D 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact...

Page 781: ...ass PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E747 741F 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact...

Page 782: ...HDD replace the new encryption board E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E747 8517 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 2 Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB...

Page 783: ... at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E747 951B 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB Check contact of SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 2 Replace...

Page 784: ...troller PCB2 2 Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I F PCB 3 Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB2 5 Replace the HDD replace the new encryption board E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E747 C701 00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1 Check contact of ScanI F cable Check contact of the Bypass PCB...

Page 785: ...n install the DDR2 SDRAM 2 Check power state of Main Controller PCB 2 and check around the connector 3 Check power state of the Riser PCB and check around the connector 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 5 Replace the Riser PCB 6 Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 E748 2025 00 Title Error in access of Main Controller PCB 2 Description Disconnection of the Bypass PCB was detected Remedy Remove and ...

Page 786: ...er PCB UN2 4 Replace the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 FM2 E code Detailed code Occurance area Items Description E805 0001 05 Title Error in Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 Description 1 After the power of the Host Machine has been turned ON rotation of the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 FM1 was detected before turning ON the fan 2 There is no rotation signal while the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 FM1 is rotating R...

Page 787: ...nsor PS32 to see if the harness is caught disconnected or physically removed 2 Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB UN2 3 Replace the Shutter Motor the Shutter HP Sensor or the Shutter Position Sensor E880 0001 00 Title Error in Controller Fan Description Fan lock of the Controller CPU cooling fan was detected Remedy Check if the connector is connected If the connection was found OK replace the Cont...

Page 788: ...ct log and contact to the sales companies To cancel the setting select COPIER OPTION FNC SW JM ERR R and set JM ERR R to 0 E996 0CA1 05 Title Frequent error avoidance jam PRINTER Description Error avoidance jam PRINTER Remedy Make 000CA1 jam to be displayed as an error by setting JM ERR D in service mode Collect log and contact to the sales companies To cancel the setting select COPIER OPTION FNC ...

Page 789: ...ilure of a drive roller Power on A power on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power on Remaining paper in the machine Soiling on the target sensor Failure of the target sensor Foreign matter on the target sensor paper dust paper lint Type Overview of detection Check items in arbitrary order Error avoidance An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine excluding parts failu...

Page 790: ...C5255 C5250 C5240 C5235 Error Jam Alarm Jam Code image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255 C5250 C5240 C5235 image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255 C5250 C5240 C5235 PS39 PS42 PS40 PS57 PS20 PS41 PS37 PS34 PS38 PS18 PS33 UN51 UN53 PS55 PS56 PS19 PS43 F 7 2 PS8 PS9 PS1 PS2 PS6D F 7 3 F 7 4 ...

Page 791: ... PS41 P009 12 1 paper 00 0109 Delay Second delivery sensor PS42 P005 13 1 paper 00 0209 Stationary Second delivery sensor PS42 P005 13 1 paper 00 0A09 Power on Second delivery sensor PS42 P005 13 1 paper ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID I O Address bit Remarks 00 010A Delay Reverse sensor PS39 P005 14 1 paper 00 020A Stationary Reverse sensor PS39 P005 14 1 paper 00 0A0A Power on Reverse...

Page 792: ...order Remaining paper near the Fixing Inlet Sensor PS34 Fixing Inlet Sensor PS34 Fixing Roller Fixing Motor M21 00 0A06 Power on Fixing inlet sensor PS34 P013 3 1 paper Overview of detection This jam occurs when the Fixing Inlet Sensor PS34 detected ON state at power on Check items in arbitrary order Remaining paper near the Fixing Inlet Sensor PS34 Check of the Fixing Inlet Sensor PS34 If a jam o...

Page 793: ...onary Inner delivery sensor PS37 P009 4 1 paper 00 0A07 Power on Inner delivery sensor PS37 P009 4 1 paper Inner Delivery Sensor PS37 PS37 T 7 14 F 7 7 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID I O Address bit Remarks 00 0B00 Door open Right door sensor PS20 P009 5 0 DOOR_ OPEN 00 0108 Delay First delivery sensor PS41 P009 12 1 paper 00 0208 Stationary First delivery sensor PS41 P009 12 1 paper 0...

Page 794: ...rview of detection This jam occurs when the Reverse Sensor PS39 detected ON state at power on Check items in arbitrary order Remaining paper near the Reverse Sensor PS39 Check of the Reverse Sensor PS39 Second Delivery Sensor PS42 Reverse Sensor PS39 Third Delivery Sensor PS43 Duplex Inlet Sensor PS40 Pre reverse Sensor PS57 PS42 PS39 PS43 PS57 PS40 T 7 16 F 7 9 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Se...

Page 795: ...2 Power on Cassette 2 pre registration sensor PS56 P013 8 1 paper PS55 PS56 Cassette 1 Pre registration Sensor PS55 Cassette 2 Pre registration Sensor PS56 T 7 18 F 7 11 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID I O Address bit Remarks 00 0105 Delay Registration sensor PS33 P009 9 1 paper 00 0205 Stationary Registration sensor PS33 P009 9 1 paper 00 0A05 Power on Registration sensor PS33 P009 9 1...

Page 796: ...PS2 P030 2 1 paper 00 0A12 Power on Buffer pass exit sensor PS2 P030 2 1 paper PS1 PS2 Buffer Path Inlet Sensor PS1 Buffer Path Outlet Sensor PS2 T 7 20 F 7 13 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID I O Address bit Remarks 00 0103 Delay Cassette 3 pre registration sensor PS8 P017 12 1 paper 00 0203 Stationary Cassette 3 pre registration sensor PS8 P017 12 1 paper 00 0A03 Power on Cassette 3 pr...

Page 797: ...ensor PS6D P029 3 1 paper Deck Pickup Sensor PS6D PS6D T 7 22 F 7 15 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID I O Address bit Remarks 00 0B00 Door open Front door sensor PS18 P009 10 0 DOOR_ OPEN Right lower door sensor PS19 P014 11 0 DOOR_ OPEN Right door sensor PS20 P009 5 0 DOOR_ OPEN PS19 PS20 PS18 Front Door Sensor PS18 Right Door Sensor PS20 Right Lower Door Sensor PS19 ACC ID Jam Code Typ...

Page 798: ...PS13 01 0004 Stationary Delivery sensor PS13 01 0044 Stationary Delivery sensor 2nd sheet PS13 01 0005 delay Registration sensor PS2 01 0045 delay Registration sensor 2nd sheet PS2 01 0006 Stationary Registration sensor PS2 01 0046 Stationary Registration sensor 2nd sheet PS2 01 0007 delay Read sensor 1 PS3 01 0047 delay Read sensor 1 2nd sheet PS3 01 0008 Stationary Read sensor 1 PS3 01 0048 Stat...

Page 799: ...reversal sensor SR3 01 0054 Stationary Delivery reversal sensor 2nd sheet SR3 01 0090 Door open 01 0091 Door open 01 0092 Door open Cover open closed sensor SR6 01 0093 Door open Cover open closed sensor SR6 01 0094 Power ON 01 0095 Pickup Error 01 0096 Limited function 3 01 0071 Sequence Error 2 01 0073 Error 1 Release motor HP sensor SR11 1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door ...

Page 800: ...I1 PI17 PI18 PI19 PI20 PI22 02 1001 Delay jam Inlet sensor PI103 02 1101 Stationary jam Inlet sensor PI103 02 1301 POWER ON Inlet sensor PI103 02 1004 Delay jam Feed path sensor PI104 02 1104 Stationary jam Feed path sensor PI104 02 1304 POWER ON Feed path sensor PI104 02 1FA2 stationary jam Delivery sensor Vertical path sensor PI11 PI17 02 1F91 Delay jam No 1 paper sensor PI18 02 1FA1 Stationary ...

Page 801: ...release stopper HP sensor S5 02 1C40 Sensor error stack tray clock sensor S14 02 1C42 Sensor error Additional tray clock sensor S23 02 1001 Delay jam Entrance sensor S1 02 1101 Stationary jam Entrance sensor S1 02 1701 Early jam Entrance sensor S1 02 1102 Stationary jam Processing tray sensor S6 02 1300 POWER ON Entrance sensor Processing tray sensor S1 S6 02 1F00 Early jam Entrance sensor S1 02 1...

Page 802: ...n service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW 10 0017 Toner Y prior delivery alarm Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 10 0018 Toner M prior delivery alarm 10 0019 Toner C prior delivery alarm 10 0020 Toner Bk prior delivery alarm 10 0022 Patch detection light intensity abnormal change alarm 10 0100 Toner bottle change notification alarm 11 0001 Waste toner alarm De...

Page 803: ...ty is insufficient at LED lighting 61 0001 No staple process tray assembly Operation User message is displayed on controller of main unit Printing operation is suspended when operating staple job during a print job Recovery method Replenish with staples 62 0001 No staple saddle assembly Operation Print operation is suspended after user message is displayed on controller of main unit Printing opera...

Page 804: ...Alarm Code Description Details 75 B111 For R D 75 B112 For R D 75 B113 For R D 75 B114 For R D 75 B115 For R D 75 B116 For R D 75 B117 For R D 75 B118 For R D 75 B119 For R D 75 B11A For R D 75 B11B For R D 75 B11C For R D 75 B11D For R D 75 B11E For R D 75 B11F For R D 75 B120 For R D 76 0001 For R D 76 0002 Font Insufficient work area Work area of the font that is downloaded at Resource Download...

Page 805: ... D 83 0011 For R D 83 0012 For R D 83 0013 PDF font error Chenge the acrobat settings 83 0014 For R D 83 0015 PDF data decoding error Check the password and the authentication settings 83 0016 PDF print range error Specify the print range again that can be printed 83 0017 For R D 83 0018 PDF analysis error Acrobat Optimization of the PDF 84 0001 For R D 84 0002 For R D 84 0003 XPS print range erro...

Page 806: ... D 85 0612 For R D 85 0613 For R D 85 0614 For R D 85 0615 For R D 85 0701 For R D 85 0702 For R D 85 0703 For R D 85 0704 For R D 85 0705 For R D Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 85 0711 For R D 85 0712 For R D 85 0713 For R D 85 0714 For R D 85 0715 For R D 85 0801 For R D 85 0802 For R D 85 0803 For R D 85 0804 For R D 85 0805 For R D 85 0811 For R D 85 0812 For R D 85 0813 Fo...

Page 807: ... D 85 0F05 For R D 85 0F11 For R D 85 0F12 For R D 85 0F13 For R D 85 0F14 For R D 85 0F15 For R D 85 1001 For R D 85 1002 For R D 85 1003 For R D Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 85 1004 For R D 85 1005 For R D 85 1011 For R D 85 1012 For R D 85 1013 For R D 85 1014 For R D 85 1015 For R D 85 1101 For R D 85 1102 For R D 85 1103 For R D 85 1104 For R D 85 1105 For R D 85 1111 Fo...

Page 808: ... D 85 1803 For R D 85 1804 For R D 85 1805 For R D 85 1811 For R D 85 1812 For R D 85 1813 For R D 85 1814 For R D 85 1815 For R D 85 1901 For R D Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 85 1902 For R D 85 1903 For R D 85 1904 For R D 85 1905 For R D 85 1911 For R D 85 1912 For R D 85 1913 For R D 85 1914 For R D 85 1915 For R D 85 1A01 For R D 85 1A02 For R D 85 1A03 For R D 85 1A04 Fo...

Page 809: ... D 85 2101 For R D 85 2102 For R D 85 2103 For R D 85 2104 For R D 85 2105 For R D 85 2111 For R D 85 2112 For R D 85 2113 For R D 85 2114 For R D Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 85 2115 For R D 85 2201 For R D 85 2202 For R D 85 2203 For R D 85 2204 For R D 85 2205 For R D 85 2211 For R D 85 2212 For R D 85 2213 For R D 85 2214 For R D 85 2215 For R D 85 2301 For R D 85 2302 Fo...

Page 810: ... D 85 2914 For R D 85 2915 For R D 85 2A01 For R D 85 2A02 For R D 85 2A03 For R D 85 2A04 For R D 85 2A05 For R D 85 2A11 For R D 85 2A12 For R D Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 85 2A13 For R D 85 2A14 For R D 85 2A15 For R D 85 2B01 For R D 85 2B02 For R D 85 2B03 For R D 85 2B04 For R D 85 2B05 For R D 85 2B11 For R D 85 2B12 For R D 85 2B13 For R D 85 2B14 For R D 85 2B15 Fo...

Page 811: ... D 85 3212 For R D 85 3213 For R D 85 3214 For R D 85 3215 For R D 85 3301 For R D 85 3302 For R D 85 3303 For R D 85 3304 For R D 85 3305 For R D Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 85 3311 For R D 85 3312 For R D 85 3313 For R D 85 3314 For R D 85 3315 For R D 85 3401 For R D 85 3402 For R D 85 3403 For R D 85 3404 For R D 85 3405 For R D 85 3411 For R D 85 3412 For R D 85 3413 Fo...

Page 812: ... D 85 3B05 For R D 85 3B11 For R D 85 3B12 For R D 85 3B13 For R D 85 3B14 For R D 85 3B15 For R D 85 3C01 For R D 85 3C02 For R D 85 3C03 For R D Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 85 3C04 For R D 85 3C05 For R D 85 3C11 For R D 85 3C12 For R D 85 3C13 For R D 85 3C14 For R D 85 3C15 For R D 85 3D01 For R D 85 3D02 For R D 85 3D03 For R D 85 3D04 For R D 85 3D05 For R D 85 3D11 Fo...

Page 813: ... D 85 4403 For R D 85 4404 For R D 85 4405 For R D 85 4411 For R D 85 4412 For R D 85 4413 For R D 85 4414 For R D 85 4415 For R D 85 4501 For R D Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 85 4502 For R D 85 4503 For R D 85 4504 For R D 85 4505 For R D 85 4511 For R D 85 4512 For R D 85 4513 For R D 85 4514 For R D 85 4515 For R D 85 4601 For R D 85 4602 For R D 85 4603 For R D 85 4604 Fo...

Page 814: ... D 85 4D01 For R D 85 4D02 For R D 85 4D03 For R D 85 4D04 For R D 85 4D05 For R D 85 4D11 For R D 85 4D12 For R D 85 4D13 For R D 85 4D14 For R D Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 85 4D15 For R D 85 4E01 For R D 85 4E02 For R D 85 4E03 For R D 85 4E04 For R D 85 4E05 For R D 85 4E11 For R D 85 4E12 For R D 85 4E13 For R D 85 4E14 For R D 85 4E15 For R D 85 4F01 For R D 85 4F02 Fo...

Page 815: ... D 85 5514 For R D 85 5515 For R D 85 5601 For R D 85 5602 For R D 85 5603 For R D 85 5604 For R D 85 5605 For R D 85 5611 For R D 85 5612 For R D Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 85 5613 For R D 85 5614 For R D 85 5615 For R D 85 5701 For R D 85 5702 For R D 85 5703 For R D 85 5704 For R D 85 5705 For R D 85 5711 For R D 85 5712 For R D 85 5713 For R D 85 5714 For R D 85 5715 Fo...

Page 816: ... D 85 5E12 For R D 85 5E13 For R D 85 5E14 For R D 85 5E15 For R D 85 5F01 For R D 85 5F02 For R D 85 5F03 For R D 85 5F04 For R D 85 5F05 For R D Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 85 5F11 For R D 85 5F12 For R D 85 5F13 For R D 85 5F14 For R D 85 5F15 For R D 85 6001 For R D 85 6002 For R D 85 6003 For R D 85 6004 For R D 85 6005 For R D 85 6011 For R D 85 6012 For R D 85 6013 Fo...

Page 817: ... D 85 6705 For R D 85 6711 For R D 85 6712 For R D 85 6713 For R D 85 6714 For R D 85 6715 For R D 85 6801 For R D 85 6802 For R D 85 6803 For R D Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 85 6804 For R D 85 6805 For R D 85 6811 For R D 85 6812 For R D 85 6813 For R D 85 6814 For R D 85 6815 For R D 85 6901 For R D 85 6902 For R D 85 6903 For R D 85 6904 For R D 85 6905 For R D 85 6911 Fo...

Page 818: ... D 85 7003 For R D 85 7004 For R D 85 7005 For R D 85 7011 For R D 85 7012 For R D 85 7013 For R D 85 7014 For R D 85 7015 For R D 85 7101 For R D Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 85 7102 For R D 85 7103 For R D 85 7104 For R D 85 7105 For R D 85 7111 For R D 85 7112 For R D 85 7113 For R D 85 7114 For R D 85 7115 For R D 85 7201 For R D 85 7202 For R D 85 7203 For R D 85 7204 Fo...

Page 819: ... D 85 7901 For R D 85 7902 For R D 85 7903 For R D 85 7904 For R D 85 7905 For R D 85 7911 For R D 85 7912 For R D 85 7913 For R D 85 7914 For R D Location of Trouble Alarm Code Description Details 85 7915 For R D 85 7A01 For R D 85 7A02 For R D 85 7A03 For R D 85 7A04 For R D 85 7A05 For R D 85 7A11 For R D 85 7A12 For R D 85 7A13 For R D 85 7A14 For R D 85 7A15 For R D 85 7B01 For R D 85 7B02 Fo...

Page 820: ...e Alarm Code Description Details 85 7E04 For R D 85 7E05 For R D 85 7E11 For R D 85 7E12 For R D 85 7E13 For R D 85 7E14 For R D 85 7E15 For R D 85 7F01 For R D 85 7F02 For R D 85 7F03 For R D 85 7F04 For R D 85 7F05 For R D 85 7F11 For R D 85 7F12 For R D 85 7F13 For R D 85 7F14 For R D 85 7F15 For R D T 7 29 ...

Page 821: ...8 8 Service Mode Service Mode Overview COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD ...

Page 822: ... a setting value needs to be input on clearing RAM when replacing the PCB Clearly indicated in the use case The case when instructed by the service office due to reasons as having the large negative effects difficult settings etc The case of performing the individual measure due to the tender business etc Do not use in cases that are not mentioned above Service Mode Menu TOP Screen MODELIST A bran...

Page 823: ... S languages Service mode contents like system software can be upgraded by SST F 8 2 I O information enhancement On the COPIER I O the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used sensor motor fan etc makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part And the screen will also display the input output signal 1 Press the button Which button to press will depend on which electri...

Page 824: ...cument size detection dirt detection level Display switching display timing DSPLY SW UI User Interface display related Image related fixing IMG FIX Fixing related Image related transfer IMG TR Primary transfer secondary transfer ITB Image related developing IMG DEV Developer related Image related laser latent image IMG LSR Laser latent image related Image related reader ADF IMG RDR Reader ADF imag...

Page 825: ... Password for service engineer for transition to service mode Setting range To reinforce the security change the password from a default eight digit numeral default 11111111 After the above setting to enter Service Mode enter password screen will appear 1 Additional Functions System Settings System Manager Settings enter System Manager ID enter System Password Settings press OK button System Manag...

Page 826: ... the Service Mode can be switched by performing the below languange switch operation in User Mode The explanatory text can be displayed by installing the Service Mode Content SCMNT in HDD Service Mode Content SCMNT can be installed and upgraded on SST Settings Registration Prefernces Display Settings Language Keyboard Switch MEMO If the Service Mode Content SMCNT of the concerned language is not i...

Page 827: ...orted Service mode level 1 COPIER FUNCTION MISC P RPT FILE OK The created data file is saved in the HDD of the machine The created saved data is deleted when it is moved to the SST or a USB memory device Even if the machine has stopped operation due to a no paper error data can be moved to the SST or the USB memory device as long as the machine can enter download mode NOTE While an error is occurr...

Page 828: ...d from the machine to the USB memory device operation 1 Enter download mode 2 Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port 3 Press the control panel keys 5 0 download Menu USB 1 Upgrade Auto 2 Upgrade w Confirmation 3 Upgrade Overwrite all 4 Format HDD 5 Backup 7 Clear downloaded files 8 download Menu 2 9 Other Menu Reset Shutdown 5 has been selected Execute OK 0 CANCEL Any other keys F 8...

Page 829: ...How to Move Service Print Files to a PC using the SST Introduce it in SST Ver 4 72 1 Start up the SST 2 Select the model 1 and the type of system software 2 Single then check the network settings and click START 1 2 iA4245 7 3 Click Upload Data iA4245 iA4245 iA4245 7 F 8 13 F 8 14 4 Select Report and click Start 7 iA4245 5 Select the name of the Folder to store and as necessary a brief description...

Page 830: ...splay the firmware version of Main Controller PCB Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 RUI Display of remote UI version Lv 1 Details To display the version of remote UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 PUNCH Display of Puncher Unit version Lv 1 Details To display the version of Puncher Unit Use case When upgrading the fi...

Page 831: ...n language file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Slovenian language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION LANG SV Display of Swedish language file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG TW Dis of Chinese language file...

Page 832: ... version Lv 1 Details To display the version of French voice dictionary is displayed when no file is found Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION TTS ES Dis of Spanish voice dictionary version Lv 1 Details To display the version of Spanish voice dictionary is displayed when no file is found Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj s...

Page 833: ...ion Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION MEDIA EL Dis of Greek media information version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Greek media information Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA ES Dis of Spanish media information version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Spanish media information...

Page 834: ... BIOS version Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SYSTEM Dis of Linux kernel tool driver file ver Lv 1 Details To display the version of Linux kernel tool driver file Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 00 01 to 99 99 00 01 to 99 99 00 01 to 99 99 ROOT Display of ROOT version Lv 1 Details To display ...

Page 835: ...e When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION COPY ZH Dis COPY appli Chinese file ver smpl Lv 2 Details To display the simplified Chinese language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY TW Dis of COPY appli Chinese file ver trad Lv 2 Details To display the traditional Chines...

Page 836: ...s To display the Bulgarian language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION COPY CR Dis of COPY appli Croatian file version Lv 2 Details To display the Croatian language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY RM Dis of CO...

Page 837: ...o display the Estonian language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SEND FI Dis of SEND appli Finnish file version Lv 2 Details To display the Finnish language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND HU Dis of SEND app...

Page 838: ...adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION INTRO FR Dis of useful func intro French file ver Lv 1 Details To display the version of French language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO IT Dis useful func intro Italian file ver Lv 1 Details To display the version of Italian language file of Intro...

Page 839: ...Russian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION INTRO SL Dis useful func intro Slovenian file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Slovenian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 ...

Page 840: ...n file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Korean language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION CSTMN CS Dis of custom menu Czech file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Czech language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 t...

Page 841: ...ay the version of Slovak language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION CSTMN TK Dis of custom menu Turkish file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Turkish language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN CA Dis of custom m...

Page 842: ...ay the version of Dutch language file for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ACSBT NO Dis of accessibility Norwegian file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT PL Dis of acc...

Page 843: ...ation Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ERS ES Display of ERS Spanish file version Lv 1 Details To display the version of Spanish language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 ERS ZH Display of ERS Chinese file ver smpl Lv 2 Details To display the version of simplified Chine...

Page 844: ... Details To display the version of Croatian language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ERS RM Display of ERS Romanian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 ERS SK Display of ERS Slo...

Page 845: ...ls To display the version of Dutch language file for UAC application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION NLS NO Display of UAC Norwegian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for UAC application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 NLS PL Display of UAC Polish fil...

Page 846: ...ai language file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Thai language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION LANG VN Display of Vietnamese language file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX FR Display of BOX appli French...

Page 847: ...y the version of Portuguese language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION BOX RU Dis of BOX appli Russian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Russian language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX SL Dis of BOX appli S...

Page 848: ...rtal version Lv 2 Details To display the RUI portal version Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 00 to 99 99 RPTL EL Display of RUI portal version Lv 2 Details To display the RUI portal version Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 00 to 99 99 RPTL ET Display of RUI portal version Lv 2 Details To display the RUI portal version Use case When upgradin...

Page 849: ...M Display of RUI portal version Lv 2 Details To display the RUI portal version Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 00 to 99 99 RPTL SK Display of RUI portal version Lv 2 Details To display the RUI portal version Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 00 to 99 99 RPTL TK Display of RUI portal version Lv 2 Details To display the RUI portal version Use...

Page 850: ...d option Lv 1 Details To display the connecting state of Finisher related options Use case When checking the connection of Finisher related options Display adj set range Left column connecting state of Finisher related options 1 to 5 1 Without Saddle 2 With Saddle without Folding Unit 3 With Saddle and Inserter without Folding Unit 4 With Saddle and Folding Unit without Inserter 5 With Saddle Inse...

Page 851: ... Display adj set range Character string PCI1 Display of PCI1 connected PCB name Lv 1 Details To display the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI1 Use case When checking the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI1 Display adj set range No PCB connected Voice Board Voice PCB 3DES Board Encryption PCB 1Gbit Board Giga Ethernet PCB PCI2 Display of PCI2 connected PCB name Lv 1 Details To display ...

Page 852: ...ecking the temperature of Fixing Film Display adj set range 0 to 300 Unit deg C FIX E Dis of Fixing Heater center temperature Lv 1 Details To display the center temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Main Thermistor 1 Use case When checking the temperature at the center of Fixing Heater Display adj set range 0 to 300 Unit deg C FIX E2 Dis of Fixing Heater front edge temp Lv 1 Details To ...

Page 853: ...mary transfer current M Lv 2 Details To display the decuple value of the current flown to the Primary Transfer Roller M by the primary transfer ATVC control When the two values are out of the target value range 50 to 700 clear the log information for the appropriate control COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR 1TR CLR If the two values are both small the Primary Transfer Roller may have reached the end of life U...

Page 854: ...0 to 700 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR 2TR CLR THCK Y Display of Y Drum abrasion level Lv 1 Details To display the Y Photosensitive Drum abrasion level calculated from the drum film thickness detection results The drum film thickness detection results are reflected to the controls of charging development and transfer Use case When checking the validity of the setting values for transf...

Page 855: ...Controller PCB When the value is out of the target value range image failure or E302 shading error may have occurred Identify the cause according to the value Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB At scanned image failure Display adj set range 0 to 143 Appropriate target value 0 to 143 COPIER DISPLAY CCD GAIN OG Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit G frt Lv 2 Details To display the Green g...

Page 856: ...nge 55 to 275 Appropriate target value 100 to 275 COPIER DISPLAY CCD LAMP2 CL Scan Lamp intensity adj VL color back Lv 2 Details To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit paper back in color scanning mode Use case When image failure occurs at back side scanning in color mode Display adj set range 55 to 275 Appropriate target value 100 to 275 OFST BW Img Sensor offset valu...

Page 857: ... Unit Reader Controller PCB Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB At scanned image failure Display adj set range 0 to 143 Appropriate target value 0 to 143 COPIER DISPLAY CCD GAIN2 OB Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit B bck Lv 2 Details To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit paper back Continuous display of upper limit is consi...

Page 858: ... When transfer failure occurs due to the primary transfer Display adj set range 0 to 3000 Unit V Appropriate target value 300 to 4000 COPIER DISPLAY DPOT CHG AC Y Display of primary charging AC bias Y Lv 2 Details To display the primary charging AC bias lastly applied to the Primary Charging Roller Y Use case When an image failure occurs due to charging failure Display adj set range 0 to 3000 Unit...

Page 859: ... potntl C Lv 2 Details To display the target C patch contrast potential Check the target patch contrast potential to check whether the toner supply control is properly executed at image density failure Investigate the other possible factors if the value is within the defined range Use case When analyzing the cause of the image density failure When analyzing the cause of a problem Display adj set r...

Page 860: ...GAIN C LPGAIN M Dis of M color laser power gain value Lv 2 Details To display gain value of M laser power by D max control Use case When checking D max control results Display adj set range 100 to 100 Unit Appropriate target value 0 Related service mode COPIER DISPLAY DPOT LPGAIN Y LPGAIN C LPGAIN C Dis of C color laser power gain value Lv 2 Details To display gain value of C laser power by D max ...

Page 861: ...service mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS SGNL C COPIER DISPLAY DENS DENS K Dis of Bk developer density change ratio Lv 1 Details To display difference between Bk color developer density and the target value in percentage Intolerable difference will trigger E020 This may be caused by deterioration of the developer failure disconnection of the ATR Sensor or error in toner supply system The value is updated ...

Page 862: ...ower on Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem Display adj set range 0 to 255 Appropriate target value 20 to 230 Related service mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS DENS M COPIER DISPLAY DENS SGNL C Display of C color developer density Lv 1 Details To display the measured value of C color developer density The density is measured with the ATR Sensor C for each job The value is updated upon print oper...

Page 863: ...mage target density created by ATR control Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem Display adj set range 340 to 640 Appropriate target value 340 to 640 COPIER DISPLAY DENS D CRNT P Dis of ATR ctrl dark current P wave Lv 2 Details To display the dark current value P wave measured at ATR control Use case When checking the Patch Sensor Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value l...

Page 864: ...ystem This is particularly caused by Patch Sensor Use case When analyzing the cause of E020 Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value 200 to 900 COPIER DISPLAY DENS DS S K H Dis Bk clr patch image density history Lv 2 Details To display the latest 8 Bk patch image density log data It is the reference for judging the cause at E020 occurrence etc Sharp change in values may indicate th...

Page 865: ...the Y laser intensity in real time Use case When analyzing the cause of the image density failure Display adj set range 00 to FF Appropriate target value 50 to FF LPOWER M Display of laser light intensity M Lv 2 Details To display the M laser intensity in real time Use case When analyzing the cause of the image density failure Display adj set range 00 to FF Appropriate target value 50 to FF LPOWER...

Page 866: ...e Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value 0 to 700 COPIER DISPLAY HT C TGT B M Dis of ARCDAT screen B M color target VL Lv 2 Details To display the M patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjus...

Page 867: ...t value Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C SUM A K Dis ARCDAT screen A Bk color ctrl differ Lv 2 Details To display Bk patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation ad...

Page 868: ...n is not in the tolerable range check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 0 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGNL A C Dis ARCDAT screen A C patch current VL Lv 2 Details To display the current C patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range check the Patch Sensor or rep...

Page 869: ...on adjustment reset the target value Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLTA A K Dis of ARCDAT screen A Bk density differ Lv 2 Details To display the difference between the Bk patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and th...

Page 870: ... 1023 to 1023 TGT A Y2 ARCDAT scrn A Y color target VL 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the Y patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed Use case When checking ARCDAT control operation Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value 0 to 700 COPIER DISPLAY HT C TGT A M2 ARCDAT scrn A M color target VL 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the M patch target value of screen A i...

Page 871: ...RCDAT control at 1 2 speed Use case When checking ARCDAT control operation Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value 0 to 700 COPIER DISPLAY HT C TGT B K2 ARCDAT scrn B Bk clr target VL 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the Bk patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed Use case When checking ARCDAT control operation Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target...

Page 872: ...UM A K2 ARCDAT scrnA Bk clr ctrl differ 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display Bk patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set ran...

Page 873: ...ue variation occurs Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLT A M2 ARCDAT scrn A M density differ 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the difference between the M patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Che...

Page 874: ...s not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLT C K2 ARCDAT scrn C Bk density differ 1 2 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the difference between Bk patch target value and the current value of screen C in...

Page 875: ... not in the tolerable range check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 0 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGL C K2 ARCDAT scrnC Bk patch current VL 1 2SPD Lv 2 Details To display the current Bk patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1 2 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range check the Patch Se...

Page 876: ...developer if not alleviated Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C SUM C M3 ARCDAT scrnC M clr ctrl differ 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display M patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Che...

Page 877: ...lue Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not alleviated Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 1023 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C DLT B K3 ARCDAT scrn B Bk density differ 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the difference between the Bk patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not ...

Page 878: ...n the tolerable range check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 0 to 1023 COPIER DISPLAY HT C SGL B C3 ARCDAT scrnB C patch current VL 1 3 SPD Lv 2 Details To display the current C patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1 3 speed When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the tolerable range check the Patch Sensor or...

Page 879: ...ry flapper solenoid SL5 1 ON 1 Second delivery flapper solenoid SL6 1 ON 0 Multi purpose tray lifting solenoid SL4 1 ON P006 15 Third delivery flapper solenoid SL7 1 ON 14 13 12 Fixing motor M21 0 ON 11 10 9 8 Patch sensor front UN47 1 LED_ON 7 6 5 Patch sensor rear UN48 1 LED_ON 4 Patch sensor center UN49 1 LED_ON 3 2 1 0 Fixing heat exhaust fan 1 2 FM1 2 1 ON Address bit Name Mark Remarks P007 1...

Page 880: ...1 1 LED_ON 10 9 8 Waste toner stirring motor M26 1 ON 7 C pre exposure LED PCB front rear UN27 28 1 ON 6 M pre exposure LED PCB front rear UN25 26 1 ON 5 Multi purpose tray pickup clutch CL1 1 ON 4 3 Reverse roller motor M24 1 enable 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P011 15 First Second delivery motor M23 1 enable 14 13 12 11 Registration motor M19 1 enable 10 9 8 7 Multi purpose motor M18 1 en...

Page 881: ...9 8 Laser shutter sensor PS29 1 lightproof 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Cassette 1 pickup motor M16 1 enable 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P015 15 14 13 Cassette 2 pickup motor M17 1 enable 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Process cartridge fan front FM10 1 ON 2 Process cartridge fan front FM10 1 half speed 1 Cassette 2 pickup solenoid SL3 1 ON 0 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL2 1 ON P016 15 Cassette 3 size switch SW2 0 d...

Page 882: ...sette 3 pickup solenoid SL1 1 ON P019 0 15 P020 0 15 P021 0 15 P022 0 15 P023 0 15 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P024 15 14 13 12 Toner container outer cover sensor PS17 1 close 11 Toner container inner cover sensor Bk PS16 1 close 10 Toner container inner cover sensor C PS15 1 close 9 Toner container inner cover sensor M PS14 1 close 8 Toner container inner cover sensor Y PS13 1 close 7 Toner con...

Page 883: ...fter position sensor PS4D 0 paper 9 Deck feed sensor PS1D 0 paper 8 7 Deck open sensing switch SW1D 1 OPEN 6 Deck pickup roller release solenoid SL1D 1 release 5 4 3 Deck pickup sensor PS6D 1 paper 2 Deck paper out sensor PS2D 1 nopaper 1 0 P030 8 15 7 6 5 4 3 2 Baffer path delivery sensor PS2 1 paper 1 Baffer path open close sensor PS3 1 paper 0 Baffer path entrance sensor PS1 1 paper T 8 14 Read...

Page 884: ...N v21 01 or later FEEDER Address bit Name Mark Remarks P001 7 Original size sensor 4 PCB2 0 paper 6 Original size sensor 3 PCB2 0 paper 5 Original size sensor 2 PCB2 0 paper 4 Original size sensor 1 PCB2 0 paper 3 LTR R LGL identification sensor PS8 0 LTRR 1 LGL 2 AB Inch identification sensor PS7 0 LTRR LGL STMT 1 A4R A5 1 Delivery original sensor PS11 1 paper 0 Original sensor PS10 0 paper P002 ...

Page 885: ...ark Remarks P006 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Read sensor 1 SR2 1 paper 0 Registration sensor 1 SR1 1 paper 1 Inactive when MN CON v34 41 R CON v12 01 or later FEEDER Address bit Name Mark Remarks P001 7 6 5 4 3 2 Timing sensor 1 SR4 1 paper 1 Last document detection sensor SR9 1 paper 0 A4R LTRR identification sensor SR10 1 A4R 0 LTRR P002 7 Document length sensor 2 SR8 1 paper 6 Document length sensor 1 SR7 1 ...

Page 886: ...19 Inner Finisher E1 SORTER P001 to P014 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P001 8 15 7 Entrance sensor S1 0 ON1 OFF 6 Gripper unit HP sensor S7 0 ON1 OFF 5 4 3 2 1 0 P002 8 15 7 Gripper unit move motor_CW M2 0 CW1 CCW 6 5 Paper lever drive solenoid SOL1 0 OFF1 ON 4 3 Shift motor M4 0 OFF1 ON 2 shift roller release motor M5 0 OFF1 ON 1 stopper motor M6 0 OFF1 ON 0 Gripper open close motor M7 0 OFF1 ON ...

Page 887: ...OFF P008 0 15 P009 0 15 P010 8 15 7 6 5 4 3 stack tray paper sensor S15 0 nopaper1 paper 2 1 stack tray middle sensor S16 1 mid lowlevel 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P011 8 15 7 Processing tray sensor S6 0 nopaper1 paper 6 Stapler safety switch SW2 0 OFF1 ON 5 Fan2 M9 0 OFF1 ON 4 3 Fan1 M8 0 OFF1 ON 2 1 0 P012 8 15 7 6 5 paper surface sensor2 S12 0 OFF1 ON 4 paper surface sensor1 S11 0 OFF1 ON ...

Page 888: ...nge home position sensor PI117 0 HP 5 Upper cover sensor PI101 0 CLOSE1 OPEN 4 Rear end assist guide home position sensor PI109 0 HP 3 Processing Tray sensor PI108 0 paper1 nopaper 2 Rear aligning plate home position sensor PI107 0 HP 1 Front aligning plate home position sensor PI106 0 HP 0 P013 8 15 7 Tray 2 shift motor M108 0 OFF1 ON 6 Tray 2 shift motor_CW M108 0 CW1 CCW 5 Inlet roller separati...

Page 889: ...02 0 OFF1 ON 5 Shutter clutch CL101 0 OFF1 ON 4 Stack ejection lower roller clutch CL102 0 OFF1 ON 3 Buffer rear end holding solenoid SL104 0 OFF1 ON 2 1st delivery roller separation solenoid SL103 0 OFF1 ON 1 Stapler shift motor_I1 M105 P018 1 P018 0 0 0 Low 0 1 MID 1 0 High 1 1 Max 0 Stapler shift motor_I0 M105 P019 8 15 7 6 Feed path sensor PI104 0 paper1 nopaper 5 4 3 Stitcher HP sensor rear S...

Page 890: ... Paper positioning plate home position sensor PI7 0 HP 0 Tray paper sensor PI6 0 paper1 nopaper P028 8 15 7 Paper pushing plate motor_EN M8 0 ON1 OFF 6 Paper pushing plate motor_FWM M8 0 OFF1 ON 5 Paper pushing plate motor_RV M8 0 OFF1 ON 4 Paper folding motor_FWD M2 0 OFF1 ON 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P029 8 15 7 Stitcher motor rear _CCW M6 0 ON1 OFF 6 5 4 Stitcher motor front _CW M7 ...

Page 891: ...P033 0 15 P034 8 15 7 Punch motor_CW M61 0 ON 6 Punch motor_CCW M61 0 ON 5 LED PCB Rear edge direction PCB3 0 nopaper1 paper 4 Horizontal registration HP sensor PI61 1 HP 3 2 1 0 P035 8 15 7 6 5 Side registration motor_ampere M62 0 active1 keep 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P036 8 15 7 6 5 4 3 2 Side registration motor_B M62 1 ON 1 Side registration motor_A M62 1 ON 0 P037 8 15 7 Side re...

Page 892: ... changed value in the service label Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ S Adjustment of shading position Lv 1 Details To adjust the shading position When replacing the Reader Controller PCB enter the backup value As the value is incremented by 1 the position moves by 0 1mm Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB Adj set operate method Enter the...

Page 893: ...23 CCD COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT X White level data X entry of white plate Lv 1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label When replacing the Copyboard Glass enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data When replacing the Copyboard Glass Adj set operate metho...

Page 894: ...dj set range 256 to 256 Unit line Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR R Shading target value R Front side Lv 1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB enter the value of service label When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit paper front execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 DF WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label Use case When replacing the R...

Page 895: ...K key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 80 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M5 MTF value 5 setting horz scan Front Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clea...

Page 896: ...K key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 80 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 S4 MTF value 4 setting vert scan Front Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clea...

Page 897: ... Display adj set range 256 to 256 Unit line Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2R2 Complex chart No 2 data R Front side Lv 1 Details To derive the front back side linearity set the Red data for paper front of No 2 image in DADF complex chart Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setti...

Page 898: ...cing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 80 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M3 MTF value 3 setting horz scan Back Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of se...

Page 899: ...K key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 80 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S2 MTF value 2 setting vert scan Back Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB cleari...

Page 900: ...TION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH R2 Complex chart No 2 data R Back side Lv 1 Details To derive the front back side linearity set the Red data for paper back of No 2 image in DADF complex chart Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON ...

Page 901: ...t operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 85 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M12 MTF value 12 setting horz scan Front Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing t...

Page 902: ...g value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 85 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S11 MTF value 11 setting vert scan Back Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Re...

Page 903: ...d service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL3 DF WLVL4 COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK G Shading target value G Back side Lv 1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB enter the value of service label When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit paper back execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 DF WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label Use case When replacing the ...

Page 904: ...art position of Y color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel Use case When Y color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit pixel Default value 0 REG H C Adj C color write s...

Page 905: ...tive positive by key and press OK key Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit line Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG V K Adj Bk color write start pstn vert scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the write start position of Bk color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel Use case When Bk color displacement in the vertical scanning ...

Page 906: ... the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 10 to 10 Unit Default value 0 MAG V Adj of stdrd magnifictn ratio vert scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the standard magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction by changing the speed of Photosensitive Drum ITB and Registration Roller Use case When adjusting the ...

Page 907: ...IER ADJUST DENS REF M M toner dens target VL entry Lv 1 Details To enter the target value of the ATR Sensor M of ATR control after RAM clear Use case When checking the value before RAM clear and re entering it after RAM clear Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range...

Page 908: ...lacing the DC Controller PCB Display adj set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 SGNL K Enter Bk toner dens VL initialization Lv 1 Details To enter the Bk toner density value when initializing the Patch Sensor Center Use case When checking the value before RAM clear and re entering it after RAM clear Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power swi...

Page 909: ...itive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 3 Make 50 prints of approx 10 image ratio e g COPIER TEST PG TYPE 16 4 times 4 Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment Caution Execute the auto gradation adjustment first to increase the density If you adjust the offset of the target value fogging might get worse Display adj set range 4 to 4 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUS...

Page 910: ...F ON the main power switch Display adj set range 512 to 2047 Default value 1200 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P PT LPADJ COPIER ADJUST DENS REF K Bk toner dens target VL entry Lv 2 Details To enter the target value of the ATR Sensor Bk of ATR control after RAM clear Use case When checking the value before RAM clear and re entering it after RAM clear Adj set operate method 1 Enter the s...

Page 911: ...t Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage lower limit for C in D max control Use case When a failure occurs due to limiter of D max control Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Execute quick adjustment of auto gradation adjustment Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 300 to 300 Unit V...

Page 912: ...ing separation Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 0 to 1000 Unit pixel Default value 94 BLANK L Adjustment of left edge margin Lv 1 Details To adjust the margin on the left edge of paper As the value is incremented by 1 the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel 0 0423 mm Us...

Page 913: ...rectly Display adj set range 20 to 20 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT Y VCONT M VCONT C COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT C Adj of C color contrast potential Lv 2 Details To adjust the contrast potential for C As the value is incremented by 1 the contrast potential changes by 10V Image becomes darker Image becomes lighter When the value is too large paper winds arou...

Page 914: ...rectly Display adj set range 10 to 10 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK Y VBACK C VBACK K COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK C Adj C color fogging removal potential Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for C A value obtained by adding the adjustment value in Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Color Cast to the foggin...

Page 915: ... Unit V Default value The value differs according to the environment Related service mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT PT VCT Y PT VCT C PT VCT K COPIER ADJUST V CONT PT VCT C Adj of C color target contrast potntl Lv 2 Details To adjust the C patch target contrast potential for D max PASCAL control As the value is incremented by 1 the target contrast potential changes by 1V Potential is increased Potentia...

Page 916: ... changed value in the service label Display adj set range 128 to 128 Default value According to the setting at shipment OFST P C C density adj at test print reading Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset of C color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment full adjustment When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label As the value is larger the ...

Page 917: ... to alleviate the variation of the density between machines Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 8 to 8 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ K Bk color balance adjustment Lv 1 Details To adjust the default value of the color balance for Bk when the density of Bk varies between ...

Page 918: ...ive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 32 to 32 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST K Adj Bk bright area dens color balance Lv 1 Details To adjust the bright area density and color balance of Bk As the value is larger the image gets darker Lower the value when the background cannot be read correctly because the density of a document is dark and i...

Page 919: ...OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Display adj set range 8 to 8 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD OFS M Color balance adj of M mid dens area Lv 2 Details To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M As the value is larger the image gets darker This setting is linked with Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correc...

Page 920: ... set range 8 to 8 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD OFS K Color balance adj of Bk high dens area Lv 2 Details To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk As the value is larger the image gets darker This setting is linked with Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Density Correct Shading Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode Use case Do not use this when the ma...

Page 921: ...urn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Display adj set range 8 to 8 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM OFS K Clr blnce adj of Bk mid dens area PDL Lv 2 Details To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk at PDL print As the value is larger the image gets darker Use case Do not use this when the machine is operating corr...

Page 922: ...s when the machine is operating correctly Display adj set range 10 to 10 Unit uA Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV PRI IOFSTAC Y DIS TGM Discharge crrnt ctrl M tgt crrnt 1 1SPD Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current for M upon discharging current control for plain paper at 1 1 speed Use case When an image failure sand like image occurs Adj set operate method 1 ...

Page 923: ...IS TGC2 Dischg crrnt ctrl C tgt crrnt 1 2 1 3SPD Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current for C upon discharging current control for plain paper at 1 2 and 1 3 speed Use case When an image failure sand like image occurs Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use this when th...

Page 924: ...lue is too large the life of the Photosensitive Drum becomes shorter Display adj set range 20 to 20 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV PRI DIS TGC COPIER ADJUST HV PRI OFSTAC K Adj Bk charge AC voltage 1 1 speed Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for Bk As the value is incremented by 1 the voltage value is increased by 20 Vpp Decrease the value whe...

Page 925: ...when image failure sand like image occurs Use case When image smear occurs When an image failure sand like image occurs Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Use OFSTACC2 only when image failure is not alleviated by making adjustment with DIS TGC2 In this case be sure to return...

Page 926: ...VC Bk target current 1 clr Lv 2 Details To adjust the target current for the Bk color primary transfer current Increase the value when low voltage mottled image occurs with Bk color Decrease the value when Bk color fogging occurs especially in the 94 mm portion of the image leading edge Use case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs in black mode Adj set operate method 1 Enter t...

Page 927: ...ethod Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit V Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H2 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V hvy1 2nd L hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy paper 1 in secondary transfer ATVC control at low humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the value in t...

Page 928: ...rate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit V Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H22 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V hvy1 2nd N hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy paper 1 in secondary transfer ATVC control at normal humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the ...

Page 929: ...e method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit V Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR N23 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V pln1 2nd H hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of plain paper 1 in secondary transfer ATVC control at high humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the value...

Page 930: ...t V crd 2nd H hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of postcard in secondary transfer ATVC control at high humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the value in the 30 to 30 900 to 900V range in increments of 10 30V When white dots occur on an image the image failure can be alleviated by adjusting the value in the 100 to 10 3000 to 300V range in in...

Page 931: ... operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit uA Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 1TR TGY 1TR TGM 1TR TGC COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR T1 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V thin 1st L hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of thin paper in s...

Page 932: ...the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Increase decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each time Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR N22 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR T13 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V thin 1st H hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of thin paper ...

Page 933: ...r in secondary transfer ATVC control at normal humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the value in the 30 to 30 900 to 900V range in increments of 10 30V When white dots occur on an image the image failure can be alleviated by adjusting the value in the 100 to 10 3000 to 300V range in increments of 10 30V However if the value is too small transfer failure occurs Use case When adj...

Page 934: ... 2 in secondary transfer ATVC control at normal humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the value in the 30 to 30 900 to 900V range in increments of 10 30V When white dots occur on an image the image failure can be alleviated by adjusting the value in the 100 to 10 3000 to 300V range in increments of 10 30V However if the value is too small transfer failure occurs Use case When ad...

Page 935: ...ive positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H1 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR SH2 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V hvy2 2nd L hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy paper 2 in secondary transfer ATVC control at low humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the val...

Page 936: ...n be alleviated by adjusting the value in the 100 to 10 3000 to 300V range in increments of 10 30V However if the value is too small transfer failure occurs Use case When adjusting the secondary transfer bias according to conditions Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit V Default value 0 Related service...

Page 937: ...key and press OK key Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR P23 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR SH23 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V hvy2 2nd H hmdy Lv 1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy paper 2 in secondary transfer ATVC control at high humidity When transfer failure occurs on an image adjust the value in the 30 ...

Page 938: ...setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit uA Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST HV TR 1TR TGY3 Adj Y Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt 1 3 speed Lv 2 Details To adjust the target current for the Y color primary transfer current at 1 3 speed Increase the value when low voltage mottled image occurs with Y color Decrease th...

Page 939: ...ally in the 95 mm portion of the image leading edge Use case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit uA Default value 0 T 8 32 FEED ADJ COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REGIST Adj of registration start timing Plain Lv 1 Det...

Page 940: ...s OK key Caution If the paper width is larger than 320 mm execute mechanical adjustment Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C4 Cassette 4 write start pstn in horz scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 4 Paper width is 320 mm or smaller As the value is increme...

Page 941: ... the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 55 to 55 Unit mm Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C2RE Write start pstn in horz scan Cst2 2nd Lv 1 Details To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the...

Page 942: ...stn in horz scan MP Tr 2nd Lv 1 Details To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Multi purpose Tray As the value is incremented by 1 the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0 1 mm Left margin becomes larger An image moves to the right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacin...

Page 943: ...eeding plain paper from the cassette Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ LP MULT1 MP Tray pre rgst arch amount Plain Lv 1 Details To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain paper from the Multi purpose Tray As the value is incremented by 1 ...

Page 944: ...isplay adj set range 0 to 255 Default value 0 T 8 34 MISC COPIER ADJUST MISC SEG ADJ Set criteria for text photo front side Lv 1 Details To set the judgment level of text photo original in Text Photo Map mode As the value is larger the original is more likely judged as a photo document and as the value is smaller the original is more likely judged as a text document Use case When copy image area i...

Page 945: ... patterns with 3 dots and 10 spaces which are the same as the PG above in 1200 dpi and confirm that the result is the same as the specified area Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 4 Default value 2 Related service mode COPIER TEST PG TYPE COPIER ADJUST MISC SEG ADJ3 Set criteria for text photo back side L...

Page 946: ...irst side of a document to be read in the 1 path duplex stream reading mode As the value is larger the image gets sharper If the value is too large moire is likely to occur in an output image of COPY and SEND To match the image quality with that of the second side in the 1 path duplex stream reading mode decrease the value when moire on the first side is stronger than the second side and increase ...

Page 947: ...s at the normal service Display adj set range 0 to 3 4 to 15 Not used Unit uA Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK M PR EXP C Setting of C Pre exposure LED current Lv 2 Details To set the current of the Pre exposure LED C Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost Decrease the value when potential is not applied well Use case When drum ghost is significant d...

Page 948: ...rvice mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL STIR Y STIR M STIR C STIR 4 STIR 4 Stirring of all color developer Lv 1 Details To stir developer in the Developing Assemblies of 4 colors Y M C Bk Use case At installation of the machine When an image failure occurs Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Requi...

Page 949: ... termination OK At abnormal termination NG Required time 155 sec Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET Y INISET M INISET K INISET 4 COPIER 1 FUNCTION 4 INSTALL 1 list 29 INISET M Exe of M Dev Ass y initial install mode Lv 1 Details To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the M Developing Assembly 1 Idle rotation of the Developing Assembly 2 Initializa...

Page 950: ...W PORT Set port number of Sales Co s server Lv 1 Details To set the port number of the sales company s server to be used for Embedded RDS Use case When using Embedded RDS Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Be sure to use E RDS RGW PORT COM TEST COM LOG and RGW ADR as a set Display adj set range 1 to 65535 Default value 443 Related service mode COPIER FUNCT...

Page 951: ...method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 1 to 168 1 week Unit hour Default value 24 COPIER 1 FUNCTION 4 INSTALL 1 list 29 INISET 4 All color Dev Ass y initial instal mode Lv 1 Details To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Assemblies of all colors 1 Idle rotation of the Developi...

Page 952: ...ser At operation check Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After execution turn OFF ON the main power switch After reboot be sure to check the usage status in COPIER DISPLAY USER BRWS STS Display adj set range At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL COM TEST COPIER DISPLA...

Page 953: ...0 DFCH2B10 DFCH2K10 COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC Deriving of MTF filter coefficient Lv 1 Details To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the MTF value of the DADF complex chart Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the value of the reader s service label under COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF MXX SXX MTR2 MXX SXX 2 Select th...

Page 954: ...ice mode again even if OK is displayed Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Required time 10 sec LD ADJ C Return C Skew Crrct Motor to ini pstn Lv 2 Details When C color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger than estimation the Image Skew Correction Motor C is locked and color displacement cannot be corrected even when color displacement ...

Page 955: ...it for checking Display adj set range None Required time 2 min Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION DPC DRM RSET DRMRSETY DRMRSETC DRMRSETK COPIER FUNCTION DPC DRMRSETC Forcible exe of C Drum replacement mode Lv 1 Details To execute the same operation as warm up rotation forcibly At this time laser power values etc that were corrected according to C drum counter total charging time target Vd value...

Page 956: ...a low duty and high humidity environment for a long time Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK 2TR CLN Clean of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Lv 1 Details To execute bias cleaning after transferring toner to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Soil adhered on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roll...

Page 957: ...he coordinate position on the Touch Panel of the Control Panel Use case When replacing the LCD Panel Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Press the nine keys in sequence Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK T 8 44 PART CHK COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK CL Specification of operation Clutch Lv 1 Details To specify the Clutch to oper...

Page 958: ...ion Motor M M32 3 Image Skew Correction Motor C M33 4 Image Skew Correction Motor Bk M34 5 Developing Motor Y M5 6 Developing Motor M M6 7 Developing Motor C M7 8 Developing Motor Bk M8 9 Toner Container Motor Y M9 5 10 Toner Container Motor M M10 5 11 Toner Container Motor C M11 5 12 Toner Container Motor Bk M12 5 13 Drum Motors of all colors M1 to M4 ITB Motor M13 4 14 ITB Displacement Control M...

Page 959: ... Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK DC CON RAM clear of DC Controller PCB Lv 1 Details To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB Use case When clearing RAM data of the DC Controller PCB Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key ...

Page 960: ...ion excluding Address Lists Management Settings excluding Department ID Management Use case When clearing various setting values of Settings Registration Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution The setting value is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF ON Display adj set range None COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR MN CON RAM clear...

Page 961: ...j set range At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL E RDS RGW PORT RGW ADR COM LOG COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR KEY CLR Encrypt key clear of HDD Encrypt Board Lv 2 Details To clear the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board Security Kit for replacement Processing is executed at the time of installation of the Encryption Board and a new encrypti...

Page 962: ...y image failure occurs due to secondary transfer Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range None Related service mode COPIER DISPLAY HV STS 2ATVC COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR 1TR CLR JV CACHE Cache clear of JAVA application Lv 1 Details To clear the cache information used by JAVA application Use case When initializing the JAVA application Adj set operate method Sel...

Page 963: ...d service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC R 1PSCLB A COPIER FUNCTION MISC R 1PCLBSET DADF 2 faces color differ crrct ref side Lv 1 Details To set which side of the front or back side should be the reference side when correcting a color difference at the time of duplex stream reading The correction result is reflected after executing the following operation specify the reference side execute a series of ...

Page 964: ...ved in HDD as a file HIST PRT RPT TXT Use case When printing the jam error log Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure to use A4 LTR size plain paper recycled paper TRS DATA Moving memory reception data to Inbox Lv 2 Details To move the data received in memory to Inbox Use case When moving the data received in memory to Inbox Adj set operate method Select the i...

Page 965: ...e information report Lv 1 Details To output information of the connected USB device in the form of a report Text data is saved in HDD as a file USBH PRT RPT TXT Caution Be sure to use A4 LTR size plain paper recycled paper Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK ITB INIT Initial adjustment of ITB steering Lv 1 Details To make an initial adjustment of the s...

Page 966: ...its Result at termination 00 Normally finished Others Abnormally finished Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DEBUG 1 Setting of log type and save timing Lv 2 Details To set the types of logs to be stored and the timing to store logs in the HDD Logs are used to analyze the cause of a problem Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj set operate meth...

Page 967: ...e item and then press OK key Caution During operation the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored it is overwritten with new setting data and the old data is deleted Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES RSRAMRES ...

Page 968: ...tected original size 1 ON calculated from the specified paper size Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW DH SW ON OFF of auto adjustment D half D max Lv 2 Details To set ON OFF of auto adjustment D half D max control D half D max control that is set to OFF is not executed at warm up rotation last rotation The execution interval can be set by DH TMG at warm up rotation and INTROT 2 at last rotation ...

Page 969: ...er switch Display adj set range 0 to 10 0 LEGAL R 1 FOOLSCAP R 2 OFICIO R 3 FOLIO R 4 Australian FOOLSCAP R 5 Ecuador OFICIO R 6 Bolivia OFICIO R 7 Argentine OFICIO R 8 Argentine LEGAL R 9 Government LEGAL R 10 Mexico OFICIO R Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW ORG LTR Special paper size set in DADF mode LTR Lv 2 Details To set the size of special paper LTR configuration that cannot be recognize...

Page 970: ... color mode to create black by using a small amount of Y M and C toners In text photo map mode it is output in black mode Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW MODELSZ2 Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode Lv 2 Details To set ON OFF for global suppor...

Page 971: ... Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW PDF RDCT PDF reduction set at forwarding Lv 2 Details To set whether to reduce the image for transmission when converting the image received by IFAX into PDF for e mail file transmission Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 With the...

Page 972: ...er switch Caution Be sure to set 0 ON again when ARCDAT control recovers Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER DISPLAY HT C COPIER OPTION FNC SW SJOB CL Set of scan job canceling by logout Lv 1 Details To set whether to cancel the scan job in operation by logout of the user Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value a...

Page 973: ...al value Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW W RAID Set of HDD Mirroring Kit installation Lv 1 Details To set installation state of HDD Mirroring Kit Select 1 Installed when installing the HDD Mirroring Kit Select 0 Not installed when removing the HDD Mirroring Kit Use case When installing removing HDD Mirroring Kit Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF...

Page 974: ... power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Registered PDL license is enabled 1 Disabled Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW IMGCNTPR Setting of image quality mode Lv 1 Details To set the image quality mode The counter priority mode is applied when 1 is set and the image quality priority mode is applied when 0 is set Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value a...

Page 975: ...C SW FAX INT Set FAX RX print interruption oprtn mode Lv 2 Details To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception print automatically Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not set this item while charge management charging by Coin Manager a device alone etc is used Durin...

Page 976: ...Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW MIB NVTA RFC compatible character stringMIB write Lv 1 Details As default MIB object which NVT ASCII can be written exists in order to link with LUI entry value This violates RFC order so a problem like garbled 2 byte characters may occur in the SNMP monitoring system such as the 3rd vendor s MPS Whether non RFC compatibl...

Page 977: ...e method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Display 1 Hide Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW T DLV BK Pre toner low alarm send timing Bk toner Lv 2 Details To set the remaining toner level to send the pre toner low alarm When the toner level in the Bk Toner Bottle reaches the settings value alarm 10 0020 Bk is sent Use case When changing the timing to n...

Page 978: ... The setting is enabled only with Inch configuration machine Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 FAX STR For customization Lv 1 Use case For customization etc LIMFNC M For customization Lv 2 Use case For customization etc T 8 50 DSPLY SW COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI COPY Display hide of copy screen Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the copy function Use case Upon user...

Page 979: ...te method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW FXMSG SW ON OFF of Fixing Ass y rplce message Lv 2 Details To set whether to display the message prompting to replace the Fixing Assembly on the Control Panel when the counter for life judgment reaches the specified value When ...

Page 980: ...etting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW BRWS FAV Set of service browser favorite register Lv 1 Details To set whether to allow registration of favorites in the browser for service When 1 is set favorites in the browser for service can be edited and any URLs can be accessed Use case When se...

Page 981: ...imit on the number of shortcut buttons that appear at the top of the Control Panel screen The settings for shortcut buttons are made in Setting of Buttons at the Top of the Screen which is displayed by pressing the advanced menu button on the Main Menu screen Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caut...

Page 982: ...alue 25 SMTPRXPN Setting of SMTP reception port number Lv 2 Details To set SMTP reception port number Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 65535 Default value 25 COPIER OPTION NETWORK POP3PN Setting of POP3 reception port number Lv 2 Details To set POP3 reception port numbe...

Page 983: ... which is plaintext authentication at the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the communication packet is not encrypted Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 SMTP server dependent 1 Not used Default value 0 NS LGN Limit LOGIN authentication at SMTP au...

Page 984: ...lated service mode COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEV SW COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEV RTR Setting of sleep notification range Lv 2 Details To set the number of available routers to the target for sleep notification Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution This is active when COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEV SW i...

Page 985: ...ess OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 1 to 3 1 WSD and SNMP 2 WSD and CPCA 3 CPCA and SNMP Default value 1 COPIER OPTION NETWORK 802XTOUT Set of IEEE802 1X authentication timeout Lv 1 Details To set timeout value for IEEE802 1X authentication If the device executes 802 1X authentication change the wait time for response from the authentication server Use case When re...

Page 986: ...rewall range Lv 1 Details To set all protocols or TCP UDP ICMP unicast as the target of Firewall When 0 is set the machine responds to ARP ICMP multicast and broadcast which have no direct relation and consequently the number of logs is increased When 1 is set the machine filters TCP UDP and ICMP unicast only Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then pr...

Page 987: ...icated protocol type Lv 2 Details To switch the type of dedicated protocol Use case Upon user s request Assumed to make change from the default value only for customization Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 TYPE 0 Compatible in conventional manner 1 TYPE 1 Default value 0 VLAN SW Switch for VLAN...

Page 988: ...e method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Normal mode 1 Secure mode Not used TLS_RSA_WITH_ RC4_128_SHA TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5 Default value 0 RAWTOUT Set of reception timeout at printing Lv 2 Details To set the duration of time before disconnecting the connection when packet reception is delayed during printing wit...

Page 989: ...To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside the machine and the surface temperature of the Fixing Film As the value is incremented by 1 the cycle is increased by 1 minute Obtained log can be displayed by selecting the following COPIER DISPLAY ENVRNT Use case At problem analysis Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main p...

Page 990: ...lated service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING TBLT CLN COPIER OPTION CLEANING ITBB TMG Set of drum ITB cleaning band interval Lv 1 Details To set the intervals at which a band of ATR patches is formed at last rotation as a measure to prevent flipping of the Drum Cleaner If flipping is concerned reduce the interval In addition use this mode when Bk vertical lines occur in a high temperature and high ...

Page 991: ...erate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Output from the tray from which the last job was output 1 Output from the delivery destination which priority is high among the delivery trays Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FEED SW USZ FEED ON OFF Job set ppr source ppr size chck Lv 1 Details To set whether to check if th...

Page 992: ...Tray When 0 is set the Lifting Plate applies pressure to the envelope once When 1 is set pressure is applied twice and the feeding power is increased Use case At installation When jams frequently occur Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When applying pressure twice jam may occur frequently with Yougata type envelope Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Pressure ...

Page 993: ...COPIER OPTION IMG SPD ARC INT1 Set of ARCDAT interruption interval Lv 2 Details To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which ARCDAT control is executed When the number of sheets reaches the specified value ARCDAT control is executed by interrupting an ongoing job Decrease the value when the density varies dramatically and increase the value to reduce downtime due to the control If the val...

Page 994: ...all dust particles that do not appear on the image are detected Display adj set range 0 to 255 0 OFF Default value 200 Related service mode COPIER OPTION IMG RDR DFDST L1 COPIER OPTION IMG RDR DF2DSTL1 Adj Bk line crrct lvl ppr intvl bck DADF Lv 1 Details To adjust the black line correction level with dust detection correction control that is executed by the Scanner Unit for back side in DADF mode...

Page 995: ...y 1 Small granularity low dot stability color mode Large granularity high dot stability black mode 2 Large granularity high dot stability Default value 2 COPIER OPTION IMG MCON PRN FLG Select of image area flag PDL image Lv 2 Details To set the image area flag for the image processing which is performed when a PDL image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate If an image fails to be...

Page 996: ... range 500 to 2000 Unit sheet Default value 1000 Related service mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW DH SW COPIER OPTION IMG MCON MIX FLG Set img processing at img composition Lv 2 Details To set the image processing which is performed when an image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate by the Main Controller upon image composition Use case When an image processing failure occurs Adj set op...

Page 997: ...e The hue of the photo area might be different from that of 0 3 Equivalent to scanned photo mode Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color Screen processed image Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG MCON REDU CNT Set toner deposit amount limt at clr adj Lv 2 Details To set whether to limit the toner deposit amount at color adjustment color balance fine adjustment of density When 0 is set the co...

Page 998: ... fails to read the density Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 512 to 2047 Default value 1200 COPIER OPTION IMG MCON AST SEL Adj of advanced smoothing effect Lv 2 Details To adjust the smoothing effect which is set in the advanced smoothing UI Set 3 if the effect is not improved by selecting High on the UI Set 0 if too much eff...

Page 999: ...washed out with this mode not only the background of yellowed blank paper but also other light colors light blue etc are washed out Display adj set range 15 to 15 Default value 0 T 8 59 IMG DEV COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DRM IDL Set first idle rotn time in HH Ev Lv 1 Details To set the idle rotation time to be performed first time for the day in an HH high temperature and high humidity environment Use ...

Page 1000: ...correct the TD ratio by setting the offset of the gain value of ATR Sensor Y When the value is increased TD ratio is increased uneven density at the screw interval is alleviated but fogging may occur Since the target value of TD ratio changes when changing the value it is necessary to stable TD ratio by forcibly executing toner ejection sequence The value is returned to 0 at the replacement of the...

Page 1001: ...e Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 5 0 0 sheets 1 100 sheets 2 200 sheets 5 500 sheets Unit sheet Default value 2 Related service mode To set the intervals at which a band of ATR patches is formed at last rotation COPIER OPTION CLEANING ITBB TMG COPIER OPTION IMG DEV PCHINT V Adj ATR patch VD count...

Page 1002: ...IMG DEV PAP W EN Solid image uneven dens prevention mode Lv 1 Details If the developer is supplied unevenly to the Developing Cylinder uneven density occurs on the solid image In order to make the developer even time for the Toner Feed Screw to rotate is secured by widening the interval between images As the value is larger the interval between images interval between sheets becomes wider Increase...

Page 1003: ...lor image is not appropriate even when auto gradation adjustment is executed Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high Use case When density of solid area on an image is not appropriate even performing auto gradation adjustment Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main po...

Page 1004: ...r switch Display adj set range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL4 Fixing control temperature Heavy paper 3 Lv 1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for heavy paper 3 210 to 256 g m2 As the value is incremented by 1 the control temperature is increased by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing fa...

Page 1005: ... value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP5 ITOP control temperature Thin ppr Lv 1 Details To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for thin paper As the value is incremented by 1 the control temperature is increased by 5 deg C Use case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 94mm of thin paper Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key ...

Page 1006: ...eg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL8 Fixing control temperature Transparency Lv 1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for transparency As the value is incremented by 1 the control temperature is increased by 5 deg C from the specified value Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value w...

Page 1007: ...fault value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP9 ITOP control temperature Coated paper 1 Lv 1 Details To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for coated paper 1 106 to 163 g m2 As the value is incremented by 1 the control temperature is increased by 5 deg C from the specified value Use case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 94mm of coated paper 1 Adj set operate method 1 Enter the set...

Page 1008: ...0 to 1 0 For plain paper 1 1 For recycled paper Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER OPTION CUSTOM TEMP TBL COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FX S TMP COPIER OPTION IMG FIX PLN LP Set of fixing arch ctrl with plain paper Lv 2 Details To set the arch control method between the secondary transfer and fixing when feeding plain paper color paper or recycled paper 52 to 105 g m2 Normally the arch control is...

Page 1009: ...ION CUSTOM ABK TOOL Allow access from address book mntc tool Lv 1 Details To set whether to accept import from the address book maintenance tool Use case When executing import from the address book maintenance tool Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default value 0 DEV SP1 Devic...

Page 1010: ...DADF Use case Upon user s request The LED is too bright Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default value 0 COPIER OPTION CUSTOM RDEV SP1 RCON device special settings 1 Lv 2 Details To execute the device special setting Use case For customization etc Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Tur...

Page 1011: ...ay adj set range 00000000 to 11111111 Default value 0 RDEV SP8 RCON device special settings 8 Lv 2 Details To execute the device special setting Use case For customization etc Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given Display adj set range 00000000 to 11111111 Default va...

Page 1012: ...3 Setting of software counter 3 Lv 1 Details To set counter type for software counter 3 on the Counter Check screen Use case Upon user dealer s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 999 0 No registration Default value The value differs according to the location COUNTER4 Setting of software count...

Page 1013: ...ection of full tray 1 Detection of height only Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER MF LG ST Display hide of long original mode Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Long Original button When 1 is set Long Original button is displayed in Copy Options screen and the long length paper becomes available Use case Upon user s request use of long original or long length paper Adj set operate ...

Page 1014: ...80 degrees when PDL print is made on tab paper When 1 Rotated is set image is rotated Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Not rotated 1 Rotated Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER PR PSESW Display hide of output pause button Lv 1 Details To set whether to display or hid...

Page 1015: ...therwise proper print is not available and it can cause soiling inside the machine because of toner Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Auto cassette change disabled 1 Auto cassette change enabled Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER BCNT AST Set of inbox print charge target job Lv 1 Details To set the job type that advances the count in inbox print with NE Controller ASSIST Use case When switching the j...

Page 1016: ... the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER IFAX SZL Setting of IFAX send size limit Lv 2 Details To set for restricting data size at the time of IFAX transmission that does not go through the server With the setting to restrict the data size it is to be 830 error in the case of sending data that exceeds the u...

Page 1017: ... print job be subject to card management by the Card Reader With the setting to enable this mode PDL print is available only when the card ID of the card inserted to the Card Reader matches the department ID Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 PDL print is available wi...

Page 1018: ...or counter Default value JAPAN 0 Other 1 COPIER OPTION USER JA FUNC ON OFF of job archive function Lv 2 Details To set ON OFF of job archive function Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Changing this mode is not available in service mode but reference is available in service mode This mode is available only with the MEA...

Page 1019: ...vailable by entering the address because of no File display on the transmission screen The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be selected but even if a job is sent it is to be a transmission error End code 762 is displayed Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution The addresses a...

Page 1020: ...n user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 3 0 No conversion 1 100 x 100 dpi 2 200 x 200 dpi 3 300 x 300 dpi Default value 3 COPIER OPTION USER JA COMPR Dspl job archive record compress ratio Lv 2 Details To display the compression ratio of images for job archives recorded in jobs other than...

Page 1021: ...ed Use case When switching to display or hide Use USB Host on USB Settings screen Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER USBM DSP Dspl hide of USB ex memory device driver Lv 2 Details To set whether to display Preferences External Interface USB Settin...

Page 1022: ...ion restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display adj set range 0 to1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER JA FREP Setting of Fax TX Report with image SAM Lv 2 Details To set the Fax TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled When 1 is set the Fax TX Report with image is enabled Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display adj set rang...

Page 1023: ...e 0 COPIER OPTION USER EXP CRYP Confdntial encrypt ON OFF add book exprt Lv 1 Details To set whether to encrypt the confidential part password part in the Address Book when exporting the address book and device settings via RUI When 0 is set the confidential part in the address book is exported without encryption Use case When there is a need to export password without encryption because of operat...

Page 1024: ...FF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Face down delivery 1 Face up delivery Default value 0 SJ UNMSK ON OFF secured job masking cancellation Lv 2 Details To set whether to mask other people s secured jobs When 0 is set operation is not possible because other people s secured jobs are masked When COIN is set to 6 or 7 charge mode Type C set 1 Masking is canceled and other peopl...

Page 1025: ...8 8 8 205 8 205 Service Mode COPIER OPTION USER Service Mode COPIER OPTION USER COPIER OPTION USER SCALL SW Not used SCALLCMP Not used T 8 65 ...

Page 1026: ...ing value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 A5R 1 STMTR Default value USA 1 Other 0 COPIER OPTION CST CST1 P2 Setting of Cassette 1 paper size Lv 1 Details To set the paper size used in Cassette 1 Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 B5 1 EXEC ...

Page 1027: ...o 27 Not used 28 B OFI Default value 0 COPIER OPTION CST CST2 U1 Set Cst2 overseas special ppr category 1 Lv 1 Details To set the overseas special paper category 1 used in Cassette 2 Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 43 0 A4 R LTR R 1 to 23 Not used 24 FLSC 25 A FLS 26 OFI 27 E OFI 28 to 29 Not used...

Page 1028: ...gory 1 used in Cassette 4 Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 43 0 A4 R LTR R 1 to 23 Not used 24 FLSC 25 A FLS 26 OFI 27 E OFI 28 to 29 Not used 30 A LTRR 31 to 32 Not used 33 A LGL 34 G LGL 35 Not used 36 A OFI 37 M OFI 38 to 41 Not used 42 FA4 43 Not used Default value 0 CST4 U2 Set Cst4 overseas s...

Page 1029: ...ter 3 Charge with DA only in Japan 4 Charge with this machine itself 5 New SC mode 6 External charge mode 6 7 External charge mode 7 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER OPTION USER CONTROL COPIER OPTION NETWORK DA CNCT COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI BOX UI SEND UI FAX COPIER OPTION ACC PDL THR COPIER OPTION ACC DK P Setting of Paper Deck paper size Lv 1 Details To set the paper size used in the...

Page 1030: ...ration might be done without charging This is to set the number of sheets that can be picked up after the machine receives Ack single from DA When the value is decreased the number of prints to be made without charging is decreased but the productivity may decrease When the value is increased the productivity does not decrease but the number of prints to be made without charging is increased Adj s...

Page 1031: ...ion With priority on speed output cannot be correctly stopped by the upper limit number of sheets With priority on the upper limit number of sheets processing performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup location Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 No support 1 Priority on speed 2 Priority on upper limit number of sheets Default value 0 CC EXT Set of information output at CCV cont...

Page 1032: ...h license transfer Use case When checking whether SEND function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST SEND 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR SEND Display adj set range When operation finished normally OK Default value 1 TR SEND Trns license key dspl of SEND function Lv 2 Details To display transfer license ...

Page 1033: ...key The transfer license key is displayed under TR EXPDF Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed for Japan Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST PDFDR Install state dspl of direct print PDF Lv 2 Details To display installation state of direct print PDF function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether direct print PDF ...

Page 1034: ...en press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR WEB Display adj set range When operation finished normally OK Default value 0 COPIER OPTION LCNS TR TR WEB Trns license key dspl of Web Access Soft Lv 2 Details To display transfer license key to use Web Access Software when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When replacing the de...

Page 1035: ...his mode is enabled when SEND function is installed Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST USPDF Install state dspl of dgtl user sign PDF Lv 2 Details To display installation state of digital user signature PDF transmission function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether digital user signature PDF transmission function is installed Adj se...

Page 1036: ...te dspl of monitor service func Lv 2 Details To display installation state of monitoring service function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether monitoring service function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST ERDS 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR ERDS Display adj...

Page 1037: ...fer license key is displayed under TR LIPS5 Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST LIPS4 Install state display of LIPS4 func JP Lv 2 Details To display installation state of LIPS4 function JP only when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether LIPS4 function JP only is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST LIPS4 2 Enter 0 and then press OK...

Page 1038: ...fer license key is displayed under TR PSPCU Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST LXUFR Install state dspl of UFR II function Lv 2 Details To display installation state of UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether UFR II function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST LXUFR 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When insta...

Page 1039: ...der extensions PDF Lv 2 Details To display transfer license key to use reader extensions PDF function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When replacing the device Adj set operate method 1 Select ST REPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR REPDF Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST OOXML Install state dspl of Of...

Page 1040: ...od 1 Select ST NCAPT 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR NCAPT Display adj set range 0 Not installed 1 Installed When operation finished normally OK Default value 0 TR NCAPT Transfer license key dspl of NetCap func Lv 2 Details To display transfer license key to use network packet capture function when disabling the fu...

Page 1041: ...age gets darker Use case At test print TYPE 5 Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 255 DENS M Adj of M color density at test print Lv 1 Details To adjust M color density when performing test print TYPE 5 As the value is larger the image gets darker Use case At test print TYPE 5 Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press ...

Page 1042: ...e method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 1 to 8 1 Cassette 1 2 Cassette 2 3 Cassette 3 4 Cassette 4 5 Paper Deck 6 Multi purpose Tray 7 to 8 Not used 2 SIDE Setting of PG 2 sided mode Lv 1 Details To set 1 sided 2 sided print for PG output Use case At problem analysis Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to...

Page 1043: ...orting BMlinks Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Ordinary System Monitor screen 1 Screen in which only the device configuration is displayed Default value 0 COPIER TEST NETWORK IPV6 ADR Setting of PING send address IPv6 Lv 1 Details To set the IPv6 address to send PING When PING is sent to this address by COPIER TEST NETWORK PING IP...

Page 1044: ...ecomes full Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Default value 1 PAYLOAD Payload discard NetCap function Lv 2 Details To set whether to discard payload of captured packet Use case When setting whether to discard payload of captured packet Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Default value 0 FILE CLR Deletion of file NetCap function Lv...

Page 1045: ...r is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at FAX reception Large size 1 small size 1 A blank sheet is not counted Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 BOX PRT Inbox print counter Lv 1 Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at Inbox print Large size 1 small size 1 A blank sheet is not counted Display adj set range ...

Page 1046: ...Details Large size 1 Small size 1 Unit Number of sheets MF Multi purpose Tray pickup total counter Lv 1 Details Large size 1 Small size 1 Unit Number of sheets DK Deck pickup total counter Lv 1 Details Large size 1 Small size 1 Unit Number of sheets 2 SIDE 2 sided pickup total counter Lv 1 Details Large size 1 Small size 1 Unit Number of sheets T 8 74 FEEDER COPIER COUNTER FEEDER FEED DADF origina...

Page 1047: ...r toner supply blocks Counted for every one rotation of Toner Stirring Screw Use case When checking the usage status of toner Unit Number of blocks Default value 0 T SPLY M M toner supply counter Lv 1 Details Number of M color toner supply blocks Counted for every one rotation of Toner Stirring Screw Use case When checking the usage status of toner Unit Number of blocks Default value 0 T SPLY C C ...

Page 1048: ...se SUC L K For R D use T 8 77 JOB COPIER COUNTER JOB DVPAPLEN Average paper length of job Lv 1 Details Average paper length in the period from when the printer engine starts printing operation to when it stops the operation Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed continuously as a large job the average paper length affects calculation of the life Display adj set range 0 to ...

Page 1049: ...e parts counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 PT DRM Bk Photosensitive Drum parts counter Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press O...

Page 1050: ...Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 M SP RL Multi purpose Tray Sprtn Roll prts cntr Lv 1 Details Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To cle...

Page 1051: ... Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 PT DR Y Y Photosensitive Drum parts counter Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts Adj set operate method To c...

Page 1052: ...line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default value 0 Suppleme...

Page 1053: ...r the estimated life Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 DF HNG L Left Hinge parts counter All Reader Lv 1 Details To display the parts counter and the estimated life of DADF Hinge Unit Left 1st line Number of sheets fed after the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life to be entered ...

Page 1054: ...t the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 C4 FD RL Cassette4 Feed Roller parts counter Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set oper...

Page 1055: ...s OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default value 0 RET RL Return Roller parts counter Fin C1 Lv 1 Details Paper Return Roller Front Rear 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method T...

Page 1056: ... size conversion basis which is stored in the controller A sheet of large size paper with 5 image ratio is counted as small size with 10 image ratio x 1 sheet MAGENTA Video count M counter Lv 1 Details To display the number of sheets small size 1 large size 1 as the distribution of M color image ratio LOW less than 3 MID 3 or higher and less than 7 HIGH 7 or higher Use case When checking distribut...

Page 1057: ...io LOW less than 3 MID 3 or higher and less than 7 HIGH 7 or higher Use case When checking distribution of video count Supplement memo Video count The number of sheets for each image ratio classification LOW MID HIGH for each color on a A4 size conversion basis which is stored in the controller A sheet of large size paper with 5 image ratio is counted as small size with 5 image ratio x 2 sheets MA...

Page 1058: ... Drum Unit Y is close to the end of life in percentage When a new part is set the value becomes 0 Use case When checking the life of Drum Unit Display adj set range 0 to 999 Unit M DRM LF Display of Drum Unit M life Lv 1 Details To display how much the Drum Unit M is close to the end of life in percentage When a new part is set the value becomes 0 Use case When checking the life of Drum Unit Displ...

Page 1059: ... Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit 0 1 mm Default value 0 LA SPEED Fine adj of DADF image magnifictn front Lv 1 Details To adjust the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction for DADF scanning As the value is incremented by 1 the image is reduced by 0 1 in vertical scanning direction The feeding speed increases and the image is reduced Use case When installing DADF When replacing...

Page 1060: ...ection at the time of DADF duplex scanning As the value is incremented by 1 the image is reduced by 0 1 in horizontal scanning direction Use case When a displacement occurs to the front back side image magnification ratio at the time of duplex scanning Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 10 to 10 Unit 0 10 Default va...

Page 1061: ... Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range None FEEDER FUNCTION FEED CHK Specify DADF individual feed mode Lv 1 Details To specify the feed mode for DADF Feed operation is activated by FEED ON Use case At operation check Adj set operate method Enter the value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 3 0 1 side...

Page 1062: ...approximately 5 seconds and automatically stops 2 Press OK key The operation check is completed Caution Be sure to press the OK key again after execution The operation automatically stops after approximately 5 seconds but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed STOP is not displayed Display adj set range None Related service mode FEEDER FUNCTION MTR CHK ROLL CLN Rotation of DADF Rollers Lv 1...

Page 1063: ...egative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 6 to 6 Unit mm Default value 0 SORTER ADJUST STP R2 Adj LTR rear stpl pstn 45 deg Fin C1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the one rear staple position on the LTR size paper As the value is incremented by 1 the staple position moves to the rear side by 0 49mm Use case When the LTR paper rear staple position is displaced Adj set operate method Ent...

Page 1064: ...d Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 6 to 6 Unit mm Default value 0 SORTER ADJUST STP R3 Adj A4R rear stpl pstn 45 deg Fin C1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the one rear staple position on the A4R size paper As the value is incremented by 1 the staple position moves to the rear side by 0 49mm Use case When misalignment occurs at the rear staple p...

Page 1065: ...hen press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 SORTER ADJUST OFST STC Set poor offset stack prev mode Fin C1 Lv 1 Details Set 1 when paper is not appropriately stacked in the small size offset mode When 1 is set buffer operation is not performed in the small size offset mode Use case When paper is not appropriately stacked in the small size offset mode Adj set operate met...

Page 1066: ...t of paper is not appropriate Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default value 0 SORTER ADJUST SFT AMT2 Adj Shift Roller rear shft amnt Fin A1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the rear shift amount of the Shift Roller As the value is incremented by 1 the Shift Roller moves to the push on direction by 0 1mm Us...

Page 1067: ...ult value 0 DSTP F1 Adjusting the front staple position in 2 stapling mode Lv 1 Details Adjust the front staple position in the middle 2 stapling mode Incrementing the value by 1 shifts the front stapling position to the paper edge side by 0 1 mm Use case When the middle 2 staple position is displaced between the front and rear stapling positions Adj set operate method After inputting value press ...

Page 1068: ...ey 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 600 mm s 1 700 mm s Default value 1 SORTER OPTION STCR DWN Set occasional misalign prev mode Fin Lv 1 Details To set ON OFF of occasional misalignment prevention mode When misalignment in feed direction occurs at approx every 30 sheets for thin plain paper 105g m2 and less set 1 Use case When misalignment in feed direction occur...

Page 1069: ...ry stationary jam occurs at the time of delivering narrow width thin paper to the First Second Delivery Tray Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Destination specified on UI 1 Tray of the host machine Default value 0 SWGUP SW ON OFF of the swing unit escape operation Lv 1 Details To set ON OFF of the swing unit escape operation for the...

Page 1070: ...est Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default value 0 MENU 4 Hide dis of printer setting menu level 4 Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the level 4 of printer setting menu Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK ...

Page 1071: ...nstallation How to Check this Installation Procedure Things to do Before Installation Points to Note Before Installation Combination Table of Accessory Installation Checking the Contents Unpacking Installation Procedure ...

Page 1072: ...ng conditions Thus it is desirable to go over the planned installing location before bringing the machine to the user s site 1 There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated 10 for exclusive use by the machine 2 Environment of the installation site must be within the range indicated below Avoid any area near the faucet the water heater the humidifier or the refrigerator Oper...

Page 1073: ...m ro more Duplex Color Image Reader Unit E1 Inner Finisher E1 Paper Deck Unit B2 19 3 4 500 mm or more 19 3 4 500 mm or more 19 3 4 500 mm or more 46 1 4 1 174 mm 4 100 mm or more 50 5 8 1 284 mm 60 1 4 1 529 mm F 9 3 F 9 4 Duplex Color Image Reader Unit E1 External 2 3 Hole Puncher B2 Booklet Finisher J1 Buffer Pass Unit G1 Paper Deck Unit B2 19 3 4 500 mm or more 19 3 4 500 mm or more 19 3 4 500...

Page 1074: ...ow temperature place to a warm place due to rapidly cooled surrounding moisture vapor 2 The host machine weighs maximum 134kg It is recommended to lift it with 4 people or more However if there is a standard to handle a heavy load in each sales company follow it for operation Also make sure to lift the machine with keeping it level at operation Because the gravity center is in the rear lift with c...

Page 1075: ...el only DADF model only DADF model only 16 Hinge Label 18 Copy Prohibition Label 19 Cleaning Procedure Label 20 Hinge Caution Label Refer to Chart Refer to Chart Refer to Chart Refer to Chart 17 Cleaning Position Label Refer to Chart DADF model only DADF model only DADF model only DADF model only DADF model only Label name Reverse Duplex Type DADF 1 Path Duplex Type DADF 16 Hinge Label 3 pc 6 pc 1...

Page 1076: ...connector has a different shape depending on locations Other than USA Use the correct power code to mach the location area of installation Make sure not to leave unused power code at the site 4 Included in the package in Asia general Korea and Taiwan regions NOTE The Touch Pen is attached with the Control Panel Remove all the parts in the cassette Only for AUS the Toner Container is installed on t...

Page 1077: ... PCL User Software PCL standard only PS User Software PS standard only iW MC CD 1 1 1 1 1 1 iW EMC CD 1 Main Unit Warranty 1 AMS KIT Software Manual CD 1 AMS Introduction Booklet 1 Chinese Certificate 1 Service Log Book 1 HDD related Option Integration Installation Procedure 1 Chinese Warranty Sheet 1 PANTONE Manual CD 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notice for Latest Software 1 Except for PCL PS standard 1 1 1 1 1...

Page 1078: ... 2 Hold the 4 grips on the left or right to lift the host machine up and then put down the machine from the skid CAUTION The host machine weighs maximum 134kg It is recommended to lift it with 4 people or more However if there is a standard to handle a heavy load in each sales company follow it for operation Also make sure to lift the machine with keeping it level at operation Because the gravity ...

Page 1079: ...ssette Unit in later step NOTE When setting up for the copier model refer to the Duplex Color Image Reader Unit E1 Color Image Reader Unit F1 F2 installation procedure When setting up for the printer model refer to the Printer Cover C2 stated in this procedure F 9 9 Model with DADF CAUTION Be sure to remove the tapes on the Cassette Unit and Reader Unit in later step F 9 10 ...

Page 1080: ...xation Screw until installation of the scanner is completed Scanner System Fixation Screw 5 Open the DADF and remove the cushioning material Cushioning Material 6 Close the DADF F 9 11 F 9 12 7 Pull out the Cassettes 1 and 2 and remove the tapes from them 8 Open the Front Cover and the Right Lower Cover 9 Peel off the Protection Paper Protection Paper F 9 13 F 9 14 ...

Page 1081: ...pushing down A claw insert the claw in 2 places and install the Right Front Cover 2 11 Insert the protrusion in 1 place While pushing down A claw insert the claw in 3 places and install the Right Rear Cover 3 x3 A F 9 15 F 9 16 12 Install the 2 Left Handle Covers 1 protrusion each 1 claw each x2 F 9 17 ...

Page 1082: ...r Assembly 2 Affix the below seal 1 ADF Cable Seal 1 Face Seal NOTE Be sure to keep the Scanner System Fixation Screws in a safe place to use for moving the machine x2 ADF Cable Seal Face Seal F 9 18 Installing the Drum Unit 1 Remove the ITB Cover 2 screws to loosen screw 2 Check that the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is positioned in the direction of the arrow and if not turn it and adjust the p...

Page 1083: ...ation Procedure Installing the Drum Unit 3 Turn the ITB Release Lever in the direction of the arrow until the protrusion is aligned with the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure applied on the ITB ITB Pressure Release Lever F 9 21 4 Pull out the Process Unit until it stops x2 F 9 22 ...

Page 1084: ...moved simultaneously CAUTION Perform the removal procedure for each color Dummy Drum F 9 23 F 9 24 CAUTION Points to Note when Removing the Dummy Drum When removing the Dummy Drum be sure to lift it slowly and vertically If lifting it in an oblique direction the Seal on the Developing Assembly is stressed and may cause tear of the seal If the Developing Seal is torn remove the torn seal by pulling...

Page 1085: ...tion Procedure Installing the Drum Unit For India only 7 Remove the tape and tag from the Developing Assembly and remove the Plastic Film Sheet CAUTION Do not touch the sleeve F 9 27 Remove the tape F 9 28 Remove the Plastic Film Sheet For India only 8 Remove the paper you placed in step 5 F 9 29 ...

Page 1086: ... a cause of failure CAUTION Be sure to pay attention to the below in doing the next procedure Do not touch the Drum area Be careful not to hit the cover against the Drum area Do not make the Drum area disposed of light for 5 minutes or more NOTE Step 10 to 11 is to install the Drum Unit of each color F 9 30 CAUTION Points to Note at Drum Installation Be sure not to rotate the Drum counterclockwise...

Page 1087: ... the Drum Unit and the cover might be stiff Proceed with extra care to avoid hitting the Drum area or dropping the Drum Unit when removing the cover from the Drum Unit x2 Drum Unit Drum Cover Claws F 9 33 CAUTION Only drum for Bk blue color is specified the color Drums for the 3 colors green ones are not specified the color Y M C Drum for Color Green Drum for Bk Blue Position of Drum for Bk Positi...

Page 1088: ...Hold the handles at right and left of the Drum Unit Grip F 9 35 CAUTION If pushing it in the angle the shutter may breaks Thus make sure to install it from just above F 9 36 11 Fit the guide of the Process Unit to the guide of the Drum Unit to install the Drum Unit Drum Unit Guide Process Unit Guide Process Unit Guide Drum Unit Guide F 9 37 ...

Page 1089: ...lling the Drum Unit 12 Check that the 8 LED light receiving areas of the Drum Unit are not off from the base F 9 38 13 Put the Process Unit back to the host machine and secure with the 2 screws CAUTION Check that there is no gap between A the host machine and the Process Unit and then secure with the screw A A F 9 39 ...

Page 1090: ...t is not secured it may cause the image failure F 9 40 14 Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow and then fit the projection to the triangle mark on the plate to apply pressure CAUTION When pressuring the ITB Pressure Release Lever be sure that the Right Lower Cover is opened first before pressuring 15 Install the ITB Cover and tighten the 2 screws which have been loosen...

Page 1091: ...ste Toner Container and then put the Lever back 18 Close the Right Lower Cover the Right Upper Cover and the Front Cover F 9 43 Fixing the Machine in Place In the case that the pedestal is installed 1 Move the main body to the installation position and secure it in place with the 4 adjusters NOTE Securing of the adjuster is not earthquake resistant F 9 44 ...

Page 1092: ...e and humidity of the installation environment are high image smear is likely to occur This is the case that the value of the absolute water volume outside of the machine is about 12g or more Service Mode Level1 COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG ABS HUM In case the Environment Heater Switch Cover is included in the package turn the Environment Heater Switch ON and then install the Environment Heater Switch Co...

Page 1093: ...rning ON the main power drum initialization and developing assembly initialization are automatically executed In case of the host machine with the Toner Container toner fill is executed in a row Even turning OFF the main power during drum initialization developing assembly initialization and toner fill they will be re executed when turning ON the power again 4 After activation follow the instructi...

Page 1094: ...oner refill are completed In case of the host machine without the Toner Container execute the following procedures 9 Open the Toner Cover 10 Add check marks to each color displayed on the operation screen and press Remove Toner Cartridges to open the Toner Replacement Cover F 9 48 F 9 49 NOTE Step 11 to 13 is to install the Toner Container of each color 11 Hold the Toner Container as the figure be...

Page 1095: ...oping assembly initialization and toner refill are completed F 9 52 Turning OFF the Main Power Switch 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Setting for K Paper China only Make the following settings for the use of K paper 1 Enter the service mode level 2 2 Change from 0 to...

Page 1096: ...te by referring the size index label of the sheet size to be set and fit it to the slot 3 Hold the Trail Edge Guide Plate Lever and adjust it to the predefined size At that time move the Trail Edge Guide Plate by referring the size index label of the sheet size be set and fit it to the slot Side Guide Plate Lever Side Guide Plate Rear Edge Guide Plate Rear Edge Guide Plate Lever F 9 53 F 9 54 4 Se...

Page 1097: ... is not appropriate 1 Turn OFF the power refit the Drum Unit and turn On the power again 2 If the above work does not solve the problem execute initialization of the Drum Unit for each color in Service Mode Service Mode Level 1 COPIER FUNCTION DPC DRMRSETY Service Mode Level 1 COPIER FUNCTION DPC DRMRSETM Service Mode Level 1 COPIER FUNCTION DPC DRMRSETC 2 Check the result of initialization of dev...

Page 1098: ...rface of Copyboard Glass on the host machine 2 Load the heavy paper to the cassette 3 Select Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Heavy Full Adjust 4 Select the pickup source of a test print and press OK 5 Follow the below UI and perform the operation In the case of imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 C5255i C5250 C5250i In case of Plain Paper 1 Clean the g...

Page 1099: ... service mode Level 1 is 350 to 350 COPIER DISPLAY MISC ITB POS COPIER DISPLAY MISC ITB POS2 4 If the value of service mode is out of range perform the ITB Alignment Adjustment NOTE Since this product is not affected by the tilt of floor adjustment of the adjuster height is not valid Therefore if it is out of the range perform ITB alignment adjustment ITB Alignment Adjustment 1 Turn OFF the main p...

Page 1100: ...ighten 2 screws loosened on the previous step 8 Install the ITB Motor 4 Screws 1 Connector 9 Install the ITB Cover 2 screws and close the Front Cover 10 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 11 Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch 12 Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection Service Mode Level 1 COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ITB INIT imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5...

Page 1101: ...e formation order With this equipment the second side in the image formation order at the time of 2 sided copy print is equivalent to the first side of the original Margin Adjustment 1st side Mechanical Adjsutment 1 Make copies using the Cassette 1 and 2 and check that the left edge margin is 2 5 1 5mm Feeding direction of paper L1 image In Case of Nonstandard NOTE Adjsutment method is same for bo...

Page 1102: ...e step 3 As moving the adjusting plate toward the rear by 1 scale the left edge margin becomes 1mm smaller NOTE When moving the scale be sure that the amount of the value to be moved are the same for the 2 points 6 Tighten the fixing screw 7 Return the cassette to its original position F 9 66 NOTE When the cassette positions are uneven due to the mechanical adjustment adjust them by loosening the ...

Page 1103: ...vice Mode Level 1 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C2RE 4 To make the setting value effective turn OFF ON the main power of the Host Machine 5 Make 2 sided copy from cassette 2 and check that the left margin is 2 5 2 0mm 6 If the margin is out of the specification change the adjustment value for the left margin on the 2nd side in cassette 2 Service Mode Level 1 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C2RE 1 incremen...

Page 1104: ...s 2 5 2 0mm 2 If the left margin is out of the specification change the adjustment value for the left margin on the 2nd side from the Multi Purpose Tray Service Mode Level 1 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ MFRE 1 increment of the value reduces the left margin by 0 1mm 3 To make the setting value effective turn OFF ON the main power of the Host Machine 4 Write down the new adjustment value on the servic...

Page 1105: ...t of the setting value reduces the lead edge margin by 0 1mm 4 To make the setting value effective turn OFF ON the main power of the Host Machine 5 Write down the new adjustment value on the service label REG DUP1 F 9 74 Installing Other Parts Service Book Holder 1 Remove the double stick tape detachment paper on the rib area of the Service Book Holder and attach the Service Book Holder to the Ped...

Page 1106: ...hat the cassette pedestal is not installed 2 claws Stamp Cartridge In the case of Duplex Color Image Reader Unit E1 1 Open the DADF 2 Pull the lever at upper area of the DADF and open the cover of the DADF reading area F 9 76 F 9 77 3 Open the Stamp Cover 4 Using tweezers install the Stamp Cartridge with its stamp side faces up 5 Close the Stamp Cover 6 Close the cover of the DADF reading area 7 C...

Page 1107: ...F model only 1 Affix the labels according to the location after removing the existing ones Hinge Label Cleaning Position Label Copy Prohibition Label Cleaning Procedure Label 1 Path Duplex Type DADF Hinge Caution Label Reverse Duplex Type DADF Hinge Label Only for Reverse Duplex Type DADF or Color Image Reader Unit F1 Hinge Label Only for 1 Path Duplex Type DADF or Duplex Color Image Reader Unit E...

Page 1108: ...nded When non shield type UTP cable is used the surrounding electronic equipments may be interfered via the network cable 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Connect the network cable to the host machine and turn ON the main power switch 3 Inform the system administrator at the installation site that the installation of the host machine is complete and ask for network connection of the host machine...

Page 1109: ...etwork cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port Ping Operation Procedure Ask the network administrator at the user s site to note the IP address of the PC that is connected to the network Select Settings Registration Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings PING Command and enter the IP address of PC with the numeric keypad and then press Execute key If the display shows Response ...

Page 1110: ...at ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is displayed on Check Device Configuration screen If it is displayed there is no need to make this setting Checking method CAUTION Even if the setting is changed ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is not displayed on Check Device Configuration screen if SSO H has not been selected as login service 1 Press Counter button and check the controller version displayed on Check Device C...

Page 1111: ...Image Reader Unit When installing to iR ADV C5240 C5235 Color Image Reader Unit Copyboard Cover Unit Used Used Reader Controller Cover Used Not used Face Seal Use 6 seals Use 4 seals ADF Cable Seal Used Used Screw Binding Round End M4x8 Used Used F 9 84 T 9 3 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 B...

Page 1112: ...2 Hinge Open Close Guide Plates The removed Hinge Open Close Guide Plates and the screws will not be used 4 Screws The removed Screws will not be used x4 Hinge Open Close Guide Plate Hinge Cover Hinge Open Close Guide Plate 2 Remove the Reader Controller Cover The removed Reader Controller Cover will not be used 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in step 7 x2 F 9 86 F 9 87 3 Disconnect the c...

Page 1113: ... Affix the ADF Cable Seal to the Reader Controller Cover included in the package 7 Install the Reader Controller Cover The 2 screws removed in step 2 x2 F 9 90 F 9 91 F 1 72 8 Remove the 2 Stepped Screws The removed Stepped Screws will not be used 9 Remove the 2 Face Seals The removed Face Seals will not be used x2 Face Seal Face Seal 10 Tighten the 2 screws Binding Round End M4x8 11 Affix the 6 F...

Page 1114: ...llation Platen Cover Type S Installation Procedure When installing to iR ADV C5255 C5250 Duplex Color Image Reader Unit 12 Install the Copyboard Cover Unit 13 Remove the White Plate F 9 94 F 9 95 14 Place the White Plate on the Copyboard Glass by aligning it with the Index Sheet 15 Close the Copyboard Cover and then open it again F 9 96 F 9 97 ...

Page 1115: ...x Sheet so be sure to press it upward F 9 98 17 With the Copyboard Cover closed check that the White Plate is not placed on the Index Sheet as shown in the figures CAUTION Be sure that there is no gap between the White Plate and the Index Sheet As a guide it should be 0 3 mm or less White Board Index Sheet Copyboard Cover Reader Unit White Board Index Sheet Copyboard Cover Reader Unit White Board ...

Page 1116: ...r Image Reader Unit When installing to iR ADV C5240 C5235 Color Image Reader Unit 1 Remove the Reader Controller Cover x2 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 3 Disconnect the Grounding Wire 1 Screw The removed Screw will not be used 1 Wire Saddle x2 F 9 100 F 9 101 4 Open the DADF 5 Remove the DADF 2 Screws The removed Screw will not be used x2 6 Affix the ADF Cable Seal to the Reader Controller Cover r...

Page 1117: ...Reader Unit 7 Install the Reader Controller Cover removed in step 1 2 screws 8 Remove the 2 Stepped Screws The removed Stepped Screws will not be used 9 Remove the 2 Face Seals The removed Face Seals will not be used x2 Face Seal Face Seal 10 Tighten the 2 screws Binding Round End M4x8 11 Affix the 4 Face Seals x2 Face Seal Face Seal Face Seal F 9 104 F 9 105 12 Install the Copyboard Cover Unit 13...

Page 1118: ...hen installing to iR ADV C5240 C5235 Color Image Reader Unit 14 Place the White Plate on the Copyboard Glass by aligning it with the Index Sheet 15 Close the Copyboard Cover and then open it again F 9 108 F 9 109 16 Press the White Plate upward as shown in the figure below CAUTION If the White Plate is pressed downward it is placed on the Index Sheet so be sure to press it upward F 9 110 ...

Page 1119: ...hite Plate is not placed on the Index Sheet as shown in the figures CAUTION Be sure that there is no gap between the White Plate and the Index Sheet As a guide it should be 0 3 mm or less White Board Index Sheet Copyboard Cover Reader Unit White Board Index Sheet Copyboard Cover Reader Unit White Board Index Sheet Copyboard Cover Reader Unit White Board Index Sheet Copyboard Cover Reader Unit 18 C...

Page 1120: ...r X 1 4 Top Right Cover X 1 5 Top Left Cover X 1 6 Reader Fixing Hook A X 1 7 Reader Fixing Hook B X 2 8 Fixing Hook C X 1 9 Rubber Cap X 8 10 Stepped Screw M4 X 1 11 Screw Flat Head M4x6 X 2 12 Screw RS Tightening M3x8 5 X 2 F 9 112 14 Edge Saddle X 2 15 Reader Joint Left X 1 16 DP Cable Guide X 1 17 Reader Joint Right X 2 18 Reader Damper X 2 19 Screw TP Round End M3x6 X 5 20 Wire Saddle X 6 13 ...

Page 1121: ...ation The Top Front Cover the Left Top Cover and the Right Top Cover are secured to the Printer Cover Unit with tapes Turning Off the Host Machine Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned off before disconnecting the outlet Installation Outline Drawing F 9 ...

Page 1122: ...Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles 5 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Claws x2 x5 Claws Rubber Caps Rubber Caps F 9 117 F 9 118 6 Remove the Reader Communication Cable 7 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook Left Rear Sub Cover Hook 8 Close the Right Lower Cover NOTE Be sure to keep the Right Upper Cover open F 9 119 F 9 12...

Page 1123: ...the direction of the arrow and open DADF 10 Remove the Reader Left Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 3 Hooks x2 Hook Rubber Cap Rubber Cap F 9 121 F 9 122 11 Remove the Reader Right Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 3 Hooks x2 Rubber Cap Hook 12 Remove the Reader Front Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 2 Protrusions 1 Hook x2 Hook Rubber Cap Rubber Cap Protrusion Protrusion F 9 123 F 9 124 ...

Page 1124: ... Color Image Reader Unit 13 Install the 2 Fixation Screws for the Scanner x2 14 Free the harness from the cable guide 2 Wire Saddles x2 F 9 125 F 9 126 15 Free the USB cable from the cable guide and close DADF 2 Screws 3 Wire Saddles x3 x2 16 Remove the 2 screws securing the front side of the Reader Unit x2 F 9 127 F 9 128 ...

Page 1125: ...the Color Image Reader Unit 17 Remove 1 screw each from 2 positions on the Reader Mounting Plate on the right side of the Reader Unit x2 18 Remove the 4 screws securing the left side of the Reader Unit x4 F 9 129 F 9 130 19 Remove the Reader Unit from the machine by 2 or more people 20 Close the Right Upper Cover F 9 131 ...

Page 1126: ...rk from step 4 of Installation Procedure 1 Move the Control Panel in the direction of the arrow 2 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Claws x5 x2 Rubber Cap Claw F 9 132 F 9 133 3 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook Hook Left Rear Sub Cover 4 Open the Front Cover and remove the Left Upper Cover 5 Rubber Caps 5 Screws 1 Claw 1 Protrusion x5 Protrusion Claw Rubber Cap Rubbe...

Page 1127: ...ure 5 Remove the joint left 2 Screws Binding 6 Remove the Reader Rest Plate 1 Screw RS Tightening x3 7 Remove the 2 Reader Mounting Plates 1 Screw each x2 F 9 136 F 9 137 8 Remove the Harness Guide 1 Harness 1 USB Cable 2 Screws x2 9 Install the Reader Joint Left 3 Bosses 3 Screws Binding M4x8 x3 Boss F 9 138 F 9 139 ...

Page 1128: ...nt Right NOTE Be sure to align it with the marking lines Boss Boss Reader Damper x4 12 Affix the Reader Damper to the Hinge Plate on the rear left side of the machine NOTE Be sure to align it with the marking lines Marking Line F 9 140 F 9 141 13 Remove the Top Rear Cover of the Printer Cover Unit 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in step 25 5 Hooks x2 Hook 14 Remove the Top Cover of the Pr...

Page 1129: ...Saddles to the Reader Frame and the 6 Wire Saddles to the X marks 16 Place the Printer Cover Unit by aligning with the 2 Positioning Pins of the Reader Joint Right F 9 144 F 9 145 17 Secure the front side of the Printer Cover Unit 1 Boss 2 Screws Binding M4x8 18 Secure the Left side of the Printer Cover Unit 1 Stepped Screw M4 x3 Boss F 9 146 ...

Page 1130: ...rew M4 20 Install the Reader Fixing Hook A and Fixing Hook C NOTE Push on the Reader Fixing Hook A up and install 3 Bosses 2 Screws Binding M4x8 Reader Fixing Hook B x2 x2 Reader Fixing Hook A Fixing Hook C Boss Boss Boss F 9 147 21 Fix the harness on the Edge Saddle and the 5 Wire Saddles installed in step 15 NOTE Do not pass it through the Wire Saddle A and Edge Saddle B x6 A B F 9 148 ...

Page 1131: ...ure to route the harness as shown in the figure Do not use 2 Wire Saddles A x6 A F 9 149 22 Install the DP Cable Guide 2 Bosses 3 Screws TP M3x6 x3 Boss F 9 150 23 Put the USB Cable through the DP Cable Guide 2 Bosses 2 Screws TP M3x6 1 Wire Saddle Boss x2 NOTE When installing the USB Device Port simultaneously be sure to route the USB cable as shown in the figure F 9 152 F 9 151 ...

Page 1132: ...tep 13 2 Rubber Caps x2 Hook Rubber Cap F 9 153 F 9 154 NOTE When installing the USB Device Port simultaneously work from step 9 of USB Device Port E1 E2 E3 Multimedia Reader Writer A2 Installation Procedure Installing the USB Device Port In case of Printer Cover Unit 26 Move the Control Panel Base Cover in the direction of the arrow 1 Screw 27 Install the Printer Model Front Cover 4 Hooks 2 Screw...

Page 1133: ...t Top Cover 5 Hooks 2 Screws Binding M4x8 2 Rubber Caps x2 Rubber Cap Hook 30 Install the Right Top Cover 5 Hooks 2 Screws Binding M4x8 2 Rubber Caps x2 Rubber Cap Hook F 9 156 F 9 157 31 Return the Control Panel 32 Return the covers to their original positions Left Upper Cover Front Cover to be closed Left Rear Sub Cover Left Rear Cover ...

Page 1134: ...the auto gradation adjustment by the following method Plain Paper Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Plain Adjust Start Heavy1 Heavy2 Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Heavy1 Heavy2 Adjust Start Heavy3 Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Hea...

Page 1135: ...6 X 2 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned off before disconnecting the outlet F 9 158 Installation Outline Drawing Installation Procedure 1 Open the DADF or Copyboard Cover 2 Remove the Reader right retainer ...

Page 1136: ...the copyboard glass be sure not to get your fingers touched with the glass surface or the backside of the white plate In case the glass is soiled clean it with lint free paper F 9 161 F 9 162 4 Pull the rear side of the Drive Belt in the direction of the arrow to move the Scanner Box to the center 5 Install the 2 Cable Clamps in the direction as shown in the figure F 9 163 F 9 164 ...

Page 1137: ... with moving of the Scanner Box if it is not connected properly x2 7 Install the 2 Cable Clamps in the direction as shown in the figure F 9 165 F 9 166 8 Install the reader heater 1 Screw Binding M4x6 1 Connector 2 Cable Clamps CAUTION Be sure to hold down the Reader Heater Harness because it may interfere with moving of the Scanner Box if it is not connected properly x2 9 Install the removed cove...

Page 1138: ... Heater Unit J1 Installation Procedure 10 Remove the Environment Heater Switch Cover and check that the Environment Heater Switch is ON When it is OFF turn it ON CAUTION When removing the cover do not insert a screwdriver in the oval hole F 9 168 11 Install the Environment Heater Switch Cover ...

Page 1139: ...tte Heater Unit X 1 4 Screw Ｗ Sems Round End M3x6 X 1 5 Screw P Tight M3x8 X 1 3 Wire Saddle X 1 2 Heater Connector Cover X 1 F 9 169 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned off before disconnecting the outlet In...

Page 1140: ...e Host Machine Cassettes 1 and 2 Cassette pedestal Cassette 3 and 4 Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Cassette Release Button Cassette Release Button F 9 171 2 Remove the Heater Connector Cover with a flat blade screwdriver 1 Claw 2 Protrusions Claw Heater Connector Cover Protrusion 3 Fit the 3 claws of the Cassette Heater Unit into the holes on the Base Plate CAUTION Be sure that the cl...

Page 1141: ...ws an example of the Cassette Pedestal Follow the same step as for the host machine Connector 5 Install the heater Connector Cover 6 Install the removed Cassettes F 9 174 Checking After the Installation CAUTION When removing the cover be sure not to insert a screwdriver in the elongate hole 1 Remove the Environment Heater Switch Cover 2 Check that the Environment Heater Switch is ON 3 Turn ON if i...

Page 1142: ...ng After the Installation Installation Cassette Heater Unit 37 Checking After the Installation 5 Check that the breaker switch in the back of the main unit is ON 6 Turn ON if it was OFF 7 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet F 9 177 ...

Page 1143: ...alling this equipment before operation Table of Options Combination Voice Guidance Kit Voice Operation Kit Card Reader Utility Tray no no yes yes Available no Unavailable Checking the Contents 3 Screw TP M4x8 Black X 10 4 Keyboard Table Plate X 1 1 Utility Tray Unit X 1 2 Wire Saddle X 5 6 Screw TP M4x10 X 2 5 Screw TP M4x14 X 4 Use when installing the USB Keyboard Use 7 of them F 9 178 Installati...

Page 1144: ...he A part of the Utility Tray remove the Utility Tray Mounting Plate CAUTION To avoid damage do not pull the A part of the Utility Tray too much A F 9 180 F 9 181 4 Remove the 5 Face Seals Removed Face Seal will not be used Face Seal 5 Install the Utility Tray Mounting Plate 5 screws TP M4x8 Black CAUTION Points to Note at Installation If the holes are marked as shown below align the holes marked ...

Page 1145: ...n installing the Keyboard 6 Install the Utility Tray 2 Screws TP M4x8 Black 2 Screws Tighten the screws loosened in step 2 x2 Tighten Tighten When installing the Keyboard 1 Remove the 2 cap covers and install the 5 wire saddles The removed Cap Covers will not be used Cap Cover Wire Saddle F 9 185 F 9 186 ...

Page 1146: ...t the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing F 9 187 F 9 188 Installation Procedure 1 Open the Right Lower Cover The Right Upper Cover opens simultaneously 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right...

Page 1147: ...r caps 2 Screws 5 Claws x2 Claw x5 5 Remove the Rear Cover 2 Rubber caps 2 Screws 1 Claw Claw x2 F 9 191 F 9 192 6 Remove the Connector Cover 1 Screw 7 Remove the 5 connectors of the Cassette Pedestal If the Pedestal is not installed this procedure is not needed 6 Harness Guides 1 Reuse Band Harness Guides Connectors Connectors x7 Reuse Band x5 F 9 193 F 9 194 ...

Page 1148: ...Installation Key Switch Unit A2 Installation Procedure 8 Remove the Rear Lower Cover 2 Rubber caps 2 Screws 2 Claws 2 Hooks x2 Claw Claw x2 Hook Hook F 9 195 9 Remove the Right Rear Cover 3 3 Claws Claw x3 Claw 10 Remove the Right Rear Cover 2 2 Screws x2 F 9 196 F 9 197 ...

Page 1149: ...y Switch Bracket 1 Screw Binding M4x6 F 9 198 F 9 199 13 Install the Key Switch Bracket assembled in the previous procedure 2 Screws use the screw removed in step 11 14 Connect the connector of the host machine with the connector of Key Switch Unit x2 15 Cut the A part of the removed Right Rear Cover 2 in step 10 with nipper etc CAUTION Be sure to remove adequately so that there is no burr A F 9 2...

Page 1150: ...over 1 Screw Rear Cover 2 Screws 2 Claws Left Rear Cover 2 Screws 2 Claws Right Rear Cover 1 3 Screws Right Lower Cover Right Upper Cover Checking after installation 1 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 Set the following service mode level 1 value to 1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL KEY 4 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 5 Make sure that Set ...

Page 1151: ...re X 2 8 Screw Binding M4x20 X 2 7 Wire Saddle X 3 5 Ring Core X 1 6 Cord Guide X 7 12 Support Plate X 1 11 Screw TP M3x6 X 2 Use 2 of them 10 Screw Binding M3x14 X 1 9 Screw Binding M4x14 X 2 Use 1 of them F 9 202 13 Cable Face Seal X 1 14 Card Spacer X 1 CD Guide Voice Guidance Kit Users Guide Voice Operation Kit Users Guide Voice Operation Quick Reference Guide Voice Guidance Guide CD Voice Ope...

Page 1152: ...Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned off before disconnecting the outlet Installation Outline Drawing F 9 204 Installation Procedure 1 Open the Right Lower Cover The Right Upper Cover opens simultaneously 2 Open the...

Page 1153: ...nectors 2 wire Saddle 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles 5 Remove the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable x2 Control Panel Communication Cable USB Cable F 9 207 F 9 208 6 Remove the 2 screws and open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips 7 Hold the grip in 2 places remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while avoiding the removed harness F 9 209 F 9 210 ...

Page 1154: ...l the Voice Operation Board Unit in the Main Controller Roller PCB 1 1 Connector 2 screws 2 Screws that removed in step 8 2 Screws TP M3 6 NOTE Make sure that the connector is installed properly x4 Connector F 9 211 F 9 212 10 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 in the Host Machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sur...

Page 1155: ... a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 B A Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles x2 13 Remove the small cover installed in the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw Claw in 2 places Claw x2 F 9 214 F 9 215 14 Cut the A part of Right Rear Cover 1 with nipper etc CAUTION Be sure to remove adequately so that there is no burr A A 15 Install the Right Rear Co...

Page 1156: ...ht Cover Do not use the removed Cover Seal Face Seal 18 Remove the Speaker Unit Lower from the Speaker Unit 2 screws removed screw will be used in step 20 x2 Speaker Unit Lower F 9 217 F 9 218 19 Install the Speaker Unit Lower 1 Screw Binding M3 14 1 Screw Binding M4 14 x2 M3x14 M4x14 20 Install the Speaker Unit Upper 2 screws screws that removed in step 18 x2 F 9 219 F 9 220 ...

Page 1157: ... the 2 Wire Saddles Do not use the removed Cover Seal Face Seal Wire Saddles 22 Install the Ring Core to both sides of the DVI Cable and remove the cap Do not use the removed cap Cap DVI Cable Ring Core F 9 221 F 9 222 23 Connect both sides of the DVI Cable respectively 24 Pass the DVI Cable through the hole of the Right Rear Cover 1 and close the cover F 9 223 F 9 224 ...

Page 1158: ... is ON 4 Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings Voice Navigation at Startup and make sure that is Select Mode at Startup set 5 Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings and make sure that Tune Microphone is displayed Operation Check When using 1 Press Reset Key and Voice Recognition Button for 3 secs or more 2 In the operation scre...

Page 1159: ...ower X 1 3 Voice Guidance Board Unit X 1 4 Speaker Cable X 1 5 Cord Guide X 7 6 Ring Core X 2 7 Screw Binding M3x16 X 1 8 Screw Binding M4x6 X 1 9 Screw TP M3x6 X 4 10 Screw Binding M4x16 X 2 11 Screw Binding M4x20 X 2 12 Card Spacer X 1 Use 3 of them Use 1 of them F 9 227 13 Support Plate X 1 14 Cable Face Seal X 1 CD GUIDES Voice Guidance kit Users Guide Voice Guidance Guide CD FCC IC Instructio...

Page 1160: ...tems when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned off before disconnecting the outlet Installation Outline Drawing F 9 229 Installation Procedure 1 Open the Right Lower Cover The Right Upper Cover opens simultaneously 2 Open the ...

Page 1161: ...ectors 2 wire Saddle 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles 5 Remove the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable x2 Control Panel Communication Cable USB Cable F 9 232 F 9 233 6 Remove the 2 screws and open the grip in 2 places x2 Grips 7 Hold the grip in 2 places remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while avoiding the removed harness F 9 234 F 9 235 ...

Page 1162: ... 2 Screws x2 9 Install the Voice Guidance Board Unit in the Main Controller PCB 1 1 Connector 4 Screws TP M3 6 NOTE Make sure that the connector is installed properly x4 Connector F 9 236 F 9 237 10 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 in the Host Machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on...

Page 1163: ...a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 B A Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles x2 13 Remove the small cover installed in the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw Claw in 2 places Claw x2 F 9 239 F 9 240 14 Cut the A part of Right Rear Cover 1 with nipper etc CAUTION Be sure to remove adequately so that there is no burr A A 15 Install the Right Rear Cov...

Page 1164: ...Remove the Cover Seal from the Reader Right Cover Do not use the removed Cover Seal Face Seal 18 Install the Speaker Unit lower 1 Screw Binding M3 16 1 Screw Binding M4 16 x2 M3x16 M4x16 F 9 242 F 9 243 19 Install the Speaker Unit Upper 1 Screw Bind M4x6 20 Install the Ring Core to both sides of the Speaker Cable 50mm F 9 244 F 9 245 ...

Page 1165: ...ide as shown in the figure NOTE Do not affix the Cord Guide onto the Face Seals A A F 9 246 F 9 247 NOTE When using in combination with the Copy Card Reader Affix the 2 Cord Guides A as shown in the figure and use the Wire Saddle B included in the Card Reader Attachment Even when used in combination with the Card Reader the routing of the cable is same B A F 9 248 F 8 238 23 Connect both sides of ...

Page 1166: ...utlet 2 Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch 3 Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings and make sure that Use Voice Navigation is ON 4 Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings and make sure that Voice Guide from Speakers is displayed Operation Check During use 1 Press reset key 3 secs or more 2 Press Main Menu in...

Page 1167: ... be used in combination with each other Serial Interface Kit Copy Control Interface Kit Checking the Contents Copy Card Reader F1 1 Card Reader Unit X 1 2 Screw RS tight M4x10 X 1 3 Toothed washer X 1 F 9 252 Card Reader Attachment B3 1 Card Reader Mounting Plate front Unit X 1 2 Card Reader Mounting Plate rear Unit X 1 3 Card Reader Mounting Plate lower Unit X 1 4 Card ReaderRelay Unit X 1 5 Conn...

Page 1168: ...hat display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing F 9 254 Installation Procedure CAUTION After installing the Copy Card Reader F1 input the card number to be used in service mode level 1 on this equipment COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD otherwise the card cannot be recognized even though it is inserted 1 O...

Page 1169: ...ew RS tight M4 2 Screws TP M3 1 Claw Claw x3 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 256 F 9 257 5 Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable x2 Control Panel Communication Cable USB Cable 6 Remove the 2 screws and open the 2 grips x2 Grips F 9 258 F 9...

Page 1170: ...B 1 while avoiding the removed harness 8 Remove the 2 screws and the upper screw of Blanking Cover from the Main Controller PCB 1 Removed screw is used in the procedure 10 x3 F 9 260 F 9 261 9 Remove the screw and rinstall the PCB Spacer Removed screw is used in the procedure 12 10 Install the Card Reader Relay Unit 3 Screws screws removed in step 8 1 Connector x3 F 9 262 F 9 263 ...

Page 1171: ...tep 9 CAUTION Install it in the position where the tie wrap of Card Reader External Relay Harness is inside the Connector Cover F 9 264 F 9 265 13 Install the Main Controller PCB 1 to the host machine CAUTION Lift the handle insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops tilt the grip and install the 2 screws Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Contr...

Page 1172: ...OTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 B A Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles x2 F 9 267 16 Pass the Card Reader External Relay Harness through the Right Rear Cover 1 and install it 1 Screws RS tight M4 2 Screws TP M3 1 Claw 1 Wire Saddle x3 Wire Saddle 17 Close the Right Rea...

Page 1173: ... Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit Lower Cover Groove 20 Remove the Jumper from the connector of Card Reader Unit Removed Jumper will not be used F 9 269 F 9 270 21 Install the Card Reader Unit to the Card Reader Mounting Plate front Unit 1 Toothed Washer 1 Screw RS tight M4x10 1 Wire saddle Toothed Washer Wire Saddle 22 Remove the Rubber Cap and Screw Removed Rubber Cap and Screw will not be us...

Page 1174: ...3x12 x2 25 Connect the Card Reader External Relay Harness to the connector of Card Reader Unit 1 Connector 1 Edge Saddle CAUTION Be sure that the core is inside the Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Connector F 9 273 F 9 274 26 Install the Card Reader Mounting Plate front Unit to the Card Reader Mounting Plate rear 4 Screws TP M3x6 CAUTION Do not pinch the harness x4 27 Remove the 2 covers of Cord Guide 6 F...

Page 1175: ...card number of department can be changed if a request arises from a user Make this setting before the step 3 Change the setting value in service mode level 2 COPIER OPTION FNC SW CARD RNG To enable the setting value turn OFF ON the main power switch After that go through the procedure from step 2 2 Enter the following Service Mode level 1 3 Select COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD and enter the card nu...

Page 1176: ...py Tray J1 1 Copy Tray X 1 Copy Tray J2 1 Copy Tray X 1 F 9 279 F 9 280 Check Items When Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing F 9 281 ...

Page 1177: ...y J2 only Removing of the Wire Tray Preparation Before Installation Copy Tray J2 only CAUTION When installing the Copy Tray J2 the Wire Tray is unnecessary for the machine and it should be removed before installing the Copy Tray J2 Removing of the Wire Tray 1 Pull out the Wire Tray and release it from the 2 hooks as shown in the figure below 2 Grooves F 9 282 2 Remove the Wire Tray F 9 283 ...

Page 1178: ...aw F 9 284 2 Install the Copy Tray 2 Claws 3 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 4 Turn ON the main power switch Setting After Installation 1 Enter Service Mode level 1 2 Select COPIER OPTION ACC OUT TRAY and register 1 3 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 4 Select Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings and check that Delivery Tray Settings m...

Page 1179: ...Contents 1 Inner 2way Tray X 1 2 Insert pin X 1 3 Screw TP M3x6 X 1 4 Second Delivery Full Detection Lever X 1 Inner 2way Tray F1 only F 9 286 Turning Off the Main Power Switch Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off then disconnect the power plug In...

Page 1180: ...ort from the host machine using flat blade screwdriver 1 Claw 2 Turn over the Inner 2way Tray Support and install to the host machine 1 Screw TP M3x6 F 9 288 3 Insert the Inner 2way Tray to 2 slots of the Delivery Assembly and hook it to the slot of the Inner 2way Tray Support NOTE Insert the Inner 2way Tray to the slot of the Delivery Assembly and hook it to the Second Tray Support so that boss i...

Page 1181: ...plug of the host machine to the power outlet 6 Turn ON the main power switch F 9 290 Setting after installation 1 Enter Service Mode level 1 2 COPIER OPTION ACC IN TRAY and set 1 3 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 4 Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings Output Tray Settings and check that menu is added 5 Select copy to the Tray B and perform test copy 6 Check that a...

Page 1182: ...RAM x 1 Pre Check 1 Check the memory capacity Service Mode level 1 COPIER DISAPLAY ACC STS RAM 2 Exit the service mode F 9 291 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off then disconnect the power plug Installa...

Page 1183: ...cedure Installation Procedure 1 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Claws x2 x5 Claws Rubber Caps Rubber Caps 2 If the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable F 9 293 F 9 294 3 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover 4 If FAX is installed disconnect the FAX cable F 9 295 F 9 296 ...

Page 1184: ...crews Make sure to tilt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 2 is installed properly x2 Grip 8 Install the removed cover and the cable Connect the FAX cable If the FAX is installed Left Rear Sub Cover 2 Screws Reader Communication Cable if the Reader is installed Left Reader Cover 2 Screws 2 Rubber Caps 9 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the ...

Page 1185: ...e to install the license after installing the Image Analysis Board Checking the Contents Use 2 of them 1 Image Data Analyzer Board x 1 2 PCB Spacer x 4 4 Screw TP M3x6 x 4 5 Screw Binding M3x4 x 1 3 Image Data Analyzer Board Support Plate x 1 CD Guides License Access Number Certificate Document Scan Code Analyzer for MEAP CD FCC IC sheet only for USA Europe Notice for Delivered Installation sheet ...

Page 1186: ...Installation Procedure 1 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Claws x2 x5 Claws Rubber Caps Rubber Caps 2 In the reader is installed disconnect the Reader Communication Cable F 9 302 F 9 303 3 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook Hook Left Rear Sub Cover 4 If FAX is installed disconnect the FAX cable F 9 304 F 9 305 ...

Page 1187: ...oller PCB 2 2 Screws x2 Grip 6 Remove the 4 Screws 3 Screws TP M3 Removed 2 screws will be used in step 8 Another screw will not be used 1 Screw with Washer Removed screw is no longer used W sems x4 F 9 306 F 9 307 7 Install the 2 PCB Spacers 8 Install the Image Data Analyzer Board Support Plate 2 Screws TP M3 screw removed in step 6 1 Screw Binding M3x4 x3 Binding F 9 308 F 9 309 ...

Page 1188: ...ontroller PCB 2 is installed properly x2 Grip F 9 310 F 9 311 11 Install the removed cover and the cable Connect the FAX cable If the FAX is installed Install the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw Install the Reader Communication Cable if the Reader is installed Install the Left Reader Cover 2 Screws 2 Rubber Caps Checking after Installation 1 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outl...

Page 1189: ...ace Kit A1 1 CC VI Cable X 1 5 IA Harness Protection Sheet X 1 3 Washer large X 2 4 Hexagonal Screw Washer Small Nut X 2 Do not use a Nut 2 D SUB Support Plate X 1 F 9 312 Serial Intreface Kit K1 K2 7 Support Plate X 1 8 RS Conversion Cable Long X 1 9 Screw TP M3x6 X 3 K2 only K2 only K2 only 1 Serial RS Conversion Board X 1 2 IA Harness Protection Sheet X 1 3 RS Conversion Cable X 1 4 Hexagonal S...

Page 1190: ...Outline Drawing Installation Procedure Preparation 1 Open the Right Lower Cover The Right Upper Cover opens simultaneously F 9 314 F 9 315 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw RS tightening M4 2 Screws TP M3 1 Claw Claw x3 4 When the Reader is equipped remove the Reader Power Supply Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable...

Page 1191: ...ace Kit K1 K2 5 Disconnect the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable x2 Control Panel Communication Cable USB Cable 6 Remove the 2 screws and open the Grips in 2 areas x2 Grips F 9 318 F 9 319 7 Hold the 2 Grips While avoiding the removed harness remove the Main Controller PCB 1 Installing the Serial Interface Kit K1 K2 1 Remove the Face Cover from the Main Controller PCB 1 Removed Face ...

Page 1192: ...ol 3 Affix the IA Harness Protection Sheet to the Main Controller PCB 1 NOTE Because the working space is limited use scale etc for cleaning After affixing the I Harness Protection Sheet be sure to press it with scale etc to prevent coming off Affixing Side 4 Remove the 1 screw and install the PCB Spacer Removed screw is used in the procedure 6 F 9 322 F 9 323 5 Connect the RS Conversion Cable to ...

Page 1193: ... used x2 2 Clean the affixing side Controller Box Frame with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 3 Affix the IA Harness Protection Sheet to the Main Controller PCB 1 NOTE Because the working space is limited use scale etc for cleaning After affixing the I Harness Protection Sheet be sure to press it with scale etc to prevent coming off Affixing Side F 9 326 F 9 327 4 Put the CC VI cable through...

Page 1194: ...lt the grip slowly on both sides simultaneously Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly Grips x2 F 9 330 2 Install the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable 3 When the Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 B A ...

Page 1195: ...Only 1 pc is used 8 Wire saddle white 3 pcs Only 2 pcs are used 9 Plug cover 1 pc 10 Screw Binding M4x4 1 pc 11 Wire saddle black 5 pcs 12 AC output connector 1 pc 13 Screw Binding M4x6 1 pc 14 Toothed washer 1 pc F 9 332 Product Name Safety regulations require the product s name to be registered In some regions where this product is sold the following name may be registered instead F246338 Check ...

Page 1196: ...se the paper deck from the host machine and then press down the latch plate of the paper deck to open the compartment F 9 333 F 9 334 3 Detach the right cover of the paper deck in the direction of the arrow shown 3 Screws x3 4 Detach the rear cover of the paper deck 6 Screws M4x8 4 pcs M3x8 2 pcs NOTE When the rear cover is removed loosen the screw shown by an arrow in the figure if it is difficul...

Page 1197: ... F 9 337 F 9 338 7 Attach the supplied cable protection bushing to the hole on the top panel of the paper deck 8 Place the heater unit under the top panel of the paper deck and then take the connector out of the hole on the top plate 9 Insert the 2 hooks of the heater unit into the holes on the top plate of the paper deck and then secure the heater unit to the main body of the paper deck 1 Screw w...

Page 1198: ...r connector to the panel mount 11 Remove the blindfold plate from the power cord mount of the paper deck 1 Screw NOTE Removed screw and blindfold cover are no longer reused x1 F 9 341 F 9 342 12 Install the supplied AC input connector in order of A B B A x1 13 Attach the 5 wire saddles black to the rear side panel of the paper deck as shown x5 F 9 343 F 9 344 ...

Page 1199: ...s in the 2 wire saddles on the power cord mount and then connect the connector x2 F 9 345 F 9 346 16 Reattach the external covers of the paper deck in the following sequence 1 Top cover 2 screws M4x8 2 Right cover 3 screws M4x8 3 Rear cover 4 screws M4x8 and 2 screws M3x8 4 Front upper cover 1 connector and 2 screws M4X8 17 Manually slide the paper deck to the left to place it aside of the host ma...

Page 1200: ...ear panel of the paper deck 20 Remove 1 screw bind head M4x4 to detach the plate x1 F 9 348 F 9 349 21 Attach two wire saddles white to the rear panel of the host machine and then connect the AC cable connector to the power cord mount of the heater Route the AC cable as shown and then connect the other connector plug to the receptacle on the rear panel of the host machine F 9 350 ...

Page 1201: ...he supplied plug cover at rear side of the host machine with 1 screw bind head M4x4 removed at the step 20 x1 To ensure smooth connection of the heater power connectors explain to the user that any obstacle that can prevent the paper deck from opening should not be placed in the hatched area 1 Host machine 2 Paper deck A Front 1 2 A F 9 351 F 9 352 ...

Page 1202: ...ocedure refer to the Service Manual Installation procedures for the USB Device Port E1 and USB Device Port E2 and USB Device Port E3 are similar Illustrations and photo for the Image Reader and Printer Cover are mixed but the steps are similar When installing the Multimedia Reader Writer or Card Reader sales company s option the USB Device Port must be installed beforehand The Multimedia Reader Wr...

Page 1203: ...Screw 8 Screw Bind M4 6 X 9 9 DP Bottom Cover X 1 10 DP Support Plate X 1 11 DP Mounting Reinforcing Plate X 1 12 DP Upper Cover Unit X 1 TP Round End M3 6 X 10 Use 8 of them Use 6 of them Do not use with the Multimedia Reader Writer A2 or Card Reader F 9 354 14 DP Mounting Plate W X 1 15 DP Shield Plate X 2 16 Paper Feed Sheet W X 1 17 DP USB Cable X 1 18 Paper Feed Sheet P X 1 20 USB Cable X 1 1...

Page 1204: ...nly 25 DP Base Cover X 1 27 Wire Saddle Large X 1 28 Wire Saddle Small X 1 USB Device Port E3 Only CAUTION 13 Included in the package as a unit in the case of USB Device Port E1 E2 only 25 26 27 28 DP Lower Cover Unit is divided into 4 parts and included in the package in the case of USB Device Port E3 only CD Guides FCC IC instruction sheet F 9 356 In case of DADF 1 DP Fireproof Sheet X 1 2 Cushi...

Page 1205: ...e B X 1 USB Device Port E2 Only USB Device Port E2 Only USB Device Port E2 Only USB Device Port E2 Only USB Device Port E1 E2 Only F 9 358 32 Edge Saddle X 1 USB Device Port E3 Only 31 DP Mounting Plate C X 1 USB Device Port E3 Only 26 DP Base X 1 USB Device Port E3 Only USB Device Port E3 Only USB Device Port E3 Only 29 DP Base Cover X 1 30 DP Support Plate C X 1 USB Device Port E3 Only USB Devic...

Page 1206: ...Multimedia Card Slot X 1 2 Card Slot X 1 3 Card Slot X 1 4 USB Cable X 1 5 Screw TP M3x6 X 4 6 Multimedia Label X 1 7 Slot Holder X 1 9 Media Reader Cover X 1 8 Media Reader Mounting Plate Unit X 1 A2 4 pcs A3 7 pcs 4 pcs used A3 only A3 only CD Guides FCC IC instruction sheet F 9 360 Installation Procedure Installing the USB Device Port In case of Printer Cover Unit 1 Move the Control Panel in th...

Page 1207: ...SB Device Port 3 Remove the Top Left Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Hooks x2 Hook Rubber Cap 4 Move the Control Panel Base Cover and remove the Printer Model Front Cover 1 Screw TP on the Control Panel Base Cover 2 Screws RS Tightening 4 Hook x2 Hook F 9 363 F 9 364 5 Remove the Top Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Hooks x2 Hook Rubber Cap 6 Remove the Top Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 3 Hooks x...

Page 1208: ...t E1 E2 E3 Multimedia Reader Writer A2 A3 Installation Procedure Installing the USB Device Port 7 Disconnect the USB Cable and route it as shown in the figure 2 Screws The removed screws will not be used 1 Wire Saddle DP Cable Guide x2 F 9 367 8 Remove the Harness from 5 Wire Saddles A and then route it around 4 Wire Saddles B and 1 Edge Saddle C x5 x5 B C A F 9 368 ...

Page 1209: ...nstallation Procedure Installing the USB Device Port 9 Connect the DP USB Cable 2 Bosses 2 Screws TP M3x6 DP Cable Guide 3 Wire Saddles NOTE Secure the 2 USB Cables in place using the 2 Wire Saddles A Boss x3 x2 A F 9 369 10 Install the DP Mounting Reinforcing Plate 1 Boss 1 Screw RS Tightening M3x8 5 Boss 11 Remove the sheet on the Printer Model Front Cover 12 Cut off the Face Cover F 9 370 F 1 3...

Page 1210: ...odel Front Cover and return the Control Panel Cover to its original position 4 Hooks 2 Screws RS Tightening 1 Screw TP on the Control Panel Base Cover 16 Return the Control Panel 17 Install the Top Left Cover and Top Right Cover 5 Hooks each 2 Screws Binding each 2 Rubber Caps each NOTE Steps 18 and 19 apply to USB Device Port E3 only 18 Assemble the DP Base and the DB Base Cover 2 Bosses 4 Hooks ...

Page 1211: ... the USB Device Port 19 Install the Wire Saddle to the DP Lower Cover Unit which was assembled in the previous step Install the Wire Saddle Small on the upper side Install the Wire Saddle Large on the bottom side Wire Saddle Large Wire Saddle Small F 9 373 20 Install the DP Support Plate and the DP Mounting Plate P to the DP Lower Cover Unit 2 Bosses each 2 Screws Binding M4x6 each Boss x4 DP Moun...

Page 1212: ...ader Writer A2 A3 Installation Procedure Installing the USB Device Port 21 Install the DP Board 3 Screws TP M3x6 x3 F 9 375 22 Insert the DP Support Plate to the Control Panel Unit and install the DP Lower Cover Unit using a stubby screwdriver 2 Bosses 2 Screws TP M3x6 2 Screws Binding M4x6 NOTE Be sure to tighten the 2 screws TP M3x6 on the DP Support Plate first x4 Boss Hole Boss F 9 376 ...

Page 1213: ... 1 Connector NOTE Be sure not to pass the harness through the Wire Saddle on the lower side 24 Put and connect the 2 USB Cables through the hole of the DP Lower Cover Unit 1 Wire Saddle lower side 1 USB Cable with the Plate 1 Screw TP M3x6 1 USB Cable NOTE Be sure not to pass the cables through the Wire Saddle on the upper side Be sure to connect the USB Cable with the Plate first Be sure to USB C...

Page 1214: ...he release paper for the Paper Feed Sheet P to A area and affix to the DP Bottom Cover as shown in the figure NOTE When affixing it be sure to align it with the marking lines and push the B part against the C part Be sure that the Paper Feed Sheet P is on the DP Bottom Cover Paper Feed Sheet P Release Paper A Marking Line B C F 9 380 F 9 381 26 Check the position to install the DP Bottom Cover and...

Page 1215: ...rotrusion of the DP Bottom Cover and attach the DP Bottom Cover while remove the remaining release paper from Paper Feed Sheet P 4 Claws CAUTION Be sure that the A part is inserted into the Control Panel Unit Be careful not to trap cables with the B part Be careful not to trap the harness and the USB Cable with the DP Lower Cover and the DP Bottom Cover Make sure that the Paper Feed Sheet P does n...

Page 1216: ...w Transparent Cover F 9 384 NOTE When installing the Multimedia Reader Writer A2 simultaneously be sure to refer to step 3 and later of Installing the Multimedia Reader Writer A2 before installing the DP Upper Cover 29 Install the DP Upper Cover in the direction of the arrow 1 Protrusion 2 Hooks 2 Claws x2 Claw Claw Protrusion Hook NOTE When installing the Card Reader sales company s option simult...

Page 1217: ...over the DP Sheet for Europe with the plain side up and install it while folding the bar code part Rib A Rib F 9 386 1 DP Fireproof Sheet 2 Cushions 1 DP Sheet for Europe 1 Transparent Cover 2 hooks and 1 claw Hook DP Sheet DP Fireproof Sheet Transparent Cover Claw Cushion 31 Remove the Protection Sheet on the Transparent Cover 32 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 33 T...

Page 1218: ...ion Procedure Installing the USB Device Port In case of DADF 1 Move the Control Panel in the direction of the arrow and open the DADF 2 Remove the Reader Front Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 2 Protrusions 1 Hook x2 Hook Rubber Cap Rubber Cap Protrusion Protrusion F 9 388 F 9 389 3 Remove the Face Sheet The removed Face Sheet will not be used 4 Route the harness as shown in the figure 2 Wire Saddles ...

Page 1219: ...Installation Procedure Installing the USB Device Port 5 Disconnect the USB Cable and route it as shown in the figure 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in later step 3 Wire Saddles DP Cable Guide x3 x2 F 9 392 6 Connect the DP USB Cable 2 Bosses 2 Screws The screws removed in previous step 5 Wire Saddles DP Cable Guide x5 x2 Boss NOTE Make sure that cables are inside the DP Cable Guide F 9 3...

Page 1220: ...riter A2 A3 Installation Procedure Installing the USB Device Port 7 Install the DP Mounting Reinforcing Plate 1 Boss 1 Screw Binding M4x6 Boss 8 Install the 2 Shield Plates 1 Protrusion each 2 Screws TP M3x6 each x4 Protrusion F 9 395 F 9 396 9 Install the Reader Front Cover and close the DADF 1 Hook 2 Protrusions 2 Screws 2 Rubber Caps Hook Rubber Cap Rubber Cap x2 Protrusion Protrusion F 9 397 ...

Page 1221: ...3 only 10 Assemble the DP Base and the DB Base Cover 2 Bosses 4 Hooks NOTE Align 2 hooks A and bosses long holes to the DP Base and then insert them The installation will be difficult if the positioning holes for bosses are aligned first Hook A Hook Boss Hook Hook A F 9 398 11 Install the Wire Saddle to the DP Lower Cover Unit which was assembled in the previous step Install the Wire Saddle Small ...

Page 1222: ...ion USB Device Port E1 E2 E3 Multimedia Reader Writer A2 A3 Installation Procedure Installing the USB Device Port 12 Install the DP Support Plate and the DP Mounting Plate W to the DP Lower Cover Unit 2 Bosses each 2 Screws Binding M4x6 each x4 Boss DP Mounting Plate W DP Support Plate Boss F 9 400 13 Install the DP PCB 3 Screws TP M3x6 x3 F 9 401 ...

Page 1223: ... Insert the DP Support Plate to the Control Panel Unit and install the DP Lower Cover Unit using a stubby screwdriver 2 Bosses 2 Screws TP M3x6 3 Screws Binding M4x6 NOTE Be sure to tighten the 2 screws TP M3x6 on the DP Support Plate first x5 Boss Hole Boss F 9 402 15 Put and connect the harness through the hole of the DP Lower Cover Unit 1 Wire Saddle upper side 1 Connector NOTE Be sure not to p...

Page 1224: ... 16 Put and connect the 2 USB Cables through the hole of the DP Lower Cover Unit 1 Wire Saddle lower side 1 USB Cable with the Plate 1 Screw TP M3x6 1 USB Cable NOTE Be sure not to pass the cables through the Wire Saddle on the upper side Be sure to connect the USB Cable with the Plate first Be sure to USB Cable the other connector next to the USB Cable with the Plate CAUTION Be careful not to tra...

Page 1225: ... the USB Device Port 17 Remove the release paper small on the Paper Feed Sheet W and affix it to the DP Bottom Cover NOTE When affixing it be sure to align it with the marking lines and push the A part against the B part Paper Feed Sheet W Release Paper Small Release Paper Large Marking Line B A F 9 406 F 9 407 18 Check the position to install the DP Bottom Cover and wipe the affixing surface of t...

Page 1226: ...tom Cover into the hole and install the DP Bottom Cover while removing the release paper large of the Paper Feed Sheet W 4 Claws CAUTION Be sure that the A part is inserted into the Control Panel Unit Be careful not to trap cables with the B part Be careful not to trap the harness and the USB Cable with the DP Lower Cover and the DP Bottom Cover Make sure that the Paper Feed Sheet W does not peel ...

Page 1227: ...w Transparent Cover F 9 410 NOTE When installing the Multimedia Reader Writer A2 simultaneously be sure to refer to step 3 and later of Installing the Multimedia Reader Writer A2 before installing the DP Upper Cover 22 Install the DP Upper Cover in the direction of the arrow 1 Protrusion 2 Hooks 2 Claws x2 Claw Claw Protrusion Hook NOTE When installing the Card Reader sales company s option simult...

Page 1228: ...over the DP Sheet for Europe with the plain side up and install it while folding the bar code part Rib A Rib F 9 412 1 DP Fireproof Sheet 2 Cushions 1 DP Sheet for Europe 1 Transparent Cover 2 hooks and 1 claw Hook DP Sheet DP Fireproof Sheet Transparent Cover Claw Cushion 24 Remove the Protection Sheet on the Transparent Cover 25 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 26 T...

Page 1229: ...er the procedure is the same NOTE This step is not necessary when installing simultaneously with the USB Device Port 1 Remove the following parts 1 Transparent Cover 1 claw and 2 hooks 1 DP Sheet 2 Cushions Do not use the removed Cushions 1 DP Fireproof Sheet Do not use the removed DP Fireproof Sheet DP Fireproof Sheet Hook Cushion DP Sheet Transparent Cover Claw F 9 414 2 Install the Card Reader ...

Page 1230: ...ng the USB Device Port simultaneously remove the Protection Sheet on the Transparent Cover 5 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 6 Turn ON the main power switch F 9 416 7 If installing simultaneously with the USB Device Port connect the memory media to the USB slot and perform the operation check NOTE Refer to the Operation Check USB Device Port E1 E2 E3 Multimedia Reade...

Page 1231: ...P Upper Cover 2 Claws 1 Protrusion 2 Hooks Protrusion Claw x2 Claw Hook NOTE When installing simultaneously with the USB Device Port start the procedure from step 3 3 Remove the Card Slot closed from the DP Upper Cover and attach the Card Slot F 9 418 F 9 419 4 Install Multimedia Card Slot and Slot Holder together 4 Screws TP M3x6 x4 Multimedia Card Slot Slot Holder 5 Install the DP Upper Cover in...

Page 1232: ...stalling the Multimedia Reader Writer A2 6 Connect the USB Cable x2 7 Remove the release sheet of the DP Fireproof Sheet and affix the sheet by aligning the 3 ribs and pushing it against the rib A Rib A Rib F 9 422 F 9 423 8 Affix the Multimedia Label to the back side of the DP Sheet for Europe as shown in the figure 9 Install the DP Sheet for Europe and the Transparent Cover 2 Hooks 1 Claw DP She...

Page 1233: ...ration Check USB Device Port E1 E2 E3 Multimedia Reader Writer A2 to perform the connection check of the memory media Operation Check USB Device Port E1 E2 E3 Multimedia Reader Writer A2 NOTE Connect a USB memory device to the USB Device Port E1 E2 E3 and perform the operation check Memory media including SD card Memory Stick and CF card can be connected to the Multimedia Reader Writer A2 Connect ...

Page 1234: ...A3 Operation Check USB Device Port E1 E2 E3 Multimedia Reader W 4 Make the following selection Scan and Store Memory Media Memory Media A 5 Set originals to Copyboard and press the Scan button Then press the Start button on the Control Panel F 9 427 F 9 428 6 After scanning of the original is completed press Start Storing Confirm that data is stored in the media and press Main Menu on the Control ...

Page 1235: ...ration Check USB Device Port E1 E2 E3 Multimedia Reader W Reading Check 7 Make the following selection from Main Menu Access Stored Files Memory Media Memory Media A 8 Select the files stored in step 4 to 6 and then press the Print button F 9 430 F 9 431 9 Press the Start Printing button and print the file Then check that the file is printed correctly 10 Press the Main Menu button on the Control P...

Page 1236: ...Port E1 E2 E3 Multimedia Reader Writer A2 A3 Operation Check USB Device Port E1 E2 E3 Multimedia Reader W Memory Media Removal 11 Press the Mount Mark in the bottom right Then select the memory media to be removed and press the Remove button 12 Press the OK button Then check that the Mount Mark is not indicated in the bottom right on the Main Menu screen F 9 434 F 9 435 ...

Page 1237: ...will come off the cassette pedestal as when it is moved over a step Be sure to lift the cassette pedestal 1 Turn OFF the main power supply of the main body 2 Unplug the power plug of the main body 3 In the case that the Cassette Pedestal is installed lift it off from the floor by turning the 4 adjusters on it with a screwdriver 4 When moving the machine be sure to push the position indicated in th...

Page 1238: ...tion x2 x2 F 9 437 7 Put paper on the copyboard glass 8 Remove the Toner Container Drum Unit and Developing Assembly 9 In the case that the floor surface is either warped or uneven execute the ITB equilibrium position detection 9 1 Check that the main body is in standby state 9 2 Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ITB INIT Level 1 This service mode w...

Page 1239: ... TYPE 10 Standard HDD Removable HDD Kit HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit p 9 310 to p 9 328 TYPE 11 Option HDD 1TB Removable HDD Kit HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit p 9 329 to p 9 348 T 9 4 Points to Note Regarding Data Backup Export Before performing work that will result in the loss of data inform the system administrator of the inevitable loss asking him to make a backup or export of importa...

Page 1240: ...ne using a login service such as SSO H Single Sign On H before using this product you must select the login service again using SMS Service Management Service after restarting the machine For more information on using SMS see the e Manual MEAP T 9 6 Making a Backup of the Data reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when the HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit C Series...

Page 1241: ... Download 11 Following the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file Set a distinctive name for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application After you download the disabled license file to your PC click Delete Click Yes in a confirmation window for license deletion 12 Return to the MEAP Application Management page click Uninstall button of the...

Page 1242: ...ters in 2 bytes using the Kana Kanji Katakana alphanumeric character mark and code input modes A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the alphanumeric character and mark 1 byte modes The voice sound symbol and the semi voice sound symbol entered in the Katakana 1 byte mode are counted up as one 1 byte character Backup method of User inbox and Advanced Box document data 1 Select Settings ...

Page 1243: ...main power switch is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned off before disconnecting the outlet F 9 439 Installation Procedure 1 Assemble the option HDD 1TB 1 Option HDD 1 HDD Support Pate 4 Dust prevention Dumpers 4 Spacers 4 Screws W sems M3x14 NOTE When tightening the screen be su...

Page 1244: ...cing up Make sure that A part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector A Connector Label F 9 442 2 Affix the gasket to the place shown in the figure below CAUTION Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label free metal surface of the HDD surface Gasket Screw hole HDD Connector side F 9 443 3 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 4 Open the HDD Lid behind the Right Rear Cover...

Page 1245: ...le 6 Put the Signal Cable and the Power Cable aside so that they are not pinched between the Controller Box and the HDD Unit F 9 446 F 9 447 7 Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below 2 Screws x2 8 Remove the HDD 160GB installed as standard from the removed HDD Unit Removed HDD 160GB will not be used 2 Screws Removed screw will be used in step 9 x2 F 9 448 F 9 449 ...

Page 1246: ... of Host machine 1 If both PC and the machine are on turn them off 2 Connect the PC and the machine using an Ethernet cable 3 Turn on the PC 4 Start up the machine in download mode safe mode 3 Selecting the System Software 1 Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used 2 Start up the SST 3 Click Register Firmware 4 Select the drive in which the System Softwar...

Page 1247: ...tainer X 1 10 Shutdown Caution Label X 1 11 Connector Fixing Block X 2 12 Conversion Connector X 2 F 9 451 Use 6 of them Use 2 of them 16 HDD Drawer Unit x 1 17 Screw R round head TP M3x6 X 9 18 Screw P Tight M3x8 X 4 19 R HDD Label X 1 13 Signal Cable 660mm Red X 1 14 IV Cable X 1 15 Power Cable 650mm X 1 FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow FK2 8432 or A Cont Sig FK2 8453 or A HDD Pow1 A HDD Sig1 Check Items ...

Page 1248: ...le and Power Supply Cable 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open the Right Upper Cover simultaneously 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw RS tight M4 2 Screws TP M3 1 Claw Claw x3 F 9 453 F 9 454 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles 5 Remove th...

Page 1249: ...llation TYPE 2 Installation Procedure Removing the HDD Unit Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable 6 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable 7 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook Hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 457 F 9 458 8 Remove the Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 1 Claw x2 claw F 9 459 ...

Page 1250: ...le avoiding the harness 2 Screws x2 Harness NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Harness F 9 461 F 9 460 10 Remove the Controller Cover 11 Screws loosen 11 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Fan Cable 1 Edge Saddle 3 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle x2 x4 P...

Page 1251: ...it Removed Cable Cover and screw will not be used 1 Screw F 9 464 F 9 465 14 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable Removed Signal Cable and Power Cable will not be used When the Cable Cover is removed 2 Edge Saddles 6 Wire Saddles 2 Connectors Wire Saddle Connector Wire Saddle Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable Signal Cable x2 x8 When the Cable Cover is not removed 2 Edge Saddles 5 Wire Sad...

Page 1252: ...t be used 16 Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below 2 Screws Removed screw will not be used x2 F 9 468 F 9 469 17 Remove the fixed HDD from the removed HDD Unit Removed plate and screw will not be used 2 Screws x2 Assembling and Installing the Removable HDD 1 Remove the HDD from the HDD Support Plate Use the installed HDD 160GB removed in Removing the HDD Unit Signal Cable ...

Page 1253: ...ector Plate and HDD HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate Anti vibration Damper F 9 472 x4 HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate F 9 473 CAUTION Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate opposite direc...

Page 1254: ... Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly resulting in poor contact F 9 476 x2 Hole Boss F 9 477 5 Install the HDD Cover 1 Claw 1 Screw TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw 6 Install the HDD H...

Page 1255: ...ite down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in the figure Serial No HDD No XXXXXXXX 9 Install the HDD Door Guide 2 Claws Claw x2 F 9 480 F 9 481 CAUTION Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate F 9 482 10 Install the HDD Lock Plate 2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts 2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lo...

Page 1256: ...ded in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw Hole Boss 12 Remove the HDD Rear Cover Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used 2 screws Removed screw will be used in step 17 x2 F 9 484 F 9 485 13 Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up remove the lower Drawer Cable Slot 2 2 Screws 2 Springs 2 Washers The removed springs and washers will be used in step 16 x2 Was...

Page 1257: ...e FK2 8453 or A HDD Pow1 A HDD Sig1 of HDD Drawer Unit 2 Screws 2 Springs 2 Washers Use the parts removed in step 13 Washer Spring Screw IV Cable x2 F 9 488 F 9 489 17 Install the HDD Drawer Unit 2 Screws Use the screw removed in step 12 x2 18 Fix the cable of the Drawer Unit 3 Wire saddles NOTE Close the A part of unused wire saddle and edge saddle Short Signal Cable and Power Cable will not be u...

Page 1258: ...w1 A HDD Sig1 1 Edge Saddle 3 Wire Saddles 2 Connectors 1 Cable Retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle Connector x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable 20 Install the Controller Cover 11 Screws F 9 492 21 Install the HDD Blanking Plate to Slot 1 left side 2 Screws TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 22 Install the HDD t...

Page 1259: ... 2 Rubber Caps Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw Reader Communication Cable when reader is installed Left Rear Cover 2 Screws 2 Rubber Caps F 9 495 27 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 B A Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddle...

Page 1260: ...cer X 4 5 Screw W sems M3x14 X 4 6 Screw TP M3x6 X 2 7 Gasket X 1 CD Guides Notice for FCC IC F 9 497 Removable HDD Kit Use 1 of them Use 1 of them Use 1 of them Use 1 of them Use 1 of them 1 Hinge Shaft Stopper X 2 2 HDD Handle X 2 3 HDD Connector Plate X 2 8 HDD Lock Plate Shaft X 2 4 HDD Cover X 2 5 HDD Blanking Plate X 1 6 HDD Door Guide X 1 7 HDD Lock Plate X 1 9 HDD Lid Retainer X 1 10 Shutd...

Page 1261: ...or A Cont Pow FK2 8432 or A Cont Sig FK2 8453 or A HDD Pow1 A HDD Sig1 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned off before disconnecting the outlet F 9 499 Installation Procedure Removing the HDD Unit Signa...

Page 1262: ...Cable 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles 5 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Claws x2 x5 claw F 9 502 F 9 503 6 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable 7 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook Hook Left Rear Sub Cover F...

Page 1263: ...DD Unit Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable 8 Remove the Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 1 Claw x2 claw 9 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 Screws x2 Harness F 9 506 F 9 507 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Harness F 9 508 10 Remove the Controller Cover 11 Screws loosen F 9 509 ...

Page 1264: ...Supply Cable 11 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Fan Cable 1 Edge Saddle 3 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 510 12 Open the HDD Lid 1 Screw Removed screw will not be used 13 When the Cable Cover is installed remove it Removed Cable Cover and screw will not be used 1 Screw F 9 511 F...

Page 1265: ...dles 6 Wire Saddles 2 Connectors Wire Saddle Connector Wire Saddle Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable Signal Cable x2 x8 When the Cable Cover is not removed 2 Edge Saddles 5 Wire Saddles 2 Connectors x2 x7 Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Connector Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable Signal Cable F 9 513 F 9 514 When the Cable Cover is removed 15 Remove the 2 Wire Saddles Removed wire saddles will not be ...

Page 1266: ...g the Removable HDD Kit Installing the Removable HDD Kit 1 Install the HDD Door Guide 2 Claws Claw x2 CAUTION Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate F 9 518 F 9 517 2 Install the HDD Lock Plate 2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts 2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Hinge Shaft Stoppers F 9 519 ...

Page 1267: ...e Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw Hole Boss 4 Remove the HDD Rear Cover Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used 2 Screws Removed screw will be used in step 9 x2 F 9 520 F 9 521 5 Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up remove the lower Drawer Cable Slot 2 2 Screws 2 Springs 2 Washers The removed springs and washers will be used in step 8 x2 Washer Spring Sc...

Page 1268: ...or A HDD Pow1 A HDD Sig1 of HDD Drawer Unit 2 Screws 2 Springs 2 Washers Use the parts removed in step 5 Washer Spring Screw IV Cable x2 F 9 524 F 9 525 9 Install the HDD Drawer Unit 2 Screws Use the screw removed in step 4 x2 10 Fix the cable of the Drawer Unit 3 Wire Saddles NOTE Close the A part of unused wire saddle and edge saddle Short Signal Cable and Power Cable will not be used Fix the un...

Page 1269: ... 9 528 Assembling and Installing the Option HDD 1 Assemble the option HDD 1TB 1 Option HDD enclosed with option HDD 1 HDD Support Plate enclosed with option HDD 1 HDD Connector Plate enclosed with removable HDD Kit 4 Vibration prevention Dumpers enclosed with option HDD 4 Spacers enclosed with option HDD 4 Screws W sems M3x14 enclosed with option HDD NOTE When tightening the screen be sure to alig...

Page 1270: ...in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD Screw hole Screw hole Connector Label F 9 531 2 Affix the gasket to the place shown in the figure below CAUTION Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label free metal surface of the HDD surface Gasket HDD Connector side Screw hole F 9 532 3 Insta...

Page 1271: ...nnector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly resulting in poor contact F 9 534 x2 Hole Boss F 9 535 5 Install the HDD Cover 1 Claw 1 Screw TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw 6 Install the HDD Hand...

Page 1272: ... for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in the figure Serial No HDD No XXXXXXXX 9 Install the HDD Blanking Plate to Slot 1 left side 2 screws TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 538 F 9 539 10 Install the HDD to Slot 2 right side 11 Close the HDD Lid 12 Restore the Controller Box 2 Screws or 3 Sc...

Page 1273: ...must be installed 2 Cross Ethernet Cable 2 Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1 If both PC and the machine are on turn them off 2 Connect the PC and the machine using an Ethernet cable 3 Turn on the PC 4 Start up the machine in download mode safe mode 3 Selecting the System Software 1 Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is ...

Page 1274: ...ticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents Option HDD 160GB 1 HDD Support Pate X 1 2 HDD X 1 3 Vibration prevention Dump...

Page 1275: ...LED Board Small X 1 14 Mirroring Board or Encryption Board X 1 9 Signal Cable 340mm Red X 1 FK2 8434 or A HDD Sig1 10 Signal Cable 370mm Blue X 1 FK2 8441 or A HDD Sig2 FK2 8467 or A HDD Pow1 FM4 0840 or A LED Sig FK2 7400 or A LED FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 11 Power Cable 320mm X 1 12 LED Cable 290mm 7 pin X 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin X 1 F 9 544 24 Wire saddle Middle X 1 22 Wire saddle Sma...

Page 1276: ...in which no Encryption Board is installed 1 Execute the following service mode level 1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL HD CRYP Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned off before disconnecting the outlet Installati...

Page 1277: ... of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector A Connector Label F 9 548 2 Affix the gasket to the place shown in the figure below CAUTION Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label free metal surface of the HDD surface Gasket Screw hole HDD Connector side F 9 549 Removing and Installing the HDD Unit 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open the Right Upper Cover simultaneous...

Page 1278: ...er is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles 5 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Claws x2 x5 claw F 9 552 F 9 553 6 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable 7 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 554 F 9 555 ...

Page 1279: ...nstalling the HDD Unit 8 Remove the Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 1 Claw x2 claw 9 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 Screws x2 Harness F 9 556 F 9 557 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Harness F 9 558 10 Remove the Controller Cover 11 Screws loosen F 9 559 ...

Page 1280: ...e the Signal Cable and the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Fan Cable 1 Edge Saddle 3 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 560 12 Open the HDD Lid 1 Screw Removed screw will not be used 13 When the Cable Cover is installed remove it Removed Cable Cover and screw will not be used 1 Screw F 9 561 F 9 562 ...

Page 1281: ... 2 Edge Saddles 6 Wire Saddles 2 Connectors Wire Saddle Connector Wire Saddle Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable Signal Cable x2 x8 When the Cable Cover is not removed 2 Edge Saddles 5 Wire Saddles 2 Connectors x2 x7 Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Connector Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable Signal Cable F 9 563 F 9 564 When the Cable Cover is removed 15 Remove the 2 Wire Saddles Removed wire saddles w...

Page 1282: ... gasket from coming off when installing x2 18 Install the enclosed HDD Connection Plate to the HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Encryption Kit 4 Screws TP M3x6 enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Encryption Kit x4 19 Install the HDD Unit to the host machine 2 Screws F 9 567 F 9 568 Installing the LED Board 1 Install the LED Board small FK2 7400 or A LED 2 Screws TP M3x6 x2 2 Install the 2 wire saddles ...

Page 1283: ... the LED cable from being slacked off when closing the Controller Box Cable Guide Wire Saddle Edge Saddle LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin Connector x8 Wire Saddle A Wire Saddle Top side of the Controller Box F 9 571 Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board 1 Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board so that CHA and CHB are placed in the direction of the HDD slot 4 Screws TP M3x6 CAUTION Be ...

Page 1284: ...Edge Saddle Cable Retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddles x3 x4 STS Cable Power Cable Signal Cable 4 Install the Controller Cover 11 Screws F 9 573 5 Connect the cables to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board Signal Cable 450mm Red FK2 8435 or A Cont Sig Power Cable 430mm FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A...

Page 1285: ...e Saddle A x4 Edge Saddle F 9 575 CAUTION Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before performing the next procedure Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board are shown below Connect Slot 1 to CHA Originally installed HDD Connect Slot 2 to CHB New HDD Slot 2 HDD2 Slot 1 HDD1 CH B CH A Signal Cable Red Signal Cable Blue Power Cable Power Cable F ...

Page 1286: ...all the cables to correct positions x2 Signal Cable Power Cable 10 Connect the Signal Cable 80 mm Blue FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 and the Power Cable 80 mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to CHB on the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x2 Signal Cable Power Cable F 9 578 F 9 579 11 Connect the Signal Cable 80 mm Blue FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 and the Power Cable 80 mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to the second HD...

Page 1287: ...the host machine Wire Saddle Tag F 9 582 13 Close the HDD Lid 1 Screw 14 Place the Controller Box to the original position 2 Screws or 3 Screws 15 Install the removed cover and the cable Rear Cover 2 Screws 2 Rubber Caps Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw Reader Communication Cable when reader is installed Left Rear Cover 2 Screws 2 Rubber Caps 16 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOT...

Page 1288: ... CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used 2 Start up the SST 3 Click Register Firmware 4 Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set and click search 5 Click REGISTER 6 Click OK 4 Downloading the System Software 1 Click Start Assist Mode and click Initialize according to the instruction on the screen 2 When initialization is completed the machin...

Page 1289: ...ER OPTION FNC SW W RAID and set 0 3 To enable the setting value turn OFF ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine 4 Select Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW W RAID and set 1 5 To enable the setting value turn OFF ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation An error during the rebuild process th...

Page 1290: ...is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents Option HDD 1TB 1 HDD Support Pate X 1 2 HDD X 1 3 Vibration prevention Dumper X 4 4 ...

Page 1291: ...X 1 14 Mirroring Board or Encryption Board X 1 9 Signal Cable 340mm Red X 1 FK2 8434 or A HDD Sig1 10 Signal Cable 370mm Blue X 1 FK2 8441 or A HDD Sig2 FK2 8467 or A HDD Pow1 FM4 0840 or A LED Sig FK2 7400 or A LED FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 11 Power Cable 320mm X 1 12 LED Cable 290mm 7 pin X 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin X 1 F 9 586 24 Wire saddle Middle X 1 22 Wire saddle Small X 5 21 Edge S...

Page 1292: ...e in which no Encryption Board is installed 1 Execute the following service mode level 1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL HD CRYP Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned off before disconnecting the outlet Installa...

Page 1293: ...ion Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Make sure that A part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector A Connector Label F 9 590 2 Affix the gasket to the place shown in the figure below CAUTION Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label free metal surface of the HDD surface Gasket Screw hole HDD Connector side 3 Assemble the other Option HDD ...

Page 1294: ...Lower Cover Open the Right Upper Cover simultaneously 2 Open the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw RS tight M4 2 Screws TP M3 1 Claw Claw x3 F 9 592 F 9 593 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles 5 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 ...

Page 1295: ...moving and Installing the HDD Unit 6 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable 7 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 596 F 9 597 8 Remove the Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 1 Claw x2 claw 9 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 Screws x2 Harness F 9 598 F 9 599 ...

Page 1296: ...e FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Harness F 9 600 10 Remove the Controller Cover 11 Screws loosen F 9 601 11 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Fan Cable 1 Edge Saddle 3 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 602 ...

Page 1297: ...r and screw will not be used 1 Screw F 9 603 F 9 604 14 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable Removed Signal Cable and Power Cable will not be used When the Cable Cover is removed 2 Edge Saddles 6 Wire Saddles 2 Connectors Wire Saddle Connector Wire Saddle Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable Signal Cable x2 x8 When the Cable Cover is not removed 2 Edge Saddles 5 Wire Saddles 2 Connectors x2 ...

Page 1298: ...oved wire saddles will not be used 16 Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below 2 Screws x2 F 9 607 F 9 608 17 Remove the HDD 160GB installed as standard from the removed HDD Unit Removed HDD 160GB will not be used 2 Screws Removed screw will be used in step 18 x2 18 Install the Option HDD 1TB 2 Screws The screw removed in step 17 CAUTION Be sure to prevent the gasket from com...

Page 1299: ...e gasket from coming off when installing x2 20 Install the enclosed HDD Connection Plate to the HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Encryption Kit 4 Screws TP M3x6 enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Encryption Kit x4 21 Install the HDD Unit to the host machine 2 Screws F 9 611 F 9 612 Installing the LED Board 1 Install the LED Board small FK2 7400 or A LED 2 Screws TP M3x6 x2 2 Install the 2 wire saddles...

Page 1300: ... the LED cable from being slacked off when closing the Controller Box Cable Guide Wire Saddle Edge Saddle LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin Connector x8 Wire Saddle A Wire Saddle Top side of the Controller Box F 9 615 Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board 1 Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board so that CHA and CHB are placed in the direction of the HDD slot 4 Screws TP M3x6 CAUTION Be ...

Page 1301: ...Edge Saddle Cable Retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddles x3 x4 STS Cable Power Cable Signal Cable 4 Install the Controller Cover 11 Screws F 9 617 5 Connect the cables to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board Signal Cable 450mm Red FK2 8435 or A Cont Sig Power Cable 430mm FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A...

Page 1302: ...e Saddle A x4 Edge Saddle F 9 619 CAUTION Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before performing the next procedure Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board are shown below Connect Slot 1 to CHA Originally installed HDD Connect Slot 2 to CHB New HDD Slot 2 HDD2 Slot 1 HDD1 CH B CH A Signal Cable Red Signal Cable Blue Power Cable Power Cable F ...

Page 1303: ...all the cables to correct positions x2 Signal Cable Power Cable 10 Connect the Signal Cable 80 mm Blue FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 and the Power Cable 80 mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to CHB on the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x2 Signal Cable Power Cable F 9 622 F 9 623 11 Connect the Signal Cable 80 mm Blue FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 and the Power Cable 80 mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to the second HD...

Page 1304: ...the host machine Wire Saddle Tag F 9 626 13 Close the HDD Lid 1 Screw 14 Place the Controller Box to the original position 2 Screws or 3 Screws 15 Install the removed cover and the cable Rear Cover 2 Screws 2 Rubber Caps Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw Reader Communication Cable when reader is installed Left Rear Cover 2 Screws 2 Rubber Caps 16 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOT...

Page 1305: ...stem software in the PC on which the SST is used 2 Start up the SST 3 Click Register Firmware 4 Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set and click search 5 Click REGISTER 6 Click OK 4 Downloading the System Software 1 Click Start Assist Mode and click Initialize according to the instruction on the screen 2 When initialization is completed the machine is automatically restarted...

Page 1306: ... set 0 3 To enable the setting value turn OFF ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine 4 Select Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW W RAID and set 1 5 To enable the setting value turn OFF ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation An error during the rebuild process that is executed during opera...

Page 1307: ...ly Checking the Contents HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 6 Signal Cable 450mm Red X 1 FK2 8435 or A Cont Sig 3 Signal Cable 80mm Red X 1 FK2 8436 or A HDD Sig1 FM4 0842 or A STS Sig FM4 0839 or A LED Sig FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 4 Signal Cable 80mm Blue X 1 5 Power Cable 80mm X 2 FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 7 Power Cable 430mm X 1 FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow 1 LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin X 1 2 STS Cable 550mm ...

Page 1308: ...he main power after executing this service mode setting Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes E602 5001 procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board When this error occurs the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed 1 Execu...

Page 1309: ...over 1 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 1 Screw RS tight M4 2 Screws TP M3 1 Claw Claw x3 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles F 9 632 F 9 633 5 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Claws x2 x5 claw 6 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communicati...

Page 1310: ...and Power Supply Cable 7 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover 8 Remove the Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 1 Claw x2 claw F 9 636 F 9 637 9 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 Screws x2 Harness NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Harness F 9 639 F 9 638 ...

Page 1311: ... Cover 11 Screws loosen 11 Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Fan Cable 1 Edge Saddle 3 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 640 F 9 641 12 Open the HDD Lid 1 Screw Removed screw will not be used 13 When the Cable Cover is installed remove it Removed Cable Cover and screw will not be use...

Page 1312: ... Cable will not be used When the Cable Cover is removed 2 Edge Saddles 6 Wire Saddles 2 Connectors Wire Saddle Connector Wire Saddle Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable Signal Cable x2 x8 When the Cable Cover is not removed 2 Edge Saddles 5 Wire Saddles 2 Connectors x2 x7 Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Connector Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable Signal Cable F 9 644 F 9 645 When the Cable Cover is remo...

Page 1313: ... F 9 647 F 9 648 3 Connect the LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 7 Wire Saddles 1 Edge Saddle 1 Cable Guide 1 Connector CAUTION Be sure to tuck the A area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through the A area This is to prevent the A area of the LED cable from being slacked off when closing the Controller Box Cable Guide Wire Saddle Edge Saddle LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin Con...

Page 1314: ...yption Board is opposite to the case when the Removable HDD is installed If it is installed in a wrong direction the cables do not reach the board CHB CHA Direction of the HDD Slot x4 F 9 650 2 Connect the cables to the PCB on the backside Signal Cable 450mm Red FK2 8435 or A Cont Sig Power Cable 430mm FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig 3 Fix the cables 3...

Page 1315: ...M4 0839 or A LED Sig STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED Cable are not connected Therefore when installing the cables be sure that they are connected properly Power Cable Signal Cable STS Cable LED Cable x4 F 9 652 6 Install the Ring Core to the Power Supply Cable as shown in the figure 7 Fix the cables 3 Wire Saddle...

Page 1316: ...t 2 Blank Slot 1 HDD1 CH B CH A Signal Cable Red Signal Cable Blue Power Cable Power Cable F 9 654 8 Connect the Signal Cable 80 mm Red FK2 8436 or A HDD Sig1 and the Power Cable 80 mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to CHA on the Encryption Board x2 Signal Ccable Power Cable F 9 655 9 Connect the Signal Cable 80 mm Red FK2 8436 or A HDD Sig1 and the Power Cable 80 mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to the firs...

Page 1317: ...it is beyond the wire saddle toward the HDD side If returning the Controller Box while placing the cables and tags toward the PCB side they may interfere the fan on the host machine Wire Saddle Tag F 9 660 13 Close the HDD Lid 1 Screw 14 Place the Controller Box to the original position 2 Screws or 3 Screws 15 Install the removed cover and the cable Rear Cover 2 Screws 2 Rubber Caps Left Rear Sub ...

Page 1318: ...nstalled 2 Cross Ethernet Cable 2 Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1 If both PC and the machine are on turn them off 2 Connect the PC and the machine using an Ethernet cable 3 Turn on the PC 4 Start up the machine in download mode safe mode 3 Selecting the System Software 1 Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used 2 St...

Page 1319: ...is operating normally a security mark is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen Checking after Installation 1 Make sure that the LED blinks HDD1 Slot 1 The green LED blinks Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work When you have completed all installation work report to the system administrator for the following At the point when installation is completed make expl...

Page 1320: ...to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents Option HDD 1TB 1 HDD Support Pate X 1 2 HDD X 1 3 Vibration prevention Dumper X 4 4 Spacer X 4 5...

Page 1321: ...1 FK2 8463 or A HDD Pow2 15 LED Board Small X 1 14 Encryption Board X 1 9 Signal Cable 340mm Red X 1 FK2 8434 or A HDD Sig1 10 Signal Cable 370mm Blue X 1 FK2 8441 or A HDD Sig2 FK2 8467 or A HDD Pow1 FM4 0840 or A LED Sig FK2 7400 or A LED FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 11 Power Cable 320mm X 1 12 LED Cable 290mm 7 pin X 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin X 1 F 9 664 Use 2 of them Use 6 of them 24 Wire...

Page 1322: ...ial state in which no Encryption Board is installed 1 Execute the following service mode level 1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL HD CRYP Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned off before disconnecting the outlet ...

Page 1323: ... of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector A Connector Label F 9 668 2 Affix the gasket to the place shown in the figure below CAUTION Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label free metal surface of the HDD surface Gasket Screw hole HDD Connector side F 9 669 Removing and Installing the HDD Unit 1 Open the Right Lower Cover Open the Right Upper Cover simultaneous...

Page 1324: ...er is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles 5 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Claws x2 x5 claw F 9 672 F 9 673 6 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable 7 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 674 F 9 675 ...

Page 1325: ...nstalling the HDD Unit 8 Remove the Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 1 Claw x2 claw 9 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 Screws x2 Harness F 9 676 F 9 677 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Harness F 9 678 10 Remove the Controller Cover 11 Screws loosen F 9 679 ...

Page 1326: ...e the Signal Cable and the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Fan Cable 1 Edge Saddle 3 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle x2 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 680 12 Open the HDD Lid 1 Screw Removed screw will not be used 13 When the Cable Cover is installed remove it Removed Cable Cover and screw will not be used 1 Screw F 9 681 F 9 682 ...

Page 1327: ... 2 Edge Saddles 6 Wire Saddles 2 Connectors Wire Saddle Connector Wire Saddle Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable Signal Cable x2 x8 When the Cable Cover is not removed 2 Edge Saddles 5 Wire Saddles 2 Connectors x2 x7 Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Connector Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable Signal Cable F 9 683 F 9 684 When the Cable Cover is removed 15 Remove the 2 Wire Saddles Removed wire saddles w...

Page 1328: ...ed screw will be used in step 18 x2 18 Install the Option HDD 1TB 2 Screws The screw removed in step 17 CAUTION Be sure to prevent the gasket from coming off when installing x2 19 Install the HDD Unit to the host machine 2 Screws F 9 687 F 9 688 Installing the LED Board 1 Install the LED Board small FK2 7400 or A LED 2 Screws TP M3x6 x2 2 Install the 2 wire saddles and the edge saddle Edge Saddle ...

Page 1329: ...he A area of the LED cable from being slacked off when closing the Controller Box Cable Guide Wire Saddle Edge Saddle LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin Connector x8 Wire Saddle A Wire Saddle Top side of the Controller Box F 9 691 Installing the Encryption Board 1 Install the Encryption Board so that CHA and CHB are placed in the direction of the HDD slot 4 Screws TP M3x6 CAUTION Be sure that the direction of...

Page 1330: ...ge Saddle Cable Retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddles x3 x4 STS Cable Power Cable Signal Cable 4 Install the Controller Cover F 9 693 5 Connect the cables to the Encryption Board Signal Cable 450mm Red FK2 8435 or A Cont Sig Power Cable 430mm FK2 8463 or A Cont Pow LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig CAUTION The machine ca...

Page 1331: ...nused 2 wire saddles A and edge saddle Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Wire Saddle A x4 Edge Saddle F 9 695 CAUTION Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before performing the next procedure Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Encryption Board are shown below Keep Slot 2 in the condition where no HDD is installed and only connect the cables Connect Slot 1 to CHA Connect Slot 2 to CH...

Page 1332: ... 80 mm Red FK2 8436 or A HDD Sig1 and the Power Cable 80 mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to the first HDD Slot 1 CAUTION Install the cables to correct positions x2 Signal Cable Power Cable F 9 697 F 9 698 10 Connect the Signal Cable 80 mm Blue FK2 8438 or A HDD Sig2 and the Power Cable 80 mm FK2 8461 or A HDD Pow1 2 to CHB on the Encryption Board x2 Signal Cable Power Cable 11 Place the Signal Cable 8...

Page 1333: ... on the host machine Wire Saddle Tag F 9 702 F 9 701 13 Close the HDD Lid 1 Screw 14 Place the Controller Box to the original position 2 Screws or 3 Screws 15 Install the removed cover and the cable Rear Cover 2 Screws 2 Rubber Caps Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw Reader Communication Cable when reader is installed Left Rear Cover 2 Screws 2 Rubber Caps 16 If Reader is installed install the Reader Pow...

Page 1334: ...lation of the System Software of Host machine 1 If both PC and the machine are on turn them off 2 Connect the PC and the machine using an Ethernet cable 3 Turn on the PC 4 Start up the machine in download mode safe mode 3 Selecting the System Software 1 Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used 2 Start up the SST 3 Click Register Firmware 4 Select the driv...

Page 1335: ...is operating normally a security mark is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen Checking after Installation 1 Make sure that the LED blinks HDD1 Slot 1 The green LED blinks Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work When you have completed all installation work report to the system administrator for the following At the point when installation is completed make expl...

Page 1336: ...ecurity sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents Option HDD 160GB 1 HDD Support Pate X 1 2 HDD X 1 3 Vibration preven...

Page 1337: ...X 2 5 HDD Blanking Plate X 1 6 HDD Door Guide X 1 7 HDD Lock Plate X 1 9 HDD Lid Retainer X 1 10 Shutdown Caution Label X 1 11 Connector Fixing Block X 2 12 Conversion Connector X 2 F 9 706 Use 7 of them 16 HDD Drawer Unit x 1 17 Screw R round head TP M3x6 X 9 18 Screw P Tight M3x8 X 4 19 R HDD Label X 1 13 Signal Cable 660mm Red X 1 14 IV Cable X 1 15 Power Cable 650mm X 1 FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow ...

Page 1338: ...Mirroring Board or Encryption Board X 1 9 Signal Cable 340mm Red X 1 FK2 8434 or A HDD Sig1 10 Signal Cable 370mm Blue X 1 FK2 8441 or A HDD Sig2 FK2 8467 or A HDD Pow1 FM4 0840 or A LED Sig FK2 7400 or A LED FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 11 Power Cable 320mm X 1 12 LED Cable 290mm 7 pin X 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin X 1 F 9 708 Use 4 of them Use 6 of them 24 Wire saddle Middle X 1 22 Wire saddl...

Page 1339: ... When this error occurs the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed 1 Execute the following service mode level 1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL HD CRYP Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and ...

Page 1340: ...Cable 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles 5 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Claws x2 x5 claw F 9 712 F 9 713 6 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable 7 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook Hook Left Rear Sub Cover F...

Page 1341: ...DD Unit Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable 8 Remove the Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 1 Claw x2 claw 9 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 Screws x2 Harness F 9 716 F 9 717 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Harness F 9 718 10 Remove the Controller Cover 11 Screws loosen F 9 719 ...

Page 1342: ...Supply Cable 11 Remove the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Signal Cable and the Fan Cable 1 Edge Saddle 3 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle x1 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 720 12 Open the HDD Lid 1 Screw Removed screw will not be used 13 When the Cable Cover is installed remove it Removed Cable Cover and screw will not be used 1 Screw F 9 721 F...

Page 1343: ...2 Edge Saddles 6 Wire Saddles 1 Connectors Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable x1 x8 Connector When the Cable Cover is not installed 2 Edge Saddles 5 Wire Saddles 1 Connectors x1 x7 Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Connector Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable F 9 723 F 9 724 When the Cable Cover is removed 15 Remove the 2 Wire Saddles Removed wire saddles will not be used 16 Remove...

Page 1344: ...from the removed HDD Unit The removed HDD Fixation Plate and the screws will not be used The HDD 160GB installed as standard will be used in Disassembling Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine First HDD step1 2 Screws x2 F 9 727 Installing the Removable HDD Kit 1 Install the HDD Door Guide 2 Claws Claw x2 CAUTION Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate ...

Page 1345: ...Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Hinge Shaft Stoppers 3 Adjust the 2 bosses to the hole and install the HDD Lid Retainer 1 Screw TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw Hole Boss F 9 730 F 9 731 4 Remove the HDD Rear Cover Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used 2 Screws Removed screw will be used in step 5 x2 5 Install the HDD ...

Page 1346: ...Support Plate x4 2 Install the HDD Connector Plate first and then HDD to the HDD Support Plate Use the HDD and screws removed in previous step 4 Screws NOTE When tightening the screen be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate Anti vibration Damper F 9 735 F 9 734 x4 HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate CAUTION Assembl...

Page 1347: ...rsion Connector CAUTION Make sure that there is no opening between the Conversion Connector and part of HDD F 9 738 4 Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it 2 Screws P Tight M3x8 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Convers...

Page 1348: ... sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw 6 Install the HDD Handle 2 Screws TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 741 F 9 742 7 Affix the HDD No 1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 8 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number an...

Page 1349: ... screen be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate Anti vibration Damper F 9 745 x4 Option HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate Spacer Vibration prevention Dumpe F 9 746 CAUTION Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Install it in the p...

Page 1350: ...at there is no opening between the Conversion Connector and part of HDD F 9 749 4 Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it 2 Screws P Tight M3x8 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected p...

Page 1351: ...emovable HDD Kit as the TP screw 6 Install the HDD Handle 2 Screws TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 752 F 9 753 7 Affix the HDD No 2 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 8 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in the figure HDD...

Page 1352: ...dge Saddle Wire Saddles F 9 756 F 9 757 3 Connect the LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 7 Wire Saddles 1 Edge Saddle 1 Cable Guide 1 Connector CAUTION Be sure to tuck the A area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through the A area This is to prevent the A area of the LED cable from being slacked off when closing the Controller Box Cable Guide Wire Saddle Edge Saddle LED...

Page 1353: ...n Board is opposite to the case when the fixed HDD is installed If it is installed in a wrong direction the cables do not reach the board x4 CHB CHA Direction of the DC Controller PCB F 9 759 2 Connect the cables to the PCB on the backside Power Cable 650 mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable HDD Kit STS Cable 550 mm Light blue 5 pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig Included in the HDD Mirrorin...

Page 1354: ...r A Cont Sig Power Sable 650mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable HDD Kit LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED Cable are not connected Therefore when installing the cables be sure that they are connected properly LED Cable STS Cable Signal Cable x4 Power Cabl...

Page 1355: ...ution before performing the next procedure Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board are shown below Connect Slot 1 to CHA Originally installed HDD Connect Slot 2 to CHB New HDD Slot 2 HDD2 Slot 1 HDD1 CH A CH B Power Cable Signal Cable Red Signal Cable Blue Power Cable F 9 765 9 Connect the cable of the HDD Drawer Unit to the Mirroring Board or Encryp...

Page 1356: ...crews 2 Rubber Caps 13 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 B A Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles x2 14 Install the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Screws F 9 768 15 Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear ...

Page 1357: ...it enters download mode 3 Select the version to be downloaded and click Start 4 When download is completed the machine is automatically restarted 5 When writing of the firmware is completed the machine is automatically restarted 6 Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen When it is completed it is automatically restarted 7 Terminate the SST 8 Check the version of the downloaded...

Page 1358: ...mited to the rebuild process at the initial installation An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work Only when installing HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit When you have completed all installation work report to the system administrator for the following At the point when ins...

Page 1359: ... sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents Option HDD 1TB 1 HDD Support Pate X 1 2 HDD X 1 3 Vibration prevention Dump...

Page 1360: ...X 2 5 HDD Blanking Plate X 1 6 HDD Door Guide X 1 7 HDD Lock Plate X 1 9 HDD Lid Retainer X 1 10 Shutdown Caution Label X 1 11 Connector Fixing Block X 2 12 Conversion Connector X 2 F 9 771 Use 7 of them 16 HDD Drawer Unit x 1 17 Screw R round head TP M3x6 X 9 18 Screw P Tight M3x8 X 4 19 R HDD Label X 1 13 Signal Cable 660mm Red X 1 14 IV Cable X 1 15 Power Cable 650mm X 1 FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow ...

Page 1361: ...Mirroring Board or Encryption Board X 1 9 Signal Cable 340mm Red X 1 FK2 8434 or A HDD Sig1 10 Signal Cable 370mm Blue X 1 FK2 8441 or A HDD Sig2 FK2 8467 or A HDD Pow1 FM4 0840 or A LED Sig FK2 7400 or A LED FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 11 Power Cable 320mm X 1 12 LED Cable 290mm 7 pin X 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin X 1 F 9 773 Use 4 of them Use 6 of them 24 Wire saddle Middle X 1 22 Wire saddl...

Page 1362: ... When this error occurs the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed 1 Execute the following service mode level 1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL HD CRYP Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and ...

Page 1363: ...Cable 4 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles 5 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Claws x2 x5 claw F 9 777 F 9 778 6 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable 7 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook Hook Left Rear Sub Cover F...

Page 1364: ...DD Unit Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable 8 Remove the Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 1 Claw x2 claw 9 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 Screws x2 Harness F 9 781 F 9 782 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Harness F 9 783 10 Remove the Controller Cover 11 Screws loosen F 9 784 ...

Page 1365: ...Supply Cable 11 Remove the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Signal Cable and the Fan Cable 1 Edge Saddle 3 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle x1 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 785 12 Open the HDD Lid 1 Screw Removed screw will not be used 13 When the Cable Cover is installed remove it Removed Cable Cover and screw will not be used 1 Screw F 9 786 F...

Page 1366: ...Wire Saddles 1 Connectors Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable x1 x8 Connector When the Cable Cover is not installed 2 Edge Saddles 5 Wire Saddles 1 Connectors x1 x7 Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Connector Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable F 9 788 F 9 789 When the Cable Cover is removed 15 Remove the 2 Wire Saddles Removed wire saddles will not be used 16 Remove the HDD Unit by ...

Page 1367: ...g the Removable HDD Kit Installing the Removable HDD Kit 1 Install the HDD Door Guide 2 Claws Claw x2 CAUTION Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate F 9 793 F 9 792 2 Install the HDD Lock Plate 2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts 2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Hinge Shaft Stoppers F 9 794 ...

Page 1368: ...s to the hole and install the HDD Lid Retainer 1 Screw TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw Hole Boss F 9 795 4 Remove the HDD Rear Cover Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used 2 Screws Removed screw will be used in step 5 x2 5 Install the HDD Drawer Unit 2 Screws Use the screw removed in step 4 x2 F 9 796 F 9 797 ...

Page 1369: ...creen be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate Anti vibration Damper F 9 798 x4 Option HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate Spacer Vibration prevention Dumpe F 9 799 CAUTION Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Install it in the pos...

Page 1370: ...t there is no opening between the Conversion Connector and part of HDD F 9 802 4 Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it 2 Screws P Tight M3x8 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected pr...

Page 1371: ...uded in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw 6 Install the HDD Handle 2 Screws TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 805 F 9 806 7 Affix the HDD No 1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 8 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in t...

Page 1372: ...D 1 Assemble the second option HDD with same steps of Step 1 to Step 6 from the Assembling and Installing the Option HDD First HDD 2 Affix the HDD No 2 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 3 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in the figure HDD No XXXXXXXX Serial No F 9 809 4 Install the HDD to Slot 2 right s...

Page 1373: ...dge Saddle Wire Saddles F 9 811 F 9 812 3 Connect the LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 7 Wire Saddles 1 Edge Saddle 1 Cable Guide 1 Connector CAUTION Be sure to tuck the A area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through the A area This is to prevent the A area of the LED cable from being slacked off when closing the Controller Box Cable Guide Wire Saddle Edge Saddle LED...

Page 1374: ...n Board is opposite to the case when the fixed HDD is installed If it is installed in a wrong direction the cables do not reach the board x4 CHB CHA Direction of the DC Controller PCB F 9 814 2 Connect the cables to the PCB on the backside Power Cable 650 mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable HDD Kit STS Cable 550 mm Light blue 5 pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig Included in the HDD Mirrorin...

Page 1375: ...r A Cont Sig Power Sable 650mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable HDD Kit LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED Cable are not connected Therefore when installing the cables be sure that they are connected properly LED Cable STS Cable Signal Cable x4 Power Cabl...

Page 1376: ...ution before performing the next procedure Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board are shown below Connect Slot 1 to CHA Originally installed HDD Connect Slot 2 to CHB New HDD Slot 2 HDD2 Slot 1 HDD1 CH A CH B Power Cable Signal Cable Red Signal Cable Blue Power Cable F 9 820 9 Connect the cable of the HDD Drawer Unit to the Mirroring Board or Encryp...

Page 1377: ...crews 2 Rubber Caps 13 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part x2 B A Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles x2 14 Install the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Screws F 9 823 15 Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear ...

Page 1378: ...lect the version to be downloaded and click Start 4 When download is completed the machine is automatically restarted 5 When writing of the firmware is completed the machine is automatically restarted 6 Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen When it is completed it is automatically restarted 7 Terminate the SST 8 Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode Ch...

Page 1379: ... at the initial installation An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work Only when installing HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit When you have completed all installation work report to the system administrator for the following At the point when installation is completed make ...

Page 1380: ... make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents Removable HDD Kit Use 1 of them Use 1 of them Use 1 of them 1 Hinge Shaft Stopper X 2 2 HDD Handle X 2 3 HDD Connector Plate X 2 8 HDD Lock Plate Shaft X 2 4 HDD Cover X 2 5 HDD Blanking Plate X 1 6 HDD Door Guide X 1 7 HDD Lock Plate X 1 9 HDD Lid Retainer X 1 F 9 825 16 HDD Drawer Unit x 1 17 Screw R round head TP M3x6 X 9 ...

Page 1381: ... 1 FK2 8463 or A HDD Pow2 15 LED Board Small X 1 14 Encryption Board X 1 9 Signal Cable 340mm Red X 1 FK2 8434 or A HDD Sig1 10 Signal Cable 370mm Blue X 1 FK2 8441 or A HDD Sig2 FK2 8467 or A HDD Pow1 FM4 0840 or A LED Sig FK2 7400 or A LED FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 11 Power Cable 320mm X 1 12 LED Cable 290mm 7 pin X 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin X 1 F 9 827 Use 4 of them Use 6 of them 24 Wir...

Page 1382: ...n this error occurs the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed 1 Execute the following service mode level 1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL HD CRYP Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and the ...

Page 1383: ...When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles 5 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Claws x2 x5 claw F 9 831 F 9 832 6 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable 7 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 833 F...

Page 1384: ...Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable 8 Remove the Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 1 Claw x2 claw 9 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 Screws x2 Harness F 9 835 F 9 836 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Harness F 9 837 10 Remove the Controller Cover 11 Screws loosen F 9 838 ...

Page 1385: ...able 11 Remove the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Signal Cable and the Fan Cable 1 Edge Saddle 3 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle x1 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 839 12 Open the HDD Lid 1 Screw Removed screw will not be used 13 When the Cable Cover is installed remove it Removed Cable Cover and screw will not be used 1 Screw F 9 840 F 9 841 ...

Page 1386: ...addles 6 Wire Saddles 1 Connectors Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable x1 x8 Connector When the Cable Cover is not installed 2 Edge Saddles 5 Wire Saddles 1 Connectors x1 x7 Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Connector Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable F 9 842 F 9 843 When the Cable Cover is removed 15 Remove the 2 Wire Saddles Removed wire saddles will not be used 16 Remove the HDD...

Page 1387: ...nd the screws will not be used The HDD 160GB installed as standard will be used in Assembling and Installing the Removable HDD step1 2 Screws x2 Installing the Removable HDD Kit 1 Install the HDD Door Guide 2 Claws Claw x2 F 9 846 F 9 847 CAUTION Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate F 9 848 2 Install the HDD Lock Plate 2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts 2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers HDD Lock P...

Page 1388: ...ound end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw Hole Boss 4 Remove the HDD Rear Cover Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used 2 Screws Removed screw will be used in step 5 x2 F 9 850 F 9 851 5 Install the HDD Drawer Unit 2 Screws Use the screw removed in step 4 x2 Assembling and Installing the Removable HDD 1 Remove the HDD from the HDD Support Plate Use the installed HDD 160GB re...

Page 1389: ...nector Plate and HDD HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate Anti vibration Damper F 9 854 x4 HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate F 9 855 CAUTION Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate opposite dire...

Page 1390: ...nnector and install it 2 Screws P Tight M3x8 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly resulting in poor contact F 9 858 x2 Hole Boss F 9 859 5 Install the HDD Cover 1 Claw 1 Screw TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round ...

Page 1391: ...rew included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 7 Affix the HDD No 1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 8 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in the figure Serial No HDD No XXXXXXXX F 9 861 F 9 862 9 Install the HDD Blanking Plate to Slot 1 left side 2 Screws TP round end M3X6 x2 10 Install the HDD...

Page 1392: ...s F 9 865 F 9 866 3 Connect the LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 7 Wire Saddles 1 Edge Saddle 1 Cable Guide 1 Connector CAUTION Be sure to tuck the A area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through the A area This is to prevent the A area of the LED cable from being slacked off when closing the Controller Box Cable Guide Wire Saddle Edge Saddle LED Cable 1200mm 7 pin Co...

Page 1393: ...lled If it is installed in a wrong direction the cables do not reach the board x4 CHB CHA Direction of the DC Controller PCB F 9 868 2 Connect the cables to the PCB on the backside Power Cable 650 mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable HDD Kit STS Cable 550 mm Light blue 5 pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig Included in the HDD Encryption Kit 3 Fix the cables 3 Wire Saddles 1 Edge Saddle Cable ...

Page 1394: ...ow Included in the Removable HDD Kit LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED Cable are not connected Therefore when installing the cables be sure that they are connected properly LED Cable STS Cable Signal Cable x4 Power Cable F 9 870 F 9 871 8 Fix the cables 7 Wire Saddles 2...

Page 1395: ...F 9 873 CAUTION Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before performing the next procedure Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Encryption Board are shown below Keep Slot 1 in the condition where no HDD is installed and only connect the cables Connect Slot 1 to CHB Connect Slot 2 to CHA Power Cable Slot 2 HDD1 Slot 1 Blank CH A CH B Signal Cable Blue Power Cable Signal Cable ...

Page 1396: ...ion Cable when reader is installed Left Rear Cover 2 Screws 2 Rubber Caps 13 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part F 9 876 x2 B A Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles x2 14 Install the Right Rear Cover 1 3 Screws 15 Affix the...

Page 1397: ...Start 4 When download is completed the machine is automatically restarted 5 When writing of the firmware is completed the machine is automatically restarted 6 Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen When it is completed it is automatically restarted 7 Terminate the SST 8 Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode Checking the Security Version 1 Press the Coun...

Page 1398: ...rk when a failure occurs Completion of the Installation Work Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2 00 or 2 01 is indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version Maintenance of the Security Functions Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security ...

Page 1399: ... attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents Option HDD 1TB 1 HDD Support Pate X 1 2 HDD X 1 3 Vibration prevention Dumper X 4 4 Sp...

Page 1400: ... Plate Shaft X 2 4 HDD Cover X 2 5 HDD Blanking Plate X 1 6 HDD Door Guide X 1 7 HDD Lock Plate X 1 9 HDD Lid Retainer X 1 10 Shutdown Caution Label X 1 11 Connector Fixing Block X 2 12 Conversion Connector X 2 F 9 880 Use 6 of them Use 2 of them 16 HDD Drawer Unit x 1 17 Screw R round head TP M3x6 X 9 18 Screw P Tight M3x8 X 4 19 R HDD Label X 1 13 Signal Cable 660mm Red X 1 14 IV Cable X 1 15 Po...

Page 1401: ... 1 FK2 8463 or A HDD Pow2 15 LED Board Small X 1 14 Encryption Board X 1 9 Signal Cable 340mm Red X 1 FK2 8434 or A HDD Sig1 10 Signal Cable 370mm Blue X 1 FK2 8441 or A HDD Sig2 FK2 8467 or A HDD Pow1 FM4 0840 or A LED Sig FK2 7400 or A LED FM4 0843 or A STS Sig 11 Power Cable 320mm X 1 12 LED Cable 290mm 7 pin X 1 13 STS Cable 420mm Light blue 5 pin X 1 F 9 882 Use 4 of them Use 6 of them 24 Wir...

Page 1402: ...n this error occurs the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed 1 Execute the following service mode level 1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL HD CRYP Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine 2 Check that the display on the Control Panel and the ...

Page 1403: ...When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Power Cable 2 Connectors 2 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Guide x2 x2 Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles 5 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 5 Claws x2 x5 claw F 9 886 F 9 887 6 When the Reader is installed remove the Reader Communication Cable 7 Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover 1 Screw 1 Hook hook Left Rear Sub Cover F 9 888 F...

Page 1404: ...Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable 8 Remove the Rear Cover 2 Rubber Caps 2 Screws 1 Claw x2 claw 9 Open the Controller Box while avoiding the harness 2 Screws x2 Harness F 9 890 F 9 891 NOTE If the FAX Unit has been installed remove the 3 screws and open the Controller Box with the FAX Unit x3 Harness F 9 892 10 Remove the Controller Cover 11 Screws loosen F 9 893 ...

Page 1405: ...able 11 Remove the Power Cable CAUTION Do not remove the Signal Cable and the Fan Cable 1 Edge Saddle 3 Wire Saddles 1 Cable Retainer Cable Retainer Edge Saddle Wire Saddle x1 x4 Power Cable Signal Cable Fan Cable F 9 894 12 Open the HDD Lid 1 Screw Removed screw will not be used 13 When the Cable Cover is installed remove it Removed Cable Cover and screw will not be used 1 Screw F 9 895 F 9 896 ...

Page 1406: ...dles 1 Connectors Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable x1 x8 Connector When the Cable Cover is not installed 2 Edge Saddles 5 Wire Saddles 1 Connectors x1 x7 Wire Saddle Wire Saddle Connector Edge Saddle Edge Saddle Power Cable F 9 897 F 9 898 When the Cable Cover is removed 15 Remove the 2 Wire Saddles Removed wire saddles will not be used 16 Remove the HDD Unit by holding ...

Page 1407: ...t Installing the Removable HDD Kit 1 Install the HDD Door Guide 2 Claws Claw x2 CAUTION Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate F 9 902 F 9 901 2 Install the HDD Lock Plate 2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts 2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Shaft HDD Lock Plate Hinge Shaft Stoppers F 9 903 ...

Page 1408: ...all the HDD Lid Retainer 1 Screw TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw Hole Boss F 9 904 4 Remove the HDD Rear Cover Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used 2 Screws Removed screw will be used in step 5 x2 5 Install the HDD Drawer Unit 2 Screws Use the screw removed in step 4 x2 F 9 905 F 9 906 ...

Page 1409: ...ing the screen be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate Anti vibration Damper F 9 907 x4 Option HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Connector Plate Spacer Vibration prevention Dumpe F 9 908 CAUTION Assembling the option HDD be careful of the installation direction Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up Install it i...

Page 1410: ...he 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it 2 Screws P Tight M3x8 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly resulting in poor contact F 9 912 F 9 911 x2 Hole Boss 5 Install the HDD Cover ...

Page 1411: ...s the TP screw x2 7 Affix the HDD No 1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 8 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in the figure Serial No HDD No XXXXXXXX F 9 915 F 9 916 9 Install the HDD Blanking Plate to Slot 1 left side 2 Screws TP round end M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the R...

Page 1412: ...ge saddle Edge Saddle Wire Saddles F 9 919 F 9 920 3 Connect the LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig 7 Wire Saddles 1 Edge Saddle 1 Cable Guide 1 Connector CAUTION Be sure to tuck the A area of the LED cable under the other 2 cables running through the A area This is to prevent the A area of the LED cable from being slacked off when closing the Controller Box Cable Guide Wire Saddle Edge...

Page 1413: ... case when the fixed HDD is installed If it is installed in a wrong direction the cables do not reach the board x4 CHB CHA Direction of the DC Controller PCB F 9 922 2 Connect the cables to the PCB on the backside Power Cable 650 mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable HDD Kit STS Cable 550 mm Light blue 5 pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig Included in the HDD Encryption Kit 3 Fix the cables 3 ...

Page 1414: ...r Sable 650mm FK2 8464 or A Cont Pow Included in the Removable HDD Kit LED Cable 1200 mm 7 pin FM4 0839 or A LED Sig STS Cable 550mm Light blue 5 Pin FM4 0842 or A STS Sig CAUTION The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED Cable are not connected Therefore when installing the cables be sure that they are connected properly LED Cable STS Cable Signal Cable x4 Power Cable F 9 924 F 9 925...

Page 1415: ... Controller Box Wire Saddles A B F 9 927 CAUTION Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before performing the next procedure Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Encryption Board are shown below Keep Slot 1 in the condition where no HDD is installed and only connect the cables Connect Slot 1 to CHB Connect Slot 2 to CHA Power Cable Slot 2 HDD1 Slot 1 Blank CH A CH B Signal Cab...

Page 1416: ...b Cover 1 Screw Reader Communication Cable when reader is installed Left Rear Cover 2 Screws 2 Rubber Caps 13 If Reader is installed install the Reader Power Cable NOTE Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and make a slack at A part Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part F 9 930 x2 B A Connectors Reader Power Cable Cable Guide Wire Saddles x2 14 Install the Right R...

Page 1417: ...Start 4 When download is completed the machine is automatically restarted 5 When writing of the firmware is completed the machine is automatically restarted 6 Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen When it is completed it is automatically restarted 7 Terminate the SST 8 Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode Checking the Security Version 1 Press the Coun...

Page 1418: ...rk when a failure occurs Completion of the Installation Work Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2 00 or 2 01 is indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version Maintenance of the Security Functions Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security ...

Page 1419: ... Service Tools General Timing Chart General Circuit Diagram Backup Data Detail of HDD partition Soft counter specifications Removal Appendix ...

Page 1420: ...andard tools set the following special tools are required when servicing the machine Tool name Tool No Ctgr Appearance Remarks Digital multimeter FY9 2002 A Used as a probe extension when making electrical checks Door Switch TKN 0093 A Tester extension pin FY9 3038 A Tester extension pin L shaped FY9 3039 A Use for electrical checks ...

Page 1421: ...ng images Loupe CK 0056 B Used for checking images Cleaning tool A To clean the feed guide This is not a service tool 1 of this are enclosed at shipment of the host machine Tospearl 240 FY9 6007 000 B ITB Cleaning Blade Lubricant Reference Category A Must be kept by each service engineer B Must be kept by each group of about five engineers C Must be kept by each warkshop T 10 1 ...

Page 1422: ...6026 Lubricating oil Mineral oil paraffin family SUPER LUBE GREASE Tool No FY9 6005 Lubricating oil Lubrication e g drive areas friction areas Silicone oil FLOIL G 5000H GREASE Tool No FY9 6022 Lubricating oil EM 50L Lubrication e g gears Special oil Special solid lubricating agent Lithium soap Tool No HY9 0007 Lubricating oil Lubrication e g scanner rail SHC oil FLOIL G 337 Tool No FY9 6029 Condu...

Page 1423: ...着 系 作 像 系 Cassette 1 pickup motor Cassette 1 pickup solenoid Cassette 1 pre registration sensor Registration sensor Registration motor Fixing inlet sensor First Second delivery motor First delivery sensor Fixing motor Fixing heater Drum motor M Pre exposure LED M Primary charging AC bias M Developing DC bias M Developing motor M Primary transfer bias M Primary charging DC bias M Laser M Developing...

Page 1424: ...k Primary charging AC bias Bk Start key ON Imaging ready timing Printer unit Developing DC bias Bk Scanner motor Bk Developing motor Bk Image formation system Primary charging DC bias Bk Laser Bk Developing AC bias Bk Cassette 1 pickup motor Cassette 1 pickup solenoid Cassette 1 pre registration sensor Registration sensor Registration motor Fixing inlet sensor Pickup feed system First Second deliv...

Page 1425: ... FUSERM_LOCK GND EX1_SNS GND EX_TRAY1_FULL 5V 5V COOL_F_FAN_ON GND FM_SHUTM_A FM_SHUTM_A FM_SHUTM_B FM_SHUTM_B GND COOL_F_FAN_LOCK COOL_R_FAN_ON COOL_R_FAN_LOCK 24V EX_PAPER_FAN1_PWM GND 2ND_TR_EX_FAN_ON 2ND_TR_EX_FAN_LOCK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 11 21 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 2...

Page 1426: ...er Box Name Password Time until Document Auto Erase Print uponstoring from the printer driver HDD Clear Image data of User Box Confidential Fax Box and System Box Image Data HDD Clear Data File of Advanced Box HDD Clear Advanced box settings Advanced box account HDD Clear Network place setting information HDD Clear Box settings Image forms stored in the Form Composition mode HDD Clear Web browser ...

Page 1427: ...he SRAM MCON2 22 If the key information in the SRAM MCON2 is missing it is automatically recovered from the backup key in the HDD 21 22 When You change Main PCB 2 and HDD at the same time the automatic restoration of the key information is not performed 24 An error code is displayed when the TPM setting is ON After all data settings are initialized after restart select ON for the TPM setting to en...

Page 1428: ... Image data of User Box Confidential Fax Box and System Box Image Data HDD Clear Data File of Advanced Box HDD Clear Clear Advanced box settings Advanced box account HDD Clear Network place setting information HDD Clear Box settings Image forms stored in the Form Composition mode HDD Clear Web browser settings Web Access setting information HDD Clear MEAP settings MEAP application HDD Clear Licens...

Page 1429: ...settings User Box specification settings Register Box Name Password Time until Document Auto Erase Print uponstoring from the printer driver HDD Image data of User Box Confidential Fax Box and System Box Image Data HDD 29 Data File of Advanced Box HDD Advanced box settings Advanced box account HDD Clear Network place setting information HDD Box settings Image forms stored in the Form Composition m...

Page 1430: ...hod Switch 5 The following items are Deleted Function Settings Common Scan Settings Scanner Noise Settings Function Settings Common Scan Settings Timing to Raise Feeder Tray Function Settings Common Scan Settings Streak Prevention 22 If the key information in the SRAM MCON2 is missing it is automatically recovered from the backup key in the HDD 21 22 When You change Main PCB 2 and HDD at the same ...

Page 1431: ...Box settings User Box specification settings Register Box Name Password Time until Document Auto Erase Print uponstoring from the printer driver HDD Yes 13 Remote UI Bacup Restore PC USB HDD Image data of User Box Confidential Fax Box and System Box Image Data HDD Yes 13 Remote UI Bacup Restore PC USB HDD Data File of Advanced Box HDD Yes 13 16 Remote UI Bacup Restore PC USB HDD 15 Advanced box se...

Page 1432: ...6 When ON is selected for the authentication management of Advanced Box Advanced Box account needs to be exported in advance and imported at restoration 18 Only favorites of web browser can be backed improves when You perform individual export of RUI 19 Only when MEAP applications have a backup function 23 No means is available to back up externally 27 Backup only against TPM PCB failure is possib...

Page 1433: ...int uponstoring from the printer driver HDD No Yes 1 USB memory Image data of User Box Confidential Fax Box and System Box Image Data HDD No Yes 1 USB memory Data File of Advanced Box HDD No Yes USB memory Advanced box settings Advanced box account HDD Yes Yes 1 9 SST Meapback USB memory PC Network place setting information HDD No Yes 1 USB memory Box settings Image forms stored in the Form Compos...

Page 1434: ... available in the event of an HDD failure it is assumed that MEAP applications can be backed up using SST in some cases In that case the data can be recovered with the information of the MEAP applications maintained by checking that the machine starts normally after installation of the system after replacement of the HDD starting the machine in download mode in safe mode and restoring the backup d...

Page 1435: ...ntenance Function Settings Common Paper Feed Settings Paper Drawer Auto Selection On Off Print Settings Local Print Default Settings Form for Superimpose Image Secure Watermark Settings Adust Background Character Contrast Printer Send Output Report TX RX User Data List Fax User Data List E Mail I Fax Settings Communication Settings Receive Forward Output Report Common Settings Forwarding Settings ...

Page 1436: ... key certificate PDF dictionary RUI contents voice dictionary ICC profile PS test data Disabled 11 One APL_MEAP MEAP Enabled 12 One APL_SEND Address book Setting for Forwarding Disabled 13 One APL_KEEP MEAP stored data Disabled 14 One APL_LOG System log storage area Enabled 15 One CRBDEV Advanced Box area Enabled 16 One APL_CDS Area for distribution server Enabled Selecting CHK TYPE1 means selecti...

Page 1437: ...er bottle magenta 074 Toner bottle cyan 081 Toner bottle black Remove the toner bottle black 082 Toner bottle yellow Remove the toner bottle yellow 083 Toner bottle magenta Remove the toner bottle magenta 084 Toner bottle cyan Remove the toner bottle cyan 101 Total 1 102 Total 2 103 Total large 104 Total small 105 Total full color2 106 Total full color2 108 Total black and white 1 109 Total black ...

Page 1438: ...ll 209 Local copy Total 1 210 Local copy Total 2 No Counter Details 211 Local copy large 212 Local copy small 217 Copy full color 1 218 Copy full color 2 219 Copy mono color 1 220 Copy mono color 2 221 Copy black and white 1 222 Copy black and white 2 223 Copy full color large 224 Copy full color small 225 Copy mono color large 226 Copy mono color small 227 Copy black and white large 228 Copy blac...

Page 1439: ...lack and white large 320 Print black and white small 321 Print full color mono color large 322 Print full color mono color small No Counter Details 323 Print full color mono color 2 324 Print full color mono color 1 325 Print full color large double sided 326 Print full color small double sided 327 Print mono color large double sided 328 Print mono color small double sided 329 Print black and whit...

Page 1440: ... black and white small double sided No Counter Details 631 memory media print Total 1 632 memory media print Total 2 633 memory media print large 634 memory media print small 635 memory media print full color 1 636 memory media print full color 2 639 memory media print black and white 1 640 memory media print black and white 2 641 memory media print full color large 642 memory media print full col...

Page 1441: ...lor large double sided 772 Mobile Print full color small double sided 773 Mobile Print black and white large double sided 774 Mobile Print black and white small double sided 801 Report print Total 1 802 Report print Total 2 803 Report print large 804 Report print small 805 Report print full color 1 806 Report print full color 2 809 Report print black and white 1 810 Report print black and white 2 ...

Page 1442: ...he machine is removed disable the MEAP application and uninstall it in advance Performing Initialize All Data Settings does not delete the license of the system option It takes approx 30 minutes to delete user data when the standard HDD is installed Estimated time Deletion of Service Mode Settings The user mode setting values may have been changed at the user s request In that case the service mod...

Page 1443: ...umber ZZZ99999 Device Name iR ADV 8205 iA8205 Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode Once with Random Data 1 The following data stored in the device has been completely erased Data stored in the temporary data area User generated data Settings under Settings Registration restored to factory defaults 1 display following one Once with 0 Null Data Once with Random Data 3 Times with Random Data 9 Times wi...

Reviews:

No comments